page position: 1 job: @zeta. ... · pdf filepage position: 2 job: @zeta. 14kl-126-eng-aa/div

PAGE POSITION: 1 JOB: @zeta.tweddle.com/InfoShareAuthoroChrysler/CLS_InfoShareAuthoroChrysler/GRP_Owners_Manual/JOB_1461427-en-2014_CHEROKEE_EE+14KL-126-ENG-AA/DIV_Owners_Manual_v2

Table of Contents1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

1


2


1INTRODUCTION

• INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4• ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5• IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5• HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6• WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8• VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8• VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

3


INTRODUCTIONCongratulations on selecting your new ChryslerGroup LLC vehicle. Be assured that it repre-sents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-ing, and high quality - all essentials that aretraditional to our vehicles.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can goplaces and perform tasks that conventionalpassenger cars are not intended. It handles andmaneuvers differently from many passengercars both on-road and off-road, so take time tobecome familiar with your vehicle.

The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle wasdesigned for on-road use only. It is not intendedfor off-road driving or use in other severe con-ditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read theOwner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Besure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,particularly those used for braking, steering,and transmission and power transfer unit shift-

ing. Learn how your vehicle handles on differentroad surfaces. Your driving skills will improvewith experience, but as in driving any vehicle,take it easy as you begin. When driving off-roador working the vehicle, don’t overload it orexpect it to overcome the forces of nature.Always observe local laws wherever you drive.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or a collision. Be sure to read the“On-Road/ Off-Road Driving Tips” in “StartingAnd Operating” for further information.

NOTE:After reviewing the owner information, itshould be stored in the vehicle for conve-nient referencing and remain with the ve-hicle when sold.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or a collision.

Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds orwhile intoxicated may result in loss of control,

collision with other vehicles or objects, going offthe road, or overturning; any of which may leadto serious injury or death. Also, failure to useseat belts subjects the driver and passengers toa greater risk of injury or death.

To keep your vehicle running at its best, haveyour vehicle serviced at recommended intervalsby an authorized dealer or distributor who hasthe qualified personnel, special tools and equip-ment to perform all service.

The manufacturer and its distributors are vitallyinterested in your complete satisfaction with thisvehicle. If you encounter a service or warrantyproblem which is not resolved to your satisfac-tion, discuss the matter with your authorizeddealer or distributor’s management.

Your authorized dealer or distributor will behappy to assist you with any questions aboutyour vehicle.

4


ROLLOVER WARNINGUtility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles. Thisvehicle has a higher ground clearance and ahigher center of gravity than many passengercars. It is capable of performing better in a widevariety of off-road applications. Driven in anunsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of con-trol. Because of the higher center of gravity, ifthis vehicle is out of control it may roll over whensome other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,or other unsafe driving actions that can causeloss of vehicle control. Failure to operate thisvehicle safely may result in a collision, rolloverof the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drivecarefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seatbelts provided is a major cause of severe orfatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

IMPORTANT NOTICEALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI-CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFOR-MATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICA-TION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVEDTO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared withthe assistance of service and engineering spe-cialists to acquaint you with the operation andmaintenance of your new vehicle. It is supple-mented by a Warranty Information Booklet andvarious customer-oriented documents. You areurged to read these publications carefully. Fol-lowing the instructions and recommendations inthis Owner’s Manual will help assure safe andenjoyable operation of your vehicle.

After you have read the Owner’s Manual, itshould be stored in the vehicle for convenientreference and remain with the vehicle whensold.

The manufacturer reserves the right to makechanges in design and specifications, and/or tomake additions to or improvements in its prod-ucts without imposing any obligations uponitself to install them on products previouslymanufactured.

The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describesthe features that are standard or available asextra cost options. Therefore, some of theequipment and accessories in this publicationmay not appear on your vehicle.

Rollover Warning Label

5


NOTE:Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual firstbefore driving your vehicle and before at-taching or installing parts/accessories ormaking other modifications to the vehicle.

In view of the many replacement parts andaccessories from various manufacturers avail-able on the market, the manufacturer cannot becertain that the driving safety of your vehicle willnot be impaired by the attachment or installationof such parts. Even if such parts are officially-approved (for example, by a general operatingpermit for the part or by constructing the part inan officially approved design), or if an individualoperating permit was issued for the vehicle afterthe attachment or installation of such parts, itcannot be implicitly assumed that the drivingsafety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore,neither experts nor official agencies are liable.The manufacturer only assumes responsibilitywhen parts, which are expressly authorized or

recommended by the manufacturer, are at-tached or installed at an authorized dealer. Thesame applies when modifications to the originalcondition are subsequently made on the manu-facturer’s vehicles.

Your warranties do not cover any part that themanufacturer did not supply. Nor do they coverthe cost of any repairs or adjustments that mightbe caused or needed because of the installationor use of non-manufacturer parts, components,equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do yourwarranties cover the costs of repairing damageor conditions caused by any changes to yourvehicle that do not comply with the manufactur-ers specifications.

Original Mopar® parts and accessories andother products approved by the manufacturer,including qualified advice, are available at yourauthorized dealer.

When it comes to service, remember that yourauthorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has

the factory-trained technicians and genuineMopar® parts, and is interested in your satis-faction.

Copyright © 2013 Chrysler International.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALConsult the Table of Contents to determinewhich section contains the information you de-sire.

Since the specification of your vehicle dependson the items of equipment ordered, certaindescriptions and illustrations may differ fromyour vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’sManual contains a complete listing of all sub-jects.

Consult the following table for a description ofthe symbols that may be used on your vehicle orthroughout this Owner’s Manual:

6


7


WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGSagainst operating procedures that could resultin a collision or bodily injury. It also containsCAUTIONS against procedures that could re-sult in damage to your vehicle. If you do notread this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warningsand Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) isfound on the left front corner of the instrumentpanel. The VIN is visible from outside of thevehicle through the windshield. The VIN numberalso is stamped into the right front body, on theright front seat cross member (visible throughan opening in the carpet) and appears on theAutomobile Information Disclosure Label affixedto a window on your vehicle, the vehicle regis-tration, and the title.

NOTE:It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this ve-hicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-ness and safety and may lead to a collisionresulting in serious injury or death.

Vehicle Identification Number

Right Front Body VIN Location

8


2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTINGYOUR VEHICLE

• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12• Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13• Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

• SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14• Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15• Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

• VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .16• To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16• To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16• Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

• ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17• REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

• To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18• To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19• Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

9


• Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

• DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21• Manual Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21• Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22• Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . .22

• KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23• WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

• Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

• LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28• Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

• OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30• Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33• Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35• Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36• Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . .36• Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37• Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37• Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . .37• Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . .38• Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40• Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42• Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47• Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

10


• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60• SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

• Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60• Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60• Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . .61• Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . .62

11


A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses either a key start ignitionsystem or keyless ignition system. The key startignition system consists of a either a bladed keywith an immobilizer chip in it, or a Key Fob withRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and anIgnition Node Module (IGNM). The keyless ig-nition system consists of a Key Fob with Re-mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and aKeyless Ignition Node (KIN).

Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — IfEquippedThe Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similarto an ignition switch. It has four operating posi-tions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, andON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loadedmomentary contact position. When released fromthe START position, the switch automatically re-turns to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) will display the ignition switchposition (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) — IfEquipped” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)This feature allows the driver to operate theignition switch with the push of a button, as longas the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitteris in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four oper-ating positions, three of which are labeled andwill illuminate when in position. The three posi-tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourthposition is START, during start RUN will illumi-nate.

NOTE:In case the ignition switch does not changewith the push of a button, the RKE transmit-ter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead bat-tery. In this situation a back up method canbe used to operate the ignition switch. Putthe nose side (side opposite of the emer-gency key) of the Key Fob against the EN-GINE START/STOP button and push to oper-ate the ignition switch.

Ignition Node Module (IGNM)

1 — OFF2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON/RUN4 — START

12


Key Fob — If EquippedThe Key Fob also contains the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key,which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into thevehicle should the battery in the vehicle or theKey Fob go dead. You can keep the emergencykey with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the me-chanical latch on the face of the Key Fobsideways with your thumb and then pull the keyout with your other hand.

NOTE:You can insert the double-sided emergencykey into the lock cylinders with either side up.

Ignition Or Accessory On MessageOpening the driver’s door when the ignition is inACC or ON (engine not running), a chime willsound to remind you to place the ignition in theOFF position. In addition to the chime, theignition or accessory on message will display inthe cluster.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)

1 — OFF2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON/RUN

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)

Emergency Key Removal (KIN)

13


NOTE:With the Uconnect® system, the power win-dow switches, radio, power sunroof (ifequipped), and power outlets will remain ac-tive for up to 10 minutes after the ignition iscycled to the OFF position. Opening eitherfront door will cancel this feature. The time forthis feature is programmable. Refer to“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe Key Fob from the vehicle and lock yourvehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number of rea-sons. A child or others could be seriouslyor fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A childcould operate power windows, other con-trols, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves.Always remove key from the ignition and lockall doors when leaving the vehicle unat-tended.

SENTRY KEY®The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system preventsunauthorized vehicle operation by disabling theengine. The system does not need to be armedor activated. Operation is automatic, regardlessof whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob withRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter andWireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthor-ized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobsthat are programmed to the vehicle can be used tostart and operate the vehicle. The system will shutthe engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fobis used to start the engine.

14


After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on forthree seconds for a bulb check. If the lightremains on after the bulb check, it indicates thatthere is a problem with the electronics. In addi-tion, if the light begins to flash after the bulbcheck, it indicates that someone used an invalidKey Fob to start the engine. Either of theseconditions will result in the engine being shut offafter two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on duringnormal vehicle operation (vehicle running forlonger than 10 seconds), it indicates that thereis a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,have the vehicle serviced as soon as possibleby an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

• Do not make modifications or alterations tothe immobilizer system. Modifications oralterations to the immobilization systemmay result in a loss of security protection.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system isnot compatible with some aftermarket re-mote starting systems. Use of these sys-tems may result in vehicle starting prob-lems and loss of security protection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your newvehicle have been programmed to the vehicleelectronics.

Replacement KeysNOTE:Only Key Fobs that are programmed to thevehicle electronics can be used to start andoperate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob isprogrammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-grammed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Key Fobs from thevehicle and lock all doors when leaving thevehicle unattended.

• With Keyless Enter-N-Go™, always re-member to place the ignition in the OFFposition.

At the time of purchase, the original owner isprovided with a four-digit Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure loca-tion. This number is required for authorizeddealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication ofKey Fobs may be performed at an authorizeddealer.

NOTE:When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizersystem serviced, bring all vehicle ignitionkeys with you to an authorized dealer.

15


Customer Key ProgrammingProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmittersmay be performed at an authorized dealer.

General InformationThe Sentry Key® operates on a carrier fre-quency of 433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key® Im-mobilizer system will be used in the followingEuropean countries, which apply Directive1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic,Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Nether-lands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,Russian Federation, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,Switzerland, Slovenia, Croatia, and UnitedKingdom.

Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence.

• This device must accept any interferencethat may be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —IF EQUIPPEDThis Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the ve-hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and ignition for unau-thorized operation. While the Vehicle SecurityAlarm is armed, interior switches for door locksand liftgate release are disabled. If somethingtriggers the Vehicle Security Alarm the horn willsound for 29 seconds and turn off all of thevisual signals after an additional 31 seconds. Ifthe triggering device is not deactivated, the hornwill sound again after a five second delay foranother 29 seconds. If the trigger remains pres-ent, this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes.

To Arm The SystemFollow these steps to arm the Vehicle SecurityAlarm:

1. Remove the key from the ignition system(refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting AndOperating" for further information).

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition systemis "OFF".

• For vehicles not equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignitionsystem is "OFF" and the key is physicallyremoved from the ignition.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lockthe vehicle:

• Press LOCK on the interior power door lockswitch with the driver and/or passenger dooropen.

• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Pas-sive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fobavailable in the same exterior zone (refer to"Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To KnowBefore Starting Your Vehicle" for furtherinformation).

• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Key-less Entry (RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The SystemThe Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmedusing any of the following methods:

• Press the UNLOCK button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

16


• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handlewith a valid Key Fob available in the sameexterior zone (if equipped), refer to "KeylessEnter-N-Go™ " in "Things To Know BeforeStarting Your Vehicle" for further information.

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of theOFF position.• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go™ , press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™Start/Stop button (requires at least onevalid Key Fob in the vehicle).

• For vehicles not equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™ , insert a valid key into theignition switch and turn the key to the ONposition.

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder and theliftgate button on the RKE transmittercannot arm or disarm the Vehicle SecurityAlarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remainsarmed during power liftgate entry. Press-ing the liftgate button will not disarm theVehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters

the vehicle through the liftgate and opensany door the alarm will sound.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm isarmed, the interior power door lockswitches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro-tect your vehicle; however, you can createconditions where the system will give you afalse alarm. If one of the previously describedarming sequences has occurred, the VehicleSecurity Alarm will arm regardless of whetheryou are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in thevehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. Ifthis occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and thebattery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Se-curity Alarm will remain armed when the batteryis reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, thehorn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Ve-hicle Security Alarm.

Security System Manual OverrideThe Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if youlock the doors using the manual door lockplunger.

ILLUMINATED ENTRYThe courtesy lights will turn on when you usethe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter tounlock the doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lightingin the outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to“Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle” for further information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30seconds or they will immediately fade to offonce the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUNfrom the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console anddoor courtesy lights do not turn on if thedimmer control is in the �Dome ON� posi-tion (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not op-erate if the dimmer control is in the“Dome defeat” position (extreme bottomposition).

17


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY(RKE)The RKE system allows you to lock or unlockthe doors, open the power liftgate, or activatethe Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi-mately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fobwith RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter doesnot need to be pointed at the vehicle to activatethe system.

NOTE:Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and abovedisables the system from responding to allRKE transmitter buttons for all RKE trans-mitters.

To Unlock The Doors And LiftgatePress and release the UNLOCK button on theRKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s dooror twice within five seconds to unlock all doorsand liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash toacknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminatedentry system will also turn on.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for fur-ther information.

1st Press Of Key Fob UnlocksThis feature lets you program the system tounlock either the driver’s door or all doors on thefirst press of the UNLOCK button on the RKEtransmitter. To change the current setting, referto “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

Flash Lights With Remote KeyThis feature will cause the turn signal lights toflash when the doors are locked or unlockedwith the RKE transmitter. This feature can beturned on or turned off. To change the current



18


setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.

Headlight Illumination On ApproachThis feature activates the headlights for up to 90seconds when the doors are unlocked with theRKE transmitter. The time for this feature isprogrammable on vehicles equipped throughUconnect®. To change the current setting, referto “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

To Lock The Doors And LiftgatePress and release the LOCK button on the RKEtransmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turnsignal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for fur-ther information.

Programming AdditionalTransmittersProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmittersmay be performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery ReplacementThe recommended replacement battery is oneCR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handlingmay apply.

• Do not touch the battery terminals thatare on the back housing or the printedcircuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding themechanical latch on the back of the RKE trans-mitter sideways with your thumb and then pullthe key out with your other hand.



19


2. Separating RKE halves requires screw re-moval and gently prying the two halves of theRKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to dam-age the seal during removal.

3. Remove the battery by turning the backcover over (battery facing downward) and tap-ping it lightly on a solid surface such as a tableor similar, then replace the battery. When re-placing the battery, match the + sign on thebattery to the + sign on the inside of the batteryclip, located on the back cover. Avoid touchingthe new battery with your fingers. Skin oils maycause battery deterioration. If you touch a bat-tery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snapthe two halves together.

General InformationThe RKE transmitter and receivers operate on acarrier frequency of 433.92 MHz as required byEEC regulations. These devices must be certi-fied to conform to specific regulations in eachindividual country. Two sets of regulations areinvolved: ETS (European TelecommunicationStandard) 300–220, which most countries use,and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125,which is based on ETC 300–220 but has addi-tional unique requirements. Other defined re-quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS-

Remove Screw From Transmitter Case

Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM)Transmitter Case

Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)Transmitter Case

20


SION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from anormal distance, check for these two condi-tions:

1. Weak battery in RKE transmitter. The ex-pected life of the battery is a minimum of threeyears.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as aradio station tower, airport transmitter, andsome mobile or CB radios.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door LocksTo lock each door, rotate the door lock knob oneach door trim panel forward. To unlock thefront doors, pull the inside door handle to thefirst detent or rotate the door lock button untilthe red indicator is visible. To unlock the reardoors, rotate the door lock button until the redindicator is visible.

If the door lock button is locked (no red indicatorvisible) when you shut the door, the door willlock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is notinside the vehicle before closing the door.

NOTE:The manual door locks will not lock or un-lock the liftgate.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in theevent of a collision, lock the vehicle doorsbefore you drive as well as when you parkand leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe Key Fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildren to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A childor others could be seriously or fatally injured.Children should be warned not to touch theparking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A childcould operate power windows, other con-trols, or move the vehicle.

21


Power Door LocksA power door lock switch is located on each ofthe front door trim panels. Use this switch tolock or unlock the doors and liftgate.

The doors can also be locked and unlocked withthe Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) sys-tem. For further information, refer to “KeylessEnter-N-Go™ ” in “Things To Know BeforeStarting Your Vehicle”.

If you press the power door lock switch while theignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, andany front door is open, the power locks will notoperate. This prevents you from accidentally

locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Place theignition to the OFF position or closing the doorwill allow the locks to operate. If a door is open,and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUNposition, a chime will sound as a reminder toremove the Key Fob.

Automatic Door Locks — If EquippedThe auto door lock feature default condition isenabled. When enabled, the door locks will lockautomatically when the vehicle’s speed ex-ceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lockfeature can be enabled or disabled by yourauthorized dealer per written request of thecustomer. Please see your authorized dealer forservice.

Automatic Unlock Doors On ExitThe doors will unlock automatically on vehicleswith power door locks if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit featureis enabled.

2. All doors are closed.

3. The transmission shift lever was not inPARK, then is placed in PARK.

4. Any door is opened.

Automatic Unlock Doors On ExitProgrammingTo change the current setting, refer to“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exitfeature in accordance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door Lock System— Rear DoorsTo provide a safer environment for small chil-dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors areequipped with a Child-Protection Door Locksystem.

To use the system, open each rear door, use aflat blade screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotatethe dial to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.When the system on a door is engaged, thatdoor can only be opened by using the outsidedoor handle even if the inside door lock is in theunlocked position.

Power Door Lock Switch

22


NOTE:

• When the child lock system is engaged,the door can be opened only by using theoutside door handle even though the in-side door lock is in the unlocked position.

• After disengaging the Child-ProtectionDoor Lock system, always test the doorfrom the inside to make certain it is in thedesired position.

• After engaging the Child-Protection DoorLock system, always test the door fromthe inside to make certain it is in thedesired position.

• For emergency exit with the system en-gaged, move the lock knob up (unlockedposition), roll down the window, and openthe door with the outside door handle.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in acollision. Remember that the rear doors canonly be opened from the outside when theChild-Protection locks are engaged.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™The Passive Entry system is an enhancementto the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™.This feature allows you to lock and unlock thevehicle’s door(s) without having to press theRKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it hasbeen raining on the Passive Entry doorhandle, the unlock sensitivity can be af-fected, resulting in a slower response time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by the PassiveEntry Door Handle and no door goes ajarwithin 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lockand if equipped will arm the theft alarm.

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle,grab the front driver door handle to unlock thedriver’s door automatically.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

23


NOTE:If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmedall doors will unlock when you grab hold of thefront driver’s door handle. To select between“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “UnlockAll Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Uconnect® Set-tings” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle,grab the front passenger door handle to unlockall four doors and the liftgate automatically.

NOTE:All doors will unlock when the front passen-ger door handle is grabbed regardless of thedriver’s door unlock preference setting(“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “UnlockAll Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of PassiveEntry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionallylocking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter insideyour vehicle, the Passive Entry system isequipped with an automatic door unlock featurewhich will function if the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with pas-sive entry. There are three situations that triggera FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entryvehicle.

1. A lock request is made by a valid PassiveEntry RKE transmitter while a door is ajar.

2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entrydoor handle while a door is ajar.

3. A lock request is made by the door panelswitch while the door is ajar.

When any of these situations occur, after all ajardoors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will beexecuted. If it finds a Passive Entry RKE trans-mitter inside the car and it does not find anyPassive Entry RKE transmitters outside the car,then the car will unlock and alert the customer.

NOTE:The vehicle will only unlock the doors whena valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter isdetected inside the vehicle, and no validPassive Entry RKE transmitter is detectedoutside the vehicle. The vehicle will notunlock the doors when any of the followingconditions are true:

• The doors are manually locked using thedoor lock knobs

• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE trans-mitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft(1.5 m) of either Passive Entry doorhandle

• Three attempts are made to lock thedoors using the door panel switch andthen close the doors

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is builtinto the electronic liftgate release. With a validPassive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m)of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgate re-lease for a power open on vehicles equipped

24


with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgaterelease and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.

NOTE:If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgatewill open with the handle and no RKE Trans-mitter is required.

NOTE:If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-grammed in EVIC, all doors will unlock whenyou push the electronic liftgate release. If�Unlock Driver Door 1st press� is pro-grammed in Uconnect®, only the liftgate willunlock when you press the electronic lift-gate release. For further information, refer to“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel”.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKEtransmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver orpassenger front door handles, press the doorhandle LOCK button to lock all four doors.

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressingthe door handle lock button. This could unlockthe door(s).

Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate PassiveEntry Location

Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

25


NOTE:

• After pressing the door handle LOCK but-ton, you must wait two seconds beforeyou can lock or unlock the doors, usingeither Passive Entry door handle. This isdone to allow you to check if the vehicle islocked by pulling the door handle, withoutthe vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system will not operateif the RKE transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by usingthe lock button located on the vehicle’s interiordoor panel.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate From TheRear

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press thepassive entry lock button located to the right ofelectronic liftgate button.

WINDOWS

Power WindowsThe window controls on the driver’s door controlall the door windows.

There are single window controls on each pas-senger door trim panel, which operate the pas-senger door windows. The window controls willoperate only when the ignition is in the ACC orON/RUN position.

NOTE:For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®,the power window switches will remain ac-tive for up to 10 minutes after the ignition iscycled to the OFF position. Opening eitherfront door will cancel this feature. The timeis programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Set-tings” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,and do not let children play with power win-dows. Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ inthe ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, par-ticularly unattended children, can become en-trapped by the windows while operating thepower window switches. Such entrapment mayresult in serious injury or death.

Power Window Switches

26


AUTO-Down FeatureThe driver door power window switch and somemodel passenger door power window switcheshave an AUTO-down feature. Press the windowswitch to the second detent, release, and thewindow will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, press the windowswitch to the first detent and release it when youwant the window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way downduring the AUTO-down operation, pull up on theswitch briefly.

AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-PinchProtectionLift the window switch to the second detent, re-lease, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way upduring the AUTO operation, push down on theswitch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the windowswitch to the first detent and release it when youwant the window to stop.

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle dur-ing auto-closure, it will reverse directionand then go back down. Remove the ob-stacle and use the window switch again toclose the window.

• Any impact due to rough road conditionsmay trigger the auto-reverse function un-expectedly during auto-closure. If thishappens, pull the switch lightly to the firstdetent and hold to close the windowmanually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when thewindow is almost closed. Be sure to clear allobjects from the window before closing.

Reset Auto-UpShould the Auto Up feature stop working, thewindow probably needs to be reset. To resetAuto Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the win-dow completely and continue to hold the switchup for an additional two seconds after thewindow is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to thesecond detent to open the window completelyand continue to hold the switch down for anadditional two seconds after the window is fullyopen.

Window Lockout SwitchThe window lockout switch on the driver’s doortrim panel allows you to disable the windowcontrols on the rear passenger doors. To dis-able the window controls, press and release thewindow lockout button (setting it in the DOWNposition). To enable the window controls, pressand release the window lockout button again(setting it in the UP position).

27


Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the percep-tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-typesound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit windbuffeting with the windows down, or the sunroofor Sky Slider™ (if equipped) in certain open orpartially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be minimized. If the buffetingoccurs with the rear windows open, then openthe front and rear windows together to minimizethe buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with thesunroof or Sky Slider™ open, adjust the sunroofor Sky Slider™ opening to minimize the buffet-ing or open any window.

LIFTGATETo Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is builtinto the electronic liftgate release. With a validPassive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m)of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgate re-lease to open with one fluid motion.

NOTE:If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-grammed in EVIC, all doors will unlock whenyou push the electronic release on the lift-gate. If �Unlock Driver Door 1st press� isprogrammed in Uconnect®, the liftgate willunlock when you press the electronic re-lease on the liftgate For further information,refer to “Uconnect®” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel”.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitterwithin 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press thepassive entry lock button located to the right ofelectronic liftgate release.

NOTE:The liftgate passive entry lock button willonly lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlockfeature is built into the electronic liftgaterelease.Window Lockout Switch

Liftgate Entry

28


NOTE:Use the power door LOCK switch on eitherfront door trim panel or the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter to lock and unlockthe liftgate. The manual door locks on thedoors and the driver’s door lock cylinder willnot lock and unlock the liftgate.

WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi-sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. Youand your passengers could be injured bythese fumes. Keep the liftgate closed whenyou are operating the vehicle.

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be openedby pressing the electronic liftgaterelease (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™ located in Things To KnowBefore Starting) or by pressing theLIFTGATE button on the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the

LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twicewithin five seconds, to open the power liftgate.Once the liftgate is open, pressing the buttontwice within five seconds a second time willclose the liftgate.

The power liftgate may also be opened orclosed by pressing the LIFTGATE button lo-cated on the front overhead console, or closedby pressing the LIFTGATE button located on leftrear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. Press-ing the LIFTGATE button located on left reartrim panel once will close the liftgate only, thisbutton cannot be used to open the liftgate.

When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE trans-mitter is pressed two times, the turn signals willflash twice to signal that the liftgate is openingor closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabledin the Uconnect® settings) and the liftgatechime will be audible. For further information,refer to "Uconnect®" in "Understanding YourInstrument Panel".

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction to theliftgate, an emergency liftgate latch re-lease can be used to open the liftgate. Theemergency liftgate latch release can beaccessed through a snap-in cover locatedon the liftgate trim panel.

• If liftgate is left open for an extendedperiod of time, the liftgate may need to beclosed manually to reset power liftgatefunctionality.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury orcargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgatetravel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate isclosed and latched before driving away.

NOTE:

• The power liftgate buttons will not oper-ate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehiclespeed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).

29


• The power liftgate will not operate in tem-peratures below −22°F (−30°C) or tem-peratures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure toremove any buildup of snow or ice fromthe liftgate before pressing any of thepower liftgate switches.

• If anything obstructs the power liftgatewhile it is closing or opening, the liftgatewill automatically reverse to the closed oropen position, provided it meets suffi-cient resistance.

• There are also pinch sensors attached tothe side of the liftgate. Light pressureanywhere along these strips will causethe liftgate to return to the open position.

• The power liftgate must be in the full openposition for rear liftgate close button onthe left rear trim, near the liftgate openingto operate. If the liftgate is not fully open,press the Liftgate button on the Key Fobto fully open the liftgate, and then press itagain to close.

• If the electronic liftgate release is pushedwhile the power liftgate is closing, theliftgate will reverse to the full openposition.

• If the electronic liftgate release is pushedwhile the power liftgate is opening, theliftgate motor will disengage to allowmanual operation.

• If the power liftgate encounters multipleobstructions within the same cycle, thesystem will automatically stop and theliftgate must be opened or closedmanually.

• If your liftgate is power closing and youput the vehicle in gear, the liftgate willcontinue to power close. However, ve-hicle movement may result in a detectionof an obstruction.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allowpoisonous exhaust gases into your ve-hicle. You and your passengers could beinjured by these fumes. Keep the liftgateclosed when you are operating the vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgateopen, make sure that all windows areclosed, and the climate control blowerswitch is set at high speed. Do not use therecirculation mode.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features inyour vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for allseating positions

• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and frontpassenger

• An energy-absorbing steering column andsteering wheel

30


• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-tains (SABIC) for the driver and passengersseated next to a window

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB)

• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag

• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seatoccupants

• Front seat belts incorporate pretensionersthat may enhance occupant protection bymanaging occupant energy during an impactevent

• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s)include Automatic Locking Retractors(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing intoposition by extending the belt all the way outand then adjusting the belt to the desiredlength to restrain a child seat or secure alarge item in a seat — if equipped

Please pay close attention to the information inthis section. It tells you how to use your restraintsystem properly, to keep you and your passen-gers as safe as possible.

If you will be carrying children too small foradult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or theISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infantand child restraint systems. Refer to ISOFIX —Child Seat Anchorage System for more informa-tion.

Here are some simple steps you can take tominimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:

1. Children 12 years old and under shouldalways ride buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear facing infant seat infront of an air bag. A deploying PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rearwardfacing infant seat.

• Only use a rearward-facing child restraintin a vehicle with a rear seat.

Children that are not big enough to wear thevehicle seat belt properly (see section on ChildRestraints) should be secured in the rear seat inchild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.Older children who do not use child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats should ride prop-erly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allowchildren to slide the shoulder belt behind themor under their arm.

If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rearfacing child seat) must ride in the front passen-ger seat, move the seat as far back as possibleand use the proper child restraint. (Refer to“Child Restraints”)

You should read the instructions provided withyour child restraint to make sure that you areusing it properly.

2. All occupants should always wear theirlap and shoulder belts properly.

3. The driver and front passenger seatsshould be moved back as far as practical toallow the Advanced Front Air Bags room toinflate.

31


4. Do not lean against the door or window. Ifyour vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-ment occurs, the side air bags will inflateforcefully into the space between you andthe door.

5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needsto be modified to accommodate a disabledperson, contact the Customer Center. Phonenumbers are provided under �If You NeedAssistance�.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead tomore severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear yourseat belts even though you have air bags.

(Continued)


• Being too close to the steering wheel orinstrument panel during Advanced FrontAir Bag deployment could cause seriousinjury, including death. Air bags need roomto inflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-tain (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side AirBags (SAB) also need room to inflate. Donot lean against the door or window. Situpright in the center of the seat.

• In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if you arenot properly buckled up. You can strike theinterior of your vehicle or other passen-gers, or you can be thrown out of thevehicle. Always be sure you and others inyour vehicle are buckled up properly.

(Continued)


• Being too close to the Supplemental SideAir Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/orSeat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) duringdeployment could cause you to be se-verely injured or killed.

Buckle up even though you are an excellentdriver, even on short trips. Someone on theroad may be a poor driver and cause a collisionthat includes you. This can happen far awayfrom home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives,and they can reduce the seriousness of injuriesin a collision. Some of the worst injuries happenwhen people are thrown from the vehicle. Seatbelts reduce the possibility of ejection and therisk of injury caused by striking the inside of thevehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebelted at all times.

32


Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seating positions in your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt web-bing retractor is designed to lock during verysudden stops or collisions. This feature allowsthe shoulder part of the belt to move freely withyou under normal conditions. However, in acollision, the belt will lock and reduce your riskof striking the inside of the vehicle or beingthrown out.

WARNING!

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous.Seat belts are designed to go around thelarge bones of your body. These are thestrongest parts of your body and can take theforces of a collision the best. Wearing yourbelt in the wrong place could make yourinjuries in a collision much worse. You mightsuffer internal injuries, or you could evenslide out of part of the belt. Follow theseinstructions to wear your seat belt safely andto keep your passengers safe, too.

(Continued)


• Two people should never be belted into asingle seat belt. People belted togethercan crash into one another in a collision,hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more thanone person, no matter what their size.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sitback and adjust the front seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back ofyour seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out thebelt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as faras necessary to make the belt go around yourlap.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a“click.”

Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

33


WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong bucklewill not protect you properly. The lap portioncould ride too high on your body, possiblycausing internal injuries. Always buckle yourbelt into the buckle nearest you.

• A belt that is too loose will not protect youproperly. In a sudden stop, you could movetoo far forward, increasing the possibility ofinjury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)


• A belt that is worn under your arm isdangerous. Your body could strike the in-side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,increasing head and neck injury. A beltworn under the arm can cause internalinjuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the belt over your shoulder sothat your strongest bones will take theforce in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will notprotect you from injury during a collision.You are more likely to hit your head in acollision if you do not wear your shoulderbelt. The lap and shoulder belt are meantto be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs,below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lapbelt portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. Toloosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latchplate and pull on the lap belt. A snug beltreduces the risk of sliding under the belt in acollision.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase therisk of internal injury in a collision. The beltforces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvicbones, but across your abdomen. Alwayswear the lap belt as low as possible andkeep it snug.

(Continued)

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Removing Slack From Belt

34



• A twisted belt may not protect you properly.In a collision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt is straight. If you can’tstraighten a belt in your vehicle, take it toyour authorized dealer immediately andhave it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest sothat it is comfortable and not resting on yourneck. The retractor will withdraw any slack inthe belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button onthe buckle. The belt will automatically retract toits stowed position. If necessary, slide the latchplate down the webbing to allow the belt toretract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in acollision and leave you with no protection.Inspect the belt system periodically, check-

(Continued)


ing for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damagedparts must be replaced immediately. Do notdisassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a collisionif they have been damaged (bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.).

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the front seating positions, the shoulder beltcan be adjusted upward or downward to posi-tion the belt away from your neck. Press therelease button to release the anchorage, andthen move it up or down to the position that fitsyou best.

NOTE:The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-age is equipped with an Easy Up feature.This feature allows the shoulder belt an-chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi-tion without pressing the release button. Toverify the shoulder belt anchorage islatched, pull downward on the shoulder beltanchorage until it is locked into position.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, youwill prefer a lower position, and if you are tallerthan average, you will prefer a higher position.

Lap/Shoulder Belt UntwistingProcedureUse the following procedure to untwist a twistedlap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possibleto the anchor point.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

35


2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above thelatch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180degrees to create a fold that begins immediatelyabove the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the foldedwebbing. The folded webbing must enter theslot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until itclears the folded webbing.

Seat Belts In Passenger SeatingPositionsThe seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractors (ALR) which are used to secure a childrestraint system. For additional information, re-fer to “Installing Child Restraints Using TheVehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”section. The chart below defines the type offeature for each seating position.

Driver Center Passen-ger

First Row N/A N/A ALR

SecondRow

ALR ALR ALR

ThirdRow

N/A N/A N/A

• N/A — Not Applicable

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equippedwith an ALR and is being used for normalusage:

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALRis activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound asthe belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retractcompletely in this case and then carefully pullout only the amount of webbing necessary tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a "click."

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode(ALR) — If EquippedIn this mode, the shoulder belt is automaticallypre-locked. The belt will still retract to removeany slack in the shoulder belt. The AutomaticLocking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Modeanytime a child safety seat is installed in aseating position that has a belt with this feature.Children 12 years old and under should alwaysbe properly restrained in a vehicle with a rearseat.

How To Engage The Automatic LockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-ward until the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates thesafety belt is now in the Automatic LockingMode.

36


How To Disengage The Automatic LockingModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt andallow it to retract completely to disengage theAutomatic Locking Mode and activate the ve-hicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• The belt and retractor assembly must bereplaced if the seat belt assembly Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature orany other seat belt function is not workingproperly when checked according to theprocedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the belt and retractorassembly could increase the risk of injuryin collisions.

Energy Management FeatureThis vehicle has a safety belt system with anEnergy Management feature in the front seatingpositions to help further reduce the risk of injuryin the event of a head-on collision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assem-bly that is designed to release webbing in acontrolled manner. This feature is designed tohelp reduce the belt force acting on the occu-pant’s chest.

Seat Belt PretensionersThe seat belts for both front seating positionsare equipped with pretensioning devices thatare designed to remove slack from the seat beltin the event of a collision. These devices mayimprove the performance of the seat belt byassuring that the belt is tight about the occupantearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for allsize occupants, including those in child re-straints.

NOTE:These devices are not a substitute forproper seat belt placement by the occupant.The seat belt still must be worn snugly andpositioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items.After a collision deploys the airbags and/or

pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or preten-sioner must be replaced immediately.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use ReminderSystem (BeltAlert®)Front Seat Driver And Passenger BeltAlert®

BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind thedriver and front passenger to fasten their seatbelts. The feature is active whenever the igni-tion is on. If the driver or front seat passenger isunbelted, the respective Seat Belt ReminderLight will illuminate solid red and remain on untilthe seat belt is fastened. The respective SeatBelt Reminder Light will illuminate solid greenonce the occupied seating position seat belt isbuckled.

The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins afterthe vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), byblinking the respective Seat Belt ReminderLight and sounding an intermittent chime. Oncethe sequence starts, it will continue for the entireduration or until the respective seatbelts arefastened. After the sequence completes, theSeat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminateduntil the respective seat belts are fastened. Thedriver should instruct all other occupants to

37


fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt isunbuckled while traveling at speeds greaterthan 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provideboth audio and visual notification.

The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not ac-tive when the front passenger seat is unoccu-pied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when ananimal or heavy object is on the front passengerseat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped).It is recommended that pets be restrained in therear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or petcarriers that are secured by seat belts, andcargo is properly stowed.

Rear Seat BeltAlert®

Rear seat BeltAlert® provides the seat beltstatus for the rear seating positions. At ignitionon, when the rear seat belt(s) is not buckled, therespective Seat Belt Reminder Light will illumi-nate red. When the rear seat belt(s) is buckled,the respective Seat Belt Reminder Light willilluminate solid green. If a rear passenger seatbelt changes from buckled to unbuckled, achime will sound and the respective Seat BeltReminder Light will illuminate blinking red.

BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by yourauthorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does notrecommend deactivating BeltAlert®.

NOTE:

• Although BeltAlert® has been deacti-vated, the Seat Belt Reminder Lights willcontinue to illuminate.

• If all seat belts are fastened when ignitionis turned on, each Seat Belt ReminderLight will illuminate solid green for ap-proximately 30 seconds, then turn off.

Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenWe recommend that pregnant women use the seatbelts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping themother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of thebelt across the thighs and as snug across thehips as possible. Keep the belt low so that itdoes not come across the abdomen. That waythe strong bones of the hips will take the force ifthere is a collision.

Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) — Air BagsThis vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags forboth the driver and front passenger as a supple-ment to the seat belt restraint systems. Thedriver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted inthe center of the steering wheel. The passen-ger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in theinstrument panel, above the glove compart-ment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossedon the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle isequipped with a Supplemental Driver Side KneeAir Bag mounted in the instrument panel belowthe steering column.

38


NOTE:The Driver and Front Passenger AdvancedFront Air Bags are certified to the new regu-lations for Advanced Air Bags.

The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is de-signed to allow the air bag to have differentinflation levels based on several factors, includ-ing the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driverand/or front passenger seat belt buckle switchthat detects whether the driver or front passen-ger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckleswitch may adjust the inflation rate of the Pas-senger Advanced Front Air Bag.

This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSide Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) toprotect the driver, front, and rear passengerssitting next to a window. The SABIC air bags,are located above the side windows and theircovers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSeat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provideenhanced protection for an occupant during aside impact. The Supplemental Seat-MountedSide Air Bags are located in the outboard side ofthe front and rear seats (if equipped with rearseat SAB).

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should betaken to an authorized dealer immedi-ately.

Air Bag System ComponentsYour vehicle may be equipped with the followingair bag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolster

• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag

• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB)

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-tains (SABIC)

• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners and Seat BeltBuckle Switch

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee BolsterLocations

1 — Driver AdvancedFront Air Bag

3 — SupplementalDriver Side Knee AirBag/Knee Bolster

2 — Passenger Ad-vanced Front Air Bag

4 — Knee Bolster

39


Advanced Front Air Bag FeaturesThe Advanced Front Air Bag system providesoutput appropriate to the type of collision asdetermined by the Occupant Restraint Control-ler (ORC), which may receive information fromthe front impact sensors.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or nearthe air bag on the instrument panel, be-cause any such objects could cause harmif the vehicle is in a collision severeenough to cause the air bag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manu-ally. You may damage the air bags and youcould be injured because the air bags mayno longer be functional. The protectivecovers for the air bag cushions are de-signed to open only when the air bags areinflating.

(Continued)


• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the kneebolster in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the kneebolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citi-zen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB)Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SAB) may provide enhanced protection to helpprotect an occupant during a side impact. TheSAB is marked with an air bag label sewn intothe outboard side of the seats.

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam onthe side of the seat’s trim cover (front seats) andbetween the side seat’s cushion trim cover (rearseats — if equipped with rear SAB). Each airbag deploys independently; a left side impactdeploys the left air bag only and a right-sideimpact deploys the right air bag only.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air BagLabel

40


Supplemental Side Air Bag InflatableCurtain (SABIC)SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and ve-hicle rollover protection to front and rear seatoutboard occupants in addition to that providedby the body structure. Each air bag featuresinflated chambers placed adjacent to the headof each outboard occupant that reduce thepotential for side-impact head injuries. TheSABIC deploy downward, covering both win-dows on the impact side.

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during deployment could cause youto be severely injured or killed.

• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pre-tensioners and/or SAB and SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle maydeploy.

The system includes side impact sensors thatare calibrated to deploy the Supplemental SABand SABIC air bags during impacts that requireside air bag occupant protection.

WARNING!

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and rightSABIC, do not stack luggage or othercargo up high enough to block the locationof the SABIC. The area where the sidecurtain air bag is located should remainfree from any obstructions.

• Do not use accessory seat covers or placeobjects between you and the SAB; theperformance could be adversely affectedand/or objects could be pushed into you,causing serious injury.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, do not have any accessory itemsinstalled which will alter the roof, includingadding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do notadd roof racks that require permanent at-tachments (bolts or screws) for installationon the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roofof the vehicle for any reason.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) Label Location

41


Always sit upright as possible with your backagainst the seat back, use the seat belts prop-erly, and use the appropriate sized child re-straint, infant restraint or booster seat recom-mended for the size and weight of the child.

SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement tothe seat belt restraint system. Occupants, in-cluding children who are up against or veryclose to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seri-ously injured or killed. Occupants, especiallychildren, should not lean on or sleep against thedoor, side windows, or area where the SAB orSABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in aninfant or child restraint.

Knee Impact BolstersThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect theknees of the driver and front passenger, andposition the front occupants for the best inter-action with the Advanced Front Air Bags.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Ad-vanced Front Air Bags and the SupplementalDriver Knee Air Bag work with the knee impactbolsters to provide improved protection for thedriver and front passenger.

Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BagThe Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bagprovides enhanced protection and works to-gether with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bagduring a frontal impact.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Ad-vanced Front Air Bags work with the Supple-mental Knee Air Bag to provide improved pro-tection for the driver. Side air bags also workwith seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Air Bag Deployment Sensors AndControlsOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)The ORC is part of a regulated safety systemrequired for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the frontand/or side air bags in a frontal or side collisionis required. Based on the impact sensor’s sig-nals, a central electronic ORC deploys theAdvanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags,Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags,Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and

front seat belt pretensioners, as required, de-pending on several factors, including the sever-ity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Air Bags and SupplementalDriver Knee Air Bag are designed to provideadditional protection by supplementing the seatbelts in certain frontal collisions depending onseveral factors, including the severity and typeof collision. Advanced Front Air Bags andSupplemental Driver Knee Air Bag are not ex-pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,or rollover collisions.

The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemen-tal Driver Knee Air Bag will not deploy in allfrontal collisions, including some that may pro-duce substantial vehicle damage — for ex-ample, some pole collisions, truck underrides,and angle offset collisions. On the other hand,depending on the type and location of impact,Advanced Front Air Bags and SupplementalDriver Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes withlittle vehicle front-end damage but that producea severe initial deceleration.

42


The side air bags will not deploy in all sidecollisions. Side air bag deployment will dependon the severity and type of collision.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle de-celeration over time, vehicle speed and damageby themselves are not good indicators ofwhether or not an air bag should have de-ployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection inall collisions, and also are needed to help keepyou in position, away from an inflating air bag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-tronic parts of the air bag system whenever theignition switch is in the START or ON/RUNposition. If the key is in the OFF position, in theACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bagsystem is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supplysystem that may deploy the air bags even if thebattery loses power or it becomes disconnectedprior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Air BagWarning Light in the instrumentpanel for approximately four toeight seconds for a self-checkwhen the ignition is first turned on.

After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Lightwill turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction inany part of the system, it turns on the Air BagWarning Light, either momentarily or continu-ously. A single chime will sound if the lightcomes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminatethe instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if amalfunction is noted that could affect the air bagsystem. The diagnostics also record the natureof the malfunction.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’t havethe air bags to protect you in a collision. If thelight does not come on as a bulb check whenthe ignition is first turned on, stays on after

(Continued)


you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as youdrive, have an authorized dealer service theair bag system immediately.

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front AirBag Inflator UnitsThe Driver and Passenger Advanced Front AirBag Inflator Units are located in the center of thesteering wheel and on the right side of theinstrument panel. When the ORC detects acollision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags,it signals the inflator units. A large quantity ofnon-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Ad-vanced Front Air Bags. Different PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag inflation rates are pos-sible, based on several factors, including thecollision type and severity. The steering wheelhub trim cover and the upper right side of theinstrument panel separate and fold out of theway as the air bags inflate to their full size. Theair bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 millisec-onds. This is about half of the time it takes to

43


blink your eyes. The air bags then quicklydeflate while helping to restrain the driver andfront passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is ventedthrough the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the air bags do not interferewith your control of the vehicle.

Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BagInflator UnitThe Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bagunit is located in the instrument panel trimbeneath the steering column. When the ORCdetects a collision requiring the air bag, it sig-nals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemen-tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim coverseparates and folds out of the way allowing theair bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fullyinflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag(SAB) Inflator UnitsThe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bagsare designed to activate only in certain sidecollisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requiresthe side air bags to inflate, based on the severityand type of collision.

Based on the severity and type of collision, theside air bag inflator on the crash side of thevehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity ofnon-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits throughthe seat seam into the space between theoccupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate inabout 10 milliseconds. The side air bag movesat a very high speed and with such a high forcethat it could injure you if you are not seatedproperly, or if items are positioned in the areawhere the side air bag inflates. This especiallyapplies to children.

Supplemental Side Air Bag InflatableCurtain (SABIC) Inflator UnitsDuring collisions where the impact is confinedto a particular area of the side of the vehicle, theORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depend-ing on the severity and type of collision. In theseevents, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only onthe impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated toinflate the SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes

the outside edge of the headliner out of the wayand covers the window. The SABIC inflates inabout 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of thetime that it takes to blink your eyes) with enoughforce to injure you if you are not belted andseated properly, or if items are positioned in thearea where the SABIC inflates. This especiallyapplies to children. The SABIC is only about3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

Because air bag sensors estimate decelerationover time, vehicle speed and damage are notgood indicators of whether or not an air bagshould have deployed.

NOTE:In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABand SABIC air bags may deploy on bothsides of the vehicle.

Front And Side Impact SensorsIn front and side impacts, impact sensors canaid the ORC in determining appropriate re-sponse to impact events.

Enhanced Accident Response SystemIn the event of an impact causing air bagdeployment, if the communication network re-mains intact, and the power remains intact,

44


depending on the nature of the event the ORCwill determine whether to have the EnhancedAccident Response System perform the follow-ing functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery haspower or until the ignition is cycled to off.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on aslong as the battery has power or until theignition key is removed.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.

• Turn Off the HVAC Blower Motor.

• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-sponse System functions after an event, theignition switch must be changed from IGN ON toIGN OFF.

If A Deployment OccursThe Advanced Front Air Bags are designed todeflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:Front and/or side air bags will not deploy inall collisions. This does not mean some-thing is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon air bag material may sometimescause abrasions and/or skin reddening to thedriver and front passenger as the air bagsdeploy and unfold. The abrasions are similarto friction rope burns or those you might getsliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.They are not caused by contact with chemi-cals. They are not permanent and normallyheal quickly. However, if you haven’t healedsignificantly within a few days, or if you haveany blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see somesmoke-like particles. The particles are a nor-mal by-product of the process that generatesthe non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.These airborne particles may irritate the skin,eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyeirritation, rinse the area with cool water. Fornose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If

the irritation continues, see your doctor. Ifthese particles settle on your clothing, followthe garment manufacturer’s instructions forcleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags havedeployed. If you are involved in another colli-sion, the air bags will not be in place to protectyou.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-ers can not protect you in another collision.Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,and the front seat belt retractor assembliesreplaced by an authorized dealer immedi-ately. Also, have the Occupant RestraintController (ORC) system serviced as well.

45


Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bagsystem could cause it to fail when youneed it. You could be injured if the air bagsystem is not there to protect you. Do notmodify the components or wiring, includingadding any kind of badges or stickers tothe steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel.Do not modify the front bumper, vehiclebody structure, or add aftermarket sidesteps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part ofthe air bag system yourself. Be sure to tellanyone who works on your vehicle that ithas an air bag system.

(Continued)


• Do not attempt to modify any part of yourair bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly ifmodifications are made. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer for any air bagsystem service. If your seat, including yourtrim cover and cushion, needs to be ser-viced in any way (including removal orloosening/tightening of seat attachmentbolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seataccessories may be used. If it is necessaryto modify the air bag system for personswith disabilities, contact your authorizeddealer.

Air Bag Warning Light

You will want to have the air bagsready to inflate for your protectionin a collision. The Air Bag WarningLight monitors the internal circuitsand interconnecting wiring associ-ated with air bag system electrical

components. While the air bag system is de-signed to be maintenance free, if any of thefollowing occurs, have an authorized dealerservice the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come onduring the four to eight seconds when theignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUNposition.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on afterthe four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-mittently or remains on while driving.

46


NOTE:If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-gine related gauges are not working, theOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC) mayalso be disabled. The air bags may not beready to inflate for your protection. Promptlycheck the fuse block for blown fuses. Referto the label located on the inside of the fuseblock cover for the proper air bag fuses. Seeyour authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR isto record, in certain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systems per-formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

• Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personal data(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash in-vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the ve-hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

47


Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckledup at all times, including babies and children.

Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.According to crash statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatsrather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraintsfor children from newborn size to the childalmost large enough for an adult safety belt.Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual tomake sure you have the correct seat for yourchild.

Before buying any restraint system, make surethat it has a label certifying that it meets allapplicable Safety Standards. You should alsomake sure that you can install it in the vehiclewhere you will use it.

WARNING!

• “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected byan air bag in front of it!” Refer to visor anddoor shut face mounted labels for informa-tion.

• In a collision, an unrestrained child, even atiny baby, can become a projectile insidethe vehicle. The force required to holdeven an infant on your lap could becomeso great that you could not hold the child,no matter how strong you are. The childand others could be badly injured. Anychild riding in your vehicle should be in aproper restraint for the child’s size.

48


ISOFIX Fixture Chart

Mass GroupUniversal Child Seating Position Chart

Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center Intermediate Out-board Intermediate Center

Group 0 - Up to 10 kg X U/UF UF N/A N/A

Group 0+ - Up to13 kg

X U/UF UF N/A N/A

Group 1 - 9 to 18 kg X U/UF UF N/A N/A

Group II & III - 15 to36 kg

X U/UF UF N/A N/A

Key of letters used in the table above:

• U = Suitable for “universal” category re-straints approved for use in this age/weightgroup.

• UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal”category restraints approved for use in thismass group.

• L = Suitable for particular child restraintsgiven on attached list. These restraints maybe of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or“semi-universal” categories.

• B = Built-in restraint approved for the age/weight group.

• X = Seat position not suitable for children inthis age/weight group.

49


Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart

Mass Group Size Class Fixture Front Pas-senger

Rear Out-board Rt./

Lt.Rear Center

Intermedi-ate Out-board

Intermedi-ate Center Other Sites

Carrycot

F ISO/L1 X X X N/A N/A N/A

G ISO/L2 X X X N/A N/A N/A

(1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/A

0 — up to10 kg

E ISO/R1 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A


0+ — up to13 kg

E ISO/R1 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

D ISO/R2 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

C ISO/R3 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

(1) X X X N/A N/A N/A

50


Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart

Mass Group Size Class Fixture Front Pas-senger

Rear Out-board Rt./

Lt.Rear Center

Intermedi-ate Out-board

Intermedi-ate Center Other Sites

I – 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

C ISO/R3 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

B ISO/F2 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

B1 ISO/F2X X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A

A ISO/F3 X 1UF/1UF X N/A N/A N/A


II – 15 to25 kg (1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/A

III – 22 to36 kg (1) X N/A X N/A N/A N/A

Key of letters used in the table above:

• (1) For the CRS which do not carry theISO/XX size class identification (A to G), forthe applicable mass group, the car manufac-turer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISO-FIX child restraint system(s) recommendedfor each position.

• 1UF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward childrestraint systems of “universal” category ap-proved for use in the mass group.

• IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child re-straint systems (CRS) given in the attach-

ment list. These ISOFIX CRS are those ofthe “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.

• X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIXchild restraint systems in this mass groupand/or this size class.

51


Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and ToddlersChildren who are two years old or younger

and who have not reached the height orweight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible ChildRestraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of

the vehicle

Small ChildrenChildren who are at least two years old or

who have out-grown the height or weight limitof their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat

of the vehicle

Larger ChildrenChildren who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to

properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicleseat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child RestraintsChildren 12 years old or younger, who haveout-grown the height or weight limit of their

booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat ofthe vehicle

52


Infants And Child RestraintsSafety experts recommend that children riderearward-facing in the vehicle until they are twoyears old or until they reach either the height orweight limit of their rear facing child safety seat.Two types of child restraints can be usedrearward-facing: infant carriers and convertiblechild seats.

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing inthe vehicle. It is recommended for children frombirth until they reach the weight or height limit ofthe infant carrier. Convertible child seats can beused either rearward-facing or forward-facing inthe vehicle. Convertible child seats often have ahigher weight limit in the rearward-facing directionthan infant carriers do, so they can be usedrearward-facing by children who have outgrowntheir infant carrier but are still less than at least twoyears old. Children should remain rearward-facinguntil they reach the highest weight or height al-lowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear facing infant seat infront of an air bag. A deploying PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag can cause deathor serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rearwardfacing infant seat.

• Only use a rearward-facing child restraintin a vehicle with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child RestraintsChildren who are two years old or who haveoutgrown their rear-facing convertible child seatcan ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seatsused in the forward-facing direction are forchildren who are over two years old or who haveoutgrown the rear-facing weight or height limitof their rear-facing convertible child seat. Chil-dren should remain in a forward-facing childseat with a harness for as long as possible, upto the highest weight or height allowed by thechild seat.

All children whose weight or height is above theforward-facing limit for the child seat should usea belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’sseat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit withknees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion whilethe child’s back is against the seatback, theyshould use a belt-positioning booster seat. Thechild and belt-positioning booster seat are heldin the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure ofan infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, se-cure it in the vehicle with the seat belt orISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from thevehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. Ina sudden stop or accident, it could strike theoccupants or seatbacks and cause seriouspersonal injury.

53


Children Too Large For Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear the shoul-der belt comfortably, and whose legs are longenough to bend over the front of the seat whentheir back is against the seatback, should use theseat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step testto decide whether the child can use the vehicle’sseat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against theback of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably overthe front of the vehicle seat – while they are stillsitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’sshoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for thewhole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was“no,” then the child still needs to use a boosterseat in this vehicle. If the child is using thelap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. Achild’s squirming or slouching can move the beltout of position. If the shoulder belt contacts theface or neck, move the child closer to the centerof the vehicle. Never allow a child to put theshoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weightof the Child +

Child Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

ISOFIX – LowerAnchors Only Seat Belt Only

ISOFIX – LowerAnchors + TopTether Anchor

Seat Belt + TopTether Anchor

Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X X

Forward-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X

54


ISOFIX Restraint SystemYour vehicle is equipped with the child restraintanchorage system called ISOFIX. The ISOFIXsystem has three vehicle anchor points forinstalling ISOFIX-equipped child seats. Thereare two lower anchorages located at the back ofthe seat cushion where it meets the seatbackand one top tether anchorage located behindthe seating position. These anchorages areused to install ISOFIX-equipped child seatswithout using the vehicle’s seat belts. Someseating positions may have a top tether anchor-age but no lower anchorages. In these seatingpositions, the seat belt must be used with thetop tether anchorage to install the child re-straint.

Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages

The lower anchorages are roundbars that are found at the rear ofthe seat cushion where it meets theseatback. They are just visiblewhen you lean into the rear seat toinstall the child restraint. You will

easily feel them if you run your finger along thegap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages

In addition, there are tether strapanchorages behind each rear seat-ing position located on the back ofthe seat.

ISOFIX-compatible child restraint systems willbe equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strapon each side. Each will have a hook or connec-tor to attach to the lower anchorage and a wayto tighten the connection to the anchorage.Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-

facing infant restraints will also be equippedwith a tether strap. The tether strap will have ahook at the end to attach to the top tetheranchorage and a way to tighten the strap after itis attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat ISOFIXDo not install a child restraint in the centerposition using the ISOFIX system. Use the seatbelt to install a child seat in the center seatingposition.

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage toattach more than one child restraint. Pleaserefer to “To Install a ISOFIX-CompatibleChild Restraint” for typical installation in-structions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraintmanufacturer when installing your child re-straint. Not all child restraint systems will beinstalled as described here.

Rear Seat ISOFIX Anchorages

55


To Install An ISOFIX — Compatible ChildRestraint

1. If the selected seating position has a Swit-chable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seatbelt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-tions below. See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to checkwhat type of seat belt each seating position has.

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower connec-tors and on the tether strap of the child seat sothat you can more easily attach the connectorsto the vehicle anchorages.

3. Place the child seat between the lower an-chorages for that seating position. For somesecond row seats, you may need to recline theseat and / or raise the head restraint to get abetter fit. If the rear seat can be moved forwardand rearward in the vehicle, you may wish tomove it to its rear-most position to make roomfor the child seat. Otherwise, you may move thefront seat forward to allow more room for the carseat.

4. Attach the connectors of the child restraint tothe lower anchorages in the selected seatingposition.

5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, con-nect it to the top tether anchorage. See thesection “Installing Child Restraints Using theTop Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach atether anchor.

6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the childrestraint rearward and downward into the seat.Remove slack in the straps according to thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightlyby pulling back and forth on the child seat at thebelt path. It should not move more than 1 inch(25 mm) in any direction.

WARNING!

Child restraint anchorages are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under no cir-cumstances are they to be used for adultseat belts, harnesses, or for attaching otheritems or equipment to the vehicle.

How To Stow An Unused ALR SeatbeltWhen using the ISOFIX attaching system toinstall a child restraint, stow all ALR seat beltsthat are not being used by other occupants orbeing used to secure child restraints. An unusedbelt could injure a child if they play with it andaccidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Beforeinstalling a child restraint using the ISOFIXsystem, buckle the seat belt behind the childrestraint and out of the child’s reach. If thebuckled seat belt interferes with the child re-straint installation, instead of buckling it behindthe child restraint, route the seat belt throughthe child restraint belt path and then buckle it.Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children inthe vehicle that the seat belts are not toys andthat they should not play with them.

56


WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint tothe ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failureof an infant or child restraint. The childcould be badly injured or killed. Follow themanufacturer’s directions exactly when in-stalling an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-ing other items or equipment to the vehicle

Installing Child Restraints Using TheVehicle Seat BeltThe seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with either a SwitchableAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinch-ing latch plate or both. Both types of seat beltsare designed to keep the lap portion of the seatbelt tight around the child restraint so that it isnot necessary to use a locking clip. The ALRretractor can be “switched” into a locked mode

by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractorand then letting the webbing retract back intothe retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make aclicking noise while the webbing is pulled backinto the retractor. For additional information onALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”description under “Occupant Restraints.” Thecinching latch plate is designed to hold the lapportion of the seatbelt tight when webbing ispulled tight and straight through a child re-straint’s belt path.

Installing A Child Restraint With ASwitchable Automatic Locking Retractor(ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of theseating position. For some second row seats,you may need to recline the seat and/or raisethe head restraint to get a better fit. If the rearseat can be moved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-mostposition to make room for the child seat. Other-wise, you may move the front seat forward toallow more room for the car seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing fromthe retractor to pass it through the belt path ofthe child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbingin the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until youhear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portiontight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on theshoulder part of the belt until you have pulled allthe seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,allow the webbing to retract back into the retrac-tor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear aclicking sound. This means the seat belt is nowin the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. Ifit is locked, you should not be able to pull outany webbing. If the retractor is not locked,repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing totighten the lap portion around the child restraintwhile you push the child restraint rearward anddownward into the vehicle seat.

57


8. If the child restraint has a top tether strapand the seating position has a top tether an-chorage, connect the tether strap to the anchor-age and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “In-stalling Child Restraints Using The Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach a tetheranchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightlyby pulling back and forth on the child seat at thebelt path. It should not move more than 1 inch(25 mm) in any direction.Any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight ifnecessary.

Installing A Child Restraint With A CinchingLatch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped

1. Place the child seat in the center of theseating position. For some second row seats,you may need to recline the seat and/or raisethe head restraint to get a better fit. If the rearseat can be moved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-mostposition to make room for the child seat. Other-wise, you may move the front seat forward toallow more room for the car seat.

2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbingfrom the retractor to pass it through the belt pathof the child restraint. Do not twist the beltwebbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until youhear a “click.”

4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing totighten the lap portion around the child restraintwhile you push the child restraint rearward anddownward into the vehicle seat.

5. If the child restraint has a top tether strapand the seating position has a top tether an-chorage, connect the tether strap to the anchor-age and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “In-stalling Child Restraints Using The Top TetherAnchorage” for directions to attach a tetheranchor.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightlyby pulling back and forth on the child seat at thebelt path. It should not move more than 1 inch(25 mm) in any direction.Any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight ifnecessary.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is tooclose to the belt path opening of the childrestraint, you may have trouble tightening theseat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latchplate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insertthe latch plate into the buckle with the releasebutton facing out, away from the child restraint.Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete theinstallation of the child restraint.

If the belt still cannot be tightened after youshorten the buckle, disconnect the latch platefrom the buckle, turn the buckle around one halfturn, and insert the latch plate into the buckleagain. If you still cannot make the child restraintinstallation tight, try a different seating position.

58


Installing Child Restraints Using The TopTether Anchorage

1. Look behind the seating position where youplan to install the child restraint to find the tetheranchorage. You may need to move the seatforward to provide better access to the tetheranchorage. If there is no top tether anchoragefor that seating position, move the child restraintto another position in the vehicle if one isavailable.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the mostdirect path for the strap between the anchor andthe child seat. If your vehicle is equipped withadjustable rear head restraints, raise the headrestraint, and where possible, route the tetherstrap under the head restraint and between thetwo posts. If not possible, lower the head re-straint and pass the tether strap around theoutboard side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the childrestraint to the top tether anchorage as shownin the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap accordingto the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap couldlead to increased head motion and possibleinjury to the child. Use only the anchorageposition directly behind the child seat tosecure a child restraint top tether strap.If your vehicle is equipped with a split rearseat, make sure the tether strap does not slipinto the opening between the seatbacks asyou remove slack in the strap.

Transporting PetsAir Bags deploying in the front seat could harmyour pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrownabout and possibly injured, or injure a passen-ger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in petharnesses or pet carriers that are secured byseat belts.

Tether Anchorage Locations

59


ENGINE BREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONSA long break-in period is not required for theengine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) inyour vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) aredesirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle accelerationwithin the limits of local traffic laws contributesto a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-tion in low gear can be detrimental and shouldbe avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at thefactory is a high-quality energy conserving typelubricant. Oil changes should be consistent withanticipated climate conditions under which ve-hicle operations will occur. For the recom-mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining YourVehicle”.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or StraightMineral Oil in the engine or damage mayresult.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil duringits first few thousand miles (kilometers) ofoperation. This should be considered a nor-mal part of the break-in and not interpretedas an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting PassengersNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THECARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

(Continued)


• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They containcarbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless andodorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-scious and can eventually poison you. To avoidbreathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

(Continued)

60



• Do not run the engine in a closed garageor in confined areas any longer thanneeded to move your vehicle in or out ofthe area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that allwindows are closed and the climate con-trol BLOWER switch is set at high speed.DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehiclewith the engine running, adjust your heat-ing or cooling controls to force outside airinto the vehicle. Set the blower at highspeed.

The best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properly main-tained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound ofthe exhaust system, when exhaust fumes canbe detected inside the vehicle, or when theunderside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areasfor broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-tioned parts. Open seams or loose connectionscould permit exhaust fumes to seep into thepassenger compartment. In addition, inspectthe exhaust system each time the vehicle israised for lubrication or oil change. Replace asrequired.

Safety Checks You Should MakeInside The VehicleSeat BeltsInspect the belt system periodically, checkingfor cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged partsmust be replaced immediately. Do not disas-semble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replacedafter a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies mustbe replaced after a collision if they have beendamaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,etc.). If there is any question regarding belt orretractor condition, replace the belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The light should come on and re-main on for four to eight secondsas a bulb check when the ignitionswitch is first turned ON. If the lightis not lit during starting, see yourauthorized dealer. If the light stays

on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

DefrosterCheck operation by selecting the defrost modeand place the blower control on high speed. Youshould be able to feel the air directed againstthe windshield. See your authorized dealer forservice if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety InformationAlways use floor mats designed to fit the foot-well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats thatleave the pedal area unobstructed and that arefirmly secured so that they cannot slip out ofposition and interfere with the pedals or impairsafe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

61


WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can causeloss of vehicle control and increase the riskof serious personal injury.• Always make sure that floor mats are

properly attached to the floor mat fasten-ers.

• Never place or install floor mats or otherfloor coverings in the vehicle that cannotbe properly secured to prevent them frommoving and interfering with the pedals orthe ability to control the vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor cover-ings on top of already installed floor mats.Additional floor mats and other coveringswill reduce the size of the pedal area andinterfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regularbasis. Always properly reinstall and securefloor mats that have been removed forcleaning.

(Continued)


• Always make sure that objects cannot fallinto the driver footwell while the vehicle ismoving. Objects can become trapped un-der the brake pedal and accelerator pedalcausing a loss of vehicle control.

• If required, mounting posts must be prop-erly installed, if not equipped from thefactory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installa-tion or mounting can cause interference withthe brake pedal and accelerator pedal opera-tion causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You ShouldMake Outside The VehicleTiresExamine tires for excessive tread wear anduneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,glass, or other objects lodged in the tread orsidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check thetires (including spare) for proper cold inflationpressure.

LightsHave someone observe the operation of brakelights and exterior lights while you work thecontrols. Check turn signal and high beamindicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid LeaksCheck area under vehicle after overnight park-ing for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluidleaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or iffuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, thecause should be located and correctedimmediately.

62


3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOURVEHICLE

• MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69• Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69• Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69• Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70• Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71• Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71• Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72• Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72• Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .72

• BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .72• Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75• Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

• SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77• Power Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77• Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78• Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80• Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

63


• Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82• 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat Feature . . . . . . . . .83

• DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85• Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85• Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To

Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86• Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86• Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . .87

• TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87• LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

• Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88• Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88• Headlights On With Wipers (Available with Automatic Headlights

Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88• Headlight Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89• Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .89• Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90• Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90• Parking Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90• Front And Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91• Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92• Front Map/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

64


• Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92• Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

• WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93• Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94• Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95• Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

• TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96• HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .96• ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .98

• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98• To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98• To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99• To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

• ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .100• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .101• Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .101• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102• To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102• To Cancel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103• Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

65


• Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106• ACC Operation at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106• Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107• Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

• FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation . . . .112

• LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115• LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115• Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116• LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116• Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

• PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .120• ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121• ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121• ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124• Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . .124• Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124• ParkSense® System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

• PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126• ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127• ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

66


• ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133• Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . .133• Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134• ParkSense® System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

• PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135• Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active Park

Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136• Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display . . . . . .137• Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display. . .139

• PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . .143• Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . .145• Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN. .145

• POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . .146• Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147• Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147• Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147• Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147• Venting Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147• Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147• Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148• Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148• Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148• Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148• Sunroof Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

67


• Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148• SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . .149

• Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149• Sky Slider™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150• Opening The Sky Slider™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150• Closing The Sky Slider™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150• Anti-Pinch Protect Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151• Sky Slider™ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

• ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151• WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

• Wireless Charging Pad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153• CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154• STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

• Glove Box Storage Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154• Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

• CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156• Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

• REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158• Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158• Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

• ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

68


MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night MirrorA single ball joint mirror is provided in thevehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixedposition at the windshield. The mirror installs onthe windshield button with a counterclockwiserotation and requires no tools for mounting. Themirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, andright for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rearwindow.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you canbe reduced by moving the small control underthe mirror to the night position (toward the rearof the vehicle). The mirror should be adjustedwhile the small control under the mirror is set inthe day position (toward the windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — IfEquippedA single ball joint mirror is provided in thevehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixedposition at the windshield. The mirror installs onthe windshield button with a counterclockwiserotation and requires no tools for mounting. Themirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, andright for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rearwindow.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlightglare from vehicles behind you.

NOTE:

• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature isdisabled when the vehicle is in reversegear to improve rear view viewing.

• The Automatic Dimming Mirror featurecan be turned on or off using theUconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror

69


NOTE:The mirror contains an Assist button and a9–1–1 button located on the bottom of themirror.

Assist Call

The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST pushbutton which automatically connects the vehicleoccupants to one of several predefined loca-tions for immediate support:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flattire, or need a tow, just press the Assistbutton and you’ll be connected to some-one who can help. Roadside Assistancewill know what vehicle you’re driving andits location. Additional fees may apply forroadside Assistance.

• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for Uconnect® Accessand Uconnect® Access via Mobilefeatures.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support forall other vehicle issues.

9-1-1 Call

Report an accident without taking your eyes offthe road. Just press 9-1-1 on your mirror andconnect.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-ing, never spray any cleaning solution di-rectly onto the mirror. Apply the solution ontoa clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outsidemirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of trafficand a slight overlap of the view obtained fromthe inside mirror.

NOTE:The passenger side convex outside mirrorwill give a much wider view to the rear, andespecially of the lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas-senger side convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than they really are. Rely-ing too much on your passenger side convexmirror could cause you to collide with an-other vehicle or other object. Use your insidemirror when judging the size or distance of avehicle seen in the passenger side convexmirror.

70


Power MirrorsThe power mirror switches are located on thedriver’s door trim panel.

Models With Express Window FeaturePress and release the mirror select buttonmarked L (left) or R (right) and then press one ofthe four arrow buttons to move the mirror in thedirection the arrow is pointing. The selection willtime out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard

against accidentally moving a mirror positionfollowing an adjustment.

NOTE:For vehicles equipped with Driver MemorySeat, you can use your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or the memoryswitch on the instrument panel to return thepower mirrors to pre-programmed posi-tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Un-derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”for further information.

Models Without Express Window FeaturePress the mirror select button marked L (left) orR (right) and then press one of the four arrowbuttons to move the mirror in the direction thearrow is pointing.

Power Folding Mirrors — IfEquippedThe switch for the power folding mirrors islocated between the power mirror switches L(left) and R (right). Press the switch once andthe mirrors will fold in, pressing the switch asecond time will return the mirrors to the normaldriving position.

NOTE:If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.

If the mirrors are in the folded position, andvehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph(16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.

Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mir-rors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrorsif the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked whilefolding.

• The mirrors are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors come out of the unfoldedposition.

• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors : Fold andunfold them by pressing the button. (This mayrequire multiple button pushes). This resetsthem to their normal position.

Power Mirror Switches

1 — Mirror Direction Control2 — Left and Right Mirror Select

71


Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frostor ice. This feature can be activatedwhenever you turn on the rear windowdefroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear

Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — IfEquippedAn illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor.To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down andswing the mirror cover upward. The lights willturn on automatically. Closing the mirror coverwill turn off the light.

Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature— If EquippedThe sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows foradditional flexibility in positioning the sun visorto block out the sun.

1. Fold down the sun visor.

2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.

3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearviewmirror to extend it.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING(BSM) — IF EQUIPPEDThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system usestwo radar-based sensors, located inside therear bumper fascia, to detect highway licens-able vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motor-cycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones fromthe rear/front/side of the vehicle.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warninglight will momentarily illuminate in both outsiderear view mirrors to let the driver know that thesystem is operational. The BSM system sen-sors operate when the vehicle is in any forward

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Rear Detection Zones

72


gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by modewhen the vehicle is in PARK.

The BSM detection zone covers approximatelyone lane on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or3.8 m). The zone starts at the outside rear viewmirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) tothe rear of the vehicle. The BSM system moni-tors the detection zones on both sides of thevehicle when the vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher andwill alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

• The BSM system does NOT alert thedriver about rapidly approaching vehiclesthat are outside the detection zones.

• The BSM system detection zone DOESNOT change if your vehicle is towing atrailer. Therefore, visually verify the adja-cent lane is clear for both your vehicleand trailer before making a lane change. Ifthe trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle,sports equipment) extends beyond theside of your vehicle, this may result in the

BSM warning light remaining illuminatedthe entire time the vehicle is in a forwardgear.

The area on the rear fascia where the radarsensors are located must remain free of snow,ice, and dirt/road contamination so that theBSM system can function properly. Do not blockthe area of the rear fascia where the radarsensors are located with foreign objects (bum-per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects inthe detection zones by illuminating the BSMwarning light located in the outside mirrors inaddition to sounding an audible (chime) alertand reducing the radio volume. Refer to “ModesOf Operation” for further information.

The BSM system monitors the detection zonefrom three different entry points (side, rear,front) while driving to see if an alert is neces-sary. The BSM system will issue an alert duringthese types of zone entries.

Warning Light Location

73


Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanesfrom either side of the vehicle.

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicleon either side and enter the rear detection zonewith a relative speed of less than 30 mph(48 km/h).

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a rela-tive speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and thevehicle remains in the blind spot for approxi-mately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will beilluminated. If the difference in speed betweenthe two vehicles is greater than 15 mph(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Side Monitoring

Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking/Passing

74


The BSM system is designed not to issue analert on stationary objects such as guardrails,posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, oc-casionally the system may alert on such ob-jects. This is normal operation and your vehicledoes not require service.

The BSM system will not alert you of objectsthat are traveling in the opposite direction of thevehicle in adjacent lanes.

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aidto help detect objects in the blind spot zones.The BSM system is not designed to detectpedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if yourvehicle is equipped with the BSM system,always check your vehicles mirrors, glanceover your shoulder, and use your turn signalbefore changing lanes. Failure to do so canresult in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross PathThe Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intendedto aid the driver when backing out of parkingspaces where their vision of oncoming vehiclesmay be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiouslyout of the parking space until the rear end of thevehicle is exposed. The RCP system will thenhave a clear view of the cross traffic and if anoncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

Stationary Objects

Opposing Traffic

RCP Detection Zones

75


RCP monitors the rear detection zones on bothsides of the vehicle, for objects that are movingtoward the side of the vehicle with a minimumspeed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), toobjects moving a maximum of approximately20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situa-tions.

NOTE:In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehiclescan be obscured by vehicles parked oneither side. If the sensors are blocked byother structures or vehicles, the system willnot be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in RE-VERSE, the driver is alerted using both thevisual and audible alarms, including reducingthe radio volume.

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intendedto be used to help a driver detect an oncomingvehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers mustbe careful when backing up, even when using

(Continued)


RCP. Always check carefully behind your ve-hicle, look behind you, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-ure to do so can result in serious injury ordeath.

Modes Of OperationNOTE:If allowed by law in the country in which thevehicle was purchased the Blind Spot Moni-toring can be turned on and off using theUconnect® System. Refer to “Customer-Programmable Features — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® Sys-tem — If Equipped

Three selectable modes of operation are avail-able in the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to“Customer- Programmable Features —Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings ” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, theBSM system will provide a visual alert in theappropriate side view mirror based on a de-tected object. However, when the system isoperating in RCP, the system will respond withboth visual and audible alerts when a detectedobject is present. Whenever an audible alert isrequested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide avisual alert in the appropriate side view mirrorbased on a detected object. If the turn signal isthen activated, and it corresponds to an alertpresent on that side of the vehicle, an audiblechime will also be sounded. Whenever a turnsignal and detected object are present on thesame side at the same time, both the visual andaudio alerts will be issued. In addition to theaudible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

NOTE:

• Whenever an audible alert is requested bythe BSM system, the radio is also muted.

76


• If the hazard flashers are on, the systemwill request the appropriate visual alertonly.

When the system is in RCP, the system shallrespond with both visual and audible alertswhen a detected object is present. Wheneveran audible alert is requested, the radio is alsomuted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; theRCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will beno visual or audible alerts from either the BSMor RCP systems.

NOTE:The BSM system will store the current oper-ating mode when the vehicle is shut off.Each time the vehicle is started the previ-ously stored mode will be recalled and used

SEATSSeats are a part of the Occupant RestraintSystem of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.


Power Seats — If EquippedSome models may be equipped with a powerdriver’s seat. The power seat switch is locatedon the outboard side of the seat near the floor.Use the switch to move the seat up, down,forward or rearward.

Power Seat Switch

77


Reclining The Seatback Forward OrRearwardThe seatback can be reclined both forward andrearward. Push the seat recliner switch forwardor rearward, the seatback will move in thedirection of the switch. Release the switch whenthe desired position has been reached.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so thatthe shoulder belt is no longer resting againstyour chest. In a collision you could slideunder the seat belt, which could result inserious injury or death.

Power Lumbar — If EquippedVehicles equipped with power driver or passengerseats may be also be equipped with power lumbar.The power lumbar switch is located on the out-board side of the power seat. Push the switchforward or rearward to increase or decrease thelumbar support. Push the switch upward or down-ward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Manual Seats — If EquippedManual Front Seat Forward/RearwardAdjustmentOn models equipped with manual seats, theadjusting bar is located at the front of the seats,near the floor.Power Seat Recliner Switch

Power Lumbar Switch

78


While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar andmove the seat forward or rearward. Release thebar once you have reached the desired posi-tion. Then, using body pressure, move forwardand rearward on the seat to be sure that theseat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may bedangerous. Moving a seat while drivingcould result in loss of control which couldcause a collision and serious injury ordeath.

• Seats should be adjusted before fasteningthe seat belts and while the vehicle isparked. Serious injury or death could resultfrom a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Front Seat Recline AdjustmentTo adjust the seatback, lift the lever located onthe outboard side of the seat, lean back to thedesired position and release the lever. To returnthe seatback, lift the lever, lean forward andrelease the lever.

WARNING!


Front Seat Adjustment Recline Lever

79


Manual Seat Height Adjustment — IfEquippedThe driver’s seat height can be raised or low-ered by using a lever, located on the outboardside of the seat. Pull upward on the lever toraise the seat height or push downward on thelever to lower the seat height.

Heated Seats — If EquippedOn some models, the front and rear seats maybe equipped with heaters located in the seatcushions.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to theskin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or otherphysical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, especiallyif used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat orseatback that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion. This may causethe seat heater to overheat. Sitting in aseat that has been overheated couldcause serious burns due to the increasedsurface temperature of the seat.

Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 5.0 —If EquippedThere are two heated seat switches that allowthe driver and passenger to operate the seatsindependently. The controls for each heater arelocated in the Uconnect® system screen.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heatsettings.

Press the “Climate” hard-key located on theright side of the Uconnect® display.

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-keyonce to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating.Press the soft-key a third time to shut theheating elements OFF.

NOTE:Once a heat setting is selected, heat will befelt within two to five minutes.

Seat Height Adjustment

Heated Seats Soft-Keys

80


When the HI-level setting is selected, the heaterwill provide a boosted heat level during the firstfour minutes of operation. Then, the heat outputwill drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-levelsetting is selected, the system will automaticallyswitch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 min-utes of continuous operation. At that time, thedisplay will change from HI to LO, indicating thechange. The LO-level setting will turn OFFautomatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

Front Heated Seats With Uconnect®8.4A/8.4AN — If EquippedThere are two heated seat soft-keys that allowthe driver and passenger to operate the seatsindependently. The controls for each heater arelocated in the Uconnect® system screen.

Press the “Controls” soft-key located on thebottom of the Uconnect® display.

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-keyonce to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating.Press the soft-key a third time to shut theheating elements OFF.

NOTE:Once a heat setting is selected, heat will befelt within two to five minutes.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heaterwill provide a boosted heat level during the firstfour minutes of operation. Then, the heat outputwill drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-levelsetting is selected, the system will automaticallyswitch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 min-utes of continuous operation. At that time, thedisplay will change from HI to LO, indicating thechange. The LO-level setting will turn OFFautomatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote StartOn models that are equipped with remote start,the driver’s heated seat can be programmed tocome on during a remote start. Refer to “Re-mote Starting System — If Equipped” in “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for fur-ther information.

Front Ventilated Seats WithUconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — IfEquippedOn some models, both the driver and passengerseats are ventilated. Located in the seat cushionand seatback are small fans that draw the air fromthe passenger compartment and pull air throughfine perforations in the seat cover to help keep thedriver and front passenger cooler in higher ambi-ent temperatures.

To operate the system, press the “Controls”soft-key located on the bottom of theUconnect® display.

Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” vented seatsoft-key once to select HI-level ventilation. Pressthe vented soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the vented soft-key a thirdtime to shut off the seat ventilation.

Heated Seats Soft-Keys

81


NOTE:The engine must be running for the venti-lated seats to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start,the driver’s ventilated seat can be programmedto come on during a remote start. Refer to“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”for further information.

Head RestraintsHead restraints are designed to reduce the riskof injury by restricting head movement in theevent of a rear impact. Head restraints shouldbe adjusted so that the top of the head restraintis located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must beproperly adjusted prior to operating the ve-hicle or occupying a seat. Head restraintsshould never be adjusted while the vehicle isin motion. Driving a vehicle with the headrestraints improperly adjusted or removedcould cause serious injury or death in theevent of a collision.

Active Head Restraints — Front SeatsThe front driver and passenger seats areequipped with Active Head Restraints (AHR). Inthe event of a rear impact the AHRs will auto-matically extend forward minimizing the gapbetween the back of the occupants head andthe AHR.

The AHRs will automatically return to their nor-mal position following a rear impact. If the AHRsdo not return to their normal position see yourauthorized dealer immediately.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on thehead restraint. To lower the head restraint,press the push button, located at the base of thehead restraint, and push downward on the headrestraint.

Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys

Push Button

82


NOTE:The head restraints should only be removedby qualified technicians, for service pur-poses only. If either of the head restraintsrequire removal, see your authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Do not place items over the top of the ActiveHead Restraint, such as coats, seat coversor portable DVD players. These items mayinterfere with the operation of the ActiveHead Restraint in the event of a collision andcould result in serious injury or death.

Rear Head RestraintsThe rear head restraints have two positions UPand DOWN. When the center seat is beingoccupied the head restraint should be in theraised position. When there are no occupants inthe center seat the head restraint can be low-ered for maximum visibility for the driver.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on thehead restraint. To lower the head restraint,press the push button, located at the base of thehead restraint, and push downward on the headrestraint.

60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat WithFold-Flat FeatureTo provide additional storage area, each rearseat can be folded flat. This allows for extendedcargo space and still maintains some rear seat-ing room.

NOTE:Prior to folding the rear seat, it may benecessary to position the front seat to itsmid-track position. Also, be sure that thefront seats are fully upright and positionedforward. This will allow the rear seat to folddown easily.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Push Button

83


To Lower The Rear Seat

1. Lift the seatback release lever located on theupper outer edge of the seat or pull the pull straplocated on the middle outer edge of the seat.

2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.

To Raise The Rear Seat

NOTE:If interference from the cargo area preventsthe seatback from fully locking, you willhave difficulty returning the seat to itsproper position.Raise the seatback and lock it into place.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely lockedinto position. If the seatback is not securelylocked into position the seat will not provide theproper stability for child seats and/or passen-gers. An improperly latched seat could causeserious injury.

Recliner AdjustmentThe rear seatback also reclines for additionalpassenger comfort. Pull on the pull strap whilesitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback.

WARNING!


Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap

84


DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IFEQUIPPEDThis feature allows the driver to store up to twodifferent memory profiles, for easy recallthrough a memory switch. Each memory profilecontains desired position settings for the driverseat and side mirrors and a set of desired radiostation presets.

The memory switch is located on the driver’sside door panel. The switch contains 3 buttons,a S (SET) button to activate the memory savefunction, the number (1) memory button and thenumber (2) memory button. The memory switchallows the driver to recall either of the twopre-programmed memory profiles by pressingthe appropriate number button on the switch.

Programming The Memory FeatureTo create a new memory profile, perform thefollowing:

NOTE:Saving a new memory profile will erase anexisting profile from memory.

1. Turn the ignition ON.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desiredpreferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radiostation presets).

3. Press and release the SET button on thememory switch, then press the side of thenumber (1) button within five seconds. TheElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), ifequipped, will display which memory position isbeing set.

If desired, a second memory profile can bestored into memory as follows:

1. Turn the ignition ON.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desiredpreferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radiostation presets).

3. Press and release the SET button on thememory switch, then press the number (2)button within five seconds. The EVIC, ifequipped, will display which memory position isbeing set.

NOTE:

• For vehicles equipped with an automatictransmission, memory profiles can be setwithout the vehicle in PARK, but the ve-hicle must be in PARK to recall a memoryprofile.

Driver Memory Switch

85


• For vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission, the vehicle speed must beat 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a memoryprofile.

• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Un-lock feature can be turned on and offthrough the EVIC, if equipped. If the Re-call Memory with Remote Key Unlock isnot turned on in (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features then the Linkingand Unlinking the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitter to Memory will not be suc-cessful. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-mation Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information.

Linking And Unlinking The RemoteKeyless Entry Transmitter ToMemoryYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterscan be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles with a press ofthe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

NOTE:Before programming your RKE transmittersyou must select the “Memory To FOB” fea-ture through the Uconnect® system screen.Refer to “Customer- Programmable Fea-tures — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

To program your RKE transmitters, perform thefollowing:

1. Remove the key from the ignition.

2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.

3. Press and release the SET button on thememory switch, then within five seconds pressand release the side of the rocker switch la-beled 1 or 2 accordingly. "Memory Profile Set”(1 or 2) will display in the EVIC, if equipped.

4. Press and release the LOCK button on theRKE transmitter within 10 seconds.

NOTE:Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked tothe memory setting by pressing the SETbutton followed by the UNLOCK button onthe RKE transmitter in Step 4 above.

Memory Position RecallNOTE:

• For vehicles equipped with an automatictransmission, the vehicle must be inPARK to recall memory positions. If arecall is attempted when the vehicle is notin PARK, a message will display in theEVIC, if equipped.

• For vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission, the vehicle speed must beat 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall memory posi-tions. If a recall is attempted with thevehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), amessage will display in the EVIC, ifequipped.

To recall the memory settings for driver one,press MEMORY button number 1 or the UN-LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked tomemory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two,press MEMORY button number 2 or the UN-LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked tomemory position 2.

86


A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of theMEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat willstop moving. A delay of one second will occurbefore another recall can be selected.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available WithMemory Seat Only)This feature provides automatic driver seat po-sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-ing and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends onwhere you have the driver seat positioned whenyou remove the key from the ignition switch.

• When you remove the key from the ignitionswitch, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in(60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat positionis greater than or equal to 2.7 in (68 mm)forward of the rear stop. The seat will returnto its previously set position when you insertthe key into the ignition switch and turn it outof the LOCK position.

• When you remove the key from the ignitionswitch, the driver seat will move to a position0.3 in (8 mm) forward of the rear stop if thedriver’s seat position is between 0.9 in and2.7 in (23 mm and 68 mm) forward of the rearstop. The seat will return to its previously setposition when you insert the key into theignition switch and turn it out of the LOCKposition.

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabledwhen the driver’s seat position is less than0.9 in (23 mm) forward of the rear stop. Atthis position, there is no benefit to the driverby moving the seat for Easy Exit or EasyEntry.

Each stored memory setting will have an asso-ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE:The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can beturned on or off through the programmablefeatures in the EVIC. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THEHOODTwo latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under thedrivers side of the instrument panel.

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pullthe safety latch release lever forward (towardyou). The safety latch release lever is locatedbehind the center front edge of the hood.

Hood Release

87


CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam thehood to close it. Lower the hood until it isopen approximately 6 in (15 cm), and thendrop it. This should secure both latches.Never drive your vehicle unless the hood isfully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle is inmotion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on theleft side of the instrument panel. Thisswitch controls the operation of theheadlights, parking lights, automatic

headlights — if equipped, instrument panellights, instrument panel light dimming, interiorlights, front and rear fog lights — if equippedand headlight leveling — if equipped.

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the firstdetent for parking light and instrument panellight operation. Rotate the headlight switch to

the second detent for headlight, parking lightand instrument panel light operation.

Automatic Headlights — If EquippedThis system automatically turns the headlightson or off according to ambient light levels. Toturn the system on, rotate the headlight switchclockwise to the third detent for automatic head-light operation. When the system is on, theheadlight time delay feature is also on. Thismeans the headlights will stay on for up to 90seconds after you place the ignition into theOFF position. To turn the automatic system off,move the headlight switch out of the AUTOposition.

NOTE:The engine must be running before theheadlights will come on in the automaticmode.

Headlights On With Wipers(Available with Automatic HeadlightsOnly)When this feature is active, the headlights willturn on approximately 10 seconds after thewipers are turned on if the headlight switch is

Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location

88


placed in the AUTO position. In addition, theheadlights will turn off when the wipers areturned off if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE:The Headlights On with Wipers feature canbe turned on or off using the Uconnect®System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

Headlight Leveling System — IfEquippedYour vehicle may be equipped with a headlightleveling system. This system allows the driver tomaintain proper headlight beam position withthe road surface regardless of vehicle load.

The control switch is located on the instrumentpanel next to the dimmer control.

To operate, rotate the controlswitch until the appropriate num-ber, which corresponds to the loadlisted on the chart, aligns with theindicator line on the switch.

0 /1 Driver only, or driver andfront passenger.

2

All seating positions occu-pied, plus an evenly dis-tributed load in the lug-gage compartment. The

total weight of passengersand load does not exceedthe maximum load capac-

ity of the vehicle.

3

Driver, plus an evenly dis-tributed load in the lug-gage compartment. Thetotal weight of the driver

and load does not exceedthe maximum load capac-

ity of the vehicle.

Headlight Time DelayThis feature provides the safety of headlight illu-mination for up to 90 seconds (programmable)when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.

To activate the delay feature, place the ignitionin the OFF position while the headlights are stillon. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 sec-

onds. The delay interval begins when the head-light switch is turned off.

If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, orplace the ignition in ACC or RUN, the systemwill cancel the delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE:

• The lights must be turned off within 45seconds of placing the ignition in the OFFposition to activate this feature.

• The headlight delay time is programmableusing the Uconnect® System, refer to“Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further infor-mation.

Automatic High Beam HeadlampControl — If EquippedThe Automatic High Beam Headlamp Controlsystem provides increased forward lighting atnight by automating high beam control throughthe use of a digital camera mounted on theinside rearview mirror. This camera detects

89


vehicle specific light and automatically switchesfrom high beams to low beams until the ap-proaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• Automatic High Beam Headlamp Controlcan be turned on or off using theUconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlightsand taillights of vehicles in the field ofview will cause headlights to remain onlonger (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,film, and other obstructions on the wind-shield or camera lens will cause the sys-tem to function improperly.

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror mustbe re-aimed to ensure proper performance. Seeyour local authorized dealer.

To Activate

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO head-light position.

2. Push the multifunction lever away from you(toward front of vehicle) to engage the highbeam mode.

NOTE:This system will not activate until the ve-hicle is at or above 15 mph (30 km/h).

To Deactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (orrearward in car) to manually deactivate thesystem (normal operation of low beams).

2. Push back on the multifunction lever onceagain to reactivate the system.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)The LED Daytime Running Lights will come onwhenever the ignition is placed in the RUNposition, the headlights are off, the transmissionis moved out of “Park” position, and the parkingbrake is off. The headlight switch must be usedfor normal nighttime driving.

NOTE:If allowed by law in the country in which thevehicle was purchased the Daytime RunningLights can be turned on and off using theUconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or position lights are on afterthe ignition is placed in the OFF position, achime will sound to alert the driver when thedriver’s door is opened.

Parking LightingTo operate the parking lighting, the ignition mustbe in the OFF position. Turn the headlightswitch to the “P” position. Then move the mul-tifunction lever up or down to turn on the left orright side parking lights.

90


Front And Rear Fog Lights — IfEquippedThe fog light switches are built into the headlightswitch.

To activate the front fog lights, pressthe upper half of the headlight switch.To turn off the front fog lights, press the

upper half of the headlight switch a secondtime.

To activate the rear fog lights, pressthe lower half of the headlight switch.To turn off the rear fog lights, pressthe lower half of the headlight switch a

second time.

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-minates when the fog lights are turned on.

Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever controls the operation ofthe turn signals, headlight beam selection andpassing lights. The multifunction lever is locatedon the left side of the steering column.

Turn SignalsMove the multifunction lever up or down and thearrows on each side of the instrument clusterflash to show proper operation of the front andrear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

• If either light remains on and does notflash, or there is a very fast flash rate,check for a defective outside light bulb. Ifan indicator fails to light when the lever ismoved, it would suggest that the indicatorbulb is defective.

• A “Turn Signal On” message will appearin the EVIC (if equipped) and a continuouschime will sound if the vehicle is drivenmore than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turnsignal on.

• When the Daytime Running Lights are onand a turn signal is activated, the DaytimeRunning Lamp will turn off on the side ofthe vehicle in which the turn signal isflashing. The Daytime Running Lamp willturn back on when the turn signal isturned off.

Lane Change AssistTap the lever up or down once, without movingbeyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left)will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam SwitchPush the multifunction lever away from you toswitch the headlights to high beam. Pull themultifunction lever toward you to switch theheadlights back to low beam.

Multifunction Lever

91


Flash-To-PassYou can signal another vehicle with your head-lights by lightly pulling the multifunction levertoward you. This will turn on the high beamsheadlights until the lever is released.

Front Map/Reading LightsThe front map/reading lights are mounted in theoverhead console. Each light can be turned onby pressing a switch on either side of theconsole. To turn the lights off, press the switch asecond time. These lights also turn on when adoor is opened, or when the UNLOCK button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed, or when the dimmer control is turnedcompletely upward to the second detent.

There are courtesy lights located above thefront seats. If your vehicle is equipped with apower sunroof the courtesy lights are locatedabove the rear seats. The courtesy lights can beturned on by pressing the lens. To turn the lightsoff, press the lens a second time.

Interior LightsThe interior lights come on when a door isopened.

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turnoff automatically 10 minutes after the ignition ismoved to the LOCK position. This will occur ifthe interior lights were switched on manually or

are on because a door is open. This includesthe glove box light, but not the trunk light. Torestore interior light operation, either turn theignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the lightswitch.

Dimmer ControlsThe dimmer control is part of the headlightswitch and is located on the left side of theinstrument panel.

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotatingthe right dimmer control upward will increasethe brightness of the instrument panel lights andlighted cupholders — if equipped.

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Instrument Panel Dimmer

92


Ambient Light ControlRotate the dimmer control upward or downwardto increase or decrease the brightness of theambient light located in the overhead consoleand the door handle lights.

Dome Light PositionRotate the instrument panel dimmer controlcompletely upward to the second detent to turnon the interior lights. The interior lights willremain on when the instrument panel dimmercontrol is in this position.

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control tothe extreme bottom OFF position. The interiorlights will remain off when the doors are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)Rotate the instrument panel dimmer controlupward to the first detent. This feature brightensall text displays such as the odometer, EVIC (ifequipped), and radio when the position lights orheadlights are on.

Battery Saver FeatureTo protect the battery, the interior lights will turnoff automatically 10 minutes after the ignitionswitch is moved to the LOCK position. This willoccur if the interior lights were switched onmanually or are on because a door is open.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS ANDWASHERSThe windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-cated on the windshield wiper/washer lever onthe right side of the steering column. The frontwipers are operated by rotating a switch, lo-cated on the end of the lever. For information onthe rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear WindowFeatures” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle”.

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

93


Windshield Wiper OperationRotate the end of the lever to one of the first fourdetent positions for intermittent settings, the fifthdetent for low wiper operation and the sixthdetent for high wiper operation.

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow thatprevents the windshield wiper blades fromreturning to the “park” position. If the wind-shield wiper switch is turned off, and the

(Continued)


blades cannot return to the “park” position,damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Intermittent Wiper SystemUse one of the four intermittent wiper settingswhen weather conditions make a single wipingcycle, with a variable delay between cycles,desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from amaximum of approximately 18 seconds be-tween cycles (first detent), to a cycle every onesecond (fourth detent).

NOTE:If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

Windshield Washer OperationTo use the washer, pull the lever rearwardtoward you and hold while spray is desired. Ifthe lever is pulled while in the intermittentsetting, the wipers will turn on and operate forseveral wipe cycles after the lever is released,and then resume the intermittent interval previ-ously selected.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Intermittent Wiper Operation

Windshield Washer Operation

94


If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in theoff position, the wipers will operate for severalwipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-shield could lead to a collision. You might notsee other vehicles or other obstacles. Toavoid sudden icing of the windshield duringfreezing weather, warm the windshield withthe defroster before and during windshieldwasher use.

MistUse the Mist feature when weather conditionsmake occasional usage of the wipers neces-sary. Push the lever upward to the Mist positionand release for a single wiping cycle.

NOTE:The mist feature does not activate thewasher pump; therefore, no washer fluid willbe sprayed on the windshield. The washfunction must be used in order to spray thewindshield with washer fluid.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedThis feature senses moisture on the windshieldand automatically activates the wipers for thedriver. The feature is especially useful for roadsplash or overspray from the windshield wash-ers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of themultifunction lever to one of five settings toactivate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjustedwith the multifunction lever. Wiper delay posi-tion 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delayposition 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 shouldbe used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1and 2 can be used if the driver desires less

wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if thedriver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiperswitch in the OFF position when not using thesystem.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operatewhen the wiper switch is in the low orhigh-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not func-tion properly when ice, or dried salt wateris present on the windshield.

• Use of Rain-X® or products containingwax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensingperformance.

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turnedon and off using the Uconnect® System,refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

Mist Control

95


The Rain Sensing system has protection fea-tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will notoperate under the following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When theignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensingsystem will not operate until the wiper switchis moved, vehicle speed is greater than0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature isgreater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position —When the ignition is ON, and the automatictransmission is in the NEUTRAL position, theRain Sensing system will not operate untilthe wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed isgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift leveris moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehiclesequipped with Remote Starting system, RainSensing wipers are not operational when thevehicle is in the remote start mode. Once theoperator is in the vehicle and has placed theignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensingwiper operation can resume, if it has beenselected, and no other inhibit conditions (men-tioned previously) exist.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERINGCOLUMNThis feature allows you to tilt the steering col-umn upward or downward. It also allows you tolengthen or shorten the steering column. Thetilt/telescoping lever is located below the steer-ing wheel at the end of the steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the controlhandle downward (toward the floor). To tilt thesteering column, move the steering wheel up-ward or downward as desired. To lengthen orshorten the steering column, pull the steeringwheel outward or push it inward as desired. To

lock the steering column in position, push thecontrol handle upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering columnunlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow thiswarning may result in serious injury or death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL —IF EQUIPPEDThe steering wheel contains a heating elementthat helps warm your hands in cold weather. Theheated steering wheel has only one temperaturesetting. Once the heated steering wheel has beenturned on it will operate up to 80 minutes beforeautomatically shutting off. The heated steeringwheel can shut off early or may not turn on whenthe steering wheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel can be turned onand off using the Uconnect® System.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever

96


Uconnect® 5.0 System — If Equipped

Press the “Climate” hard-key then touch the“Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on theheated steering wheel. Press the “HeatedSteering Wheel” soft-key a second time to turnthe heated steering wheel off.

Uconnect® 8.4 System — If Equipped

Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the“Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on theheated steering wheel. Press the “HeatedSteering Wheel” soft-key a second time to turnthe heated steering wheel off.

NOTE:The engine must be running for the heatedsteering wheel to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start,the heated steering wheel can be programmedto come on during a remote start. Refer to“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to theskin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or otherphysical conditions must exercise carewhen using the steering wheel heater. Itmay cause burns even at low tempera-tures, especially if used for long periods.

(Continued)

Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

Controls Soft-Key

Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

97



• Do not place anything on the steeringwheel that insulates against heat, such asa blanket or steering wheel covers of anytype and material. This may cause thesteering wheel heater to overheat.

ELECTRONIC SPEEDCONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDWhen engaged, the Electronic Speed Controltakes over accelerator operations at speedsgreater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo-cated on the right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE:In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-tronic Speed Control System has been de-signed to shut down if multiple Speed Controlfunctions are operated at the same time. If thisoccurs, the Electronic Speed Control Systemcan be reactivated by pushing the ElectronicSpeed Control ON/OFF button and resettingthe desired vehicle set speed.

To ActivatePush the ON/OFF button to activate the elec-tronic speed control. The Cruise Indicator Lightin the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) will illuminate. To turn the system off,push the ON/OFF button a second time. TheCruise Indicator Light will turn off. The systemshould be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control sys-tem on when not in use is dangerous. Youcould accidentally set the system or cause itto go faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always leavethe system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired SpeedTurn the Electronic Speed Control ON.

NOTE:The vehicle should be traveling at a steadyspeed and on level ground before pressingthe SET (+) or SET (-) button.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL3 — RESUME

98


When the vehicle has reached the desiredspeed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button andrelease. Release the accelerator and the ve-hicle will operate at the selected speed.

To DeactivateA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing theCANCEL button, or normal brake pressurewhile slowing the vehicle will deactivate theElectronic Speed Control without erasing theset speed memory.

Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning theignition switch OFF erases the set speedmemory.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push theRES button and release. Resume can be usedat any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed SettingWhen the Electronic Speed Control is set, youcan increase speed by pushing the SET (+)button. If the button is continually pressed, the

set speed will continue to increase until thebutton is released, then the new set speed willbe established.

Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

To decrease speed while the Electronic SpeedControl is set, push the SET (-) button. If thebutton is continually held in the SET (-) position,the set speed will continue to decrease until thebutton is released. Release the button when thedesired speed is reached, and the new setspeed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a de-crease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

NOTE:Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends onselection of US or METRIC units in the EVICdisplay settings menu, or the RADIO set-tings menu (dependent on vehicle configu-ration).

To Accelerate For PassingPress the accelerator as you would normally.When the pedal is released, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On HillsThe transmission may downshift on hills tomaintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:The Electronic Speed Control system main-tains speed up and down hills. A slightspeed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain mayoccur so it may be preferable to drive withoutElectronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerouswhere the system cannot maintain a constantspeed. Your vehicle could go too fast for theconditions, and you could lose control and havean accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Con-trol in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,icy, snow-covered or slippery.

99


ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(ACC) — IF EQUIPPEDAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases thedriving convenience provided by cruise controlwhile traveling on highways and major road-ways. However, it is not a safety system and notdesigned to prevent collisions.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control en-gaged in light to moderate traffic conditionswithout the constant need to reset your cruisecontrol. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and aforward facing camera designed to detect avehicle directly ahead of you.

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicleahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixedset speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,ACC will apply limited braking or accel-eration (not to exceed the original setspeed) automatically to maintain a presetfollowing distance, while matching thespeed of the vehicle ahead.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-nience system. It is not a substitute foractive driving involvement. It is always thedriver’s responsibility to be attentive ofroad, traffic, and weather conditions, ve-hicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;and, most importantly, brake operation toensure safe operation of the vehicle underall road conditions. Your complete atten-tion is always required while driving tomaintain safe control of your vehicle. Fail-ure to follow these warnings can result in acollision and death or serious personalinjury.

• The ACC system:• Does not react to pedestrians, on-

coming vehicles, and stationary ob-jects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in atraffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

(Continued)


• Cannot take street, traffic, andweather conditions into account, andmay be limited upon adverse sightdistance conditions.

• Does not always fully recognize com-plex driving conditions, which canresult in wrong or missing distancewarnings.

• Can only apply a maximum of 40% ofthe vehicle’s braking capability, andwill not bring the vehicle to a com-plete stop.

You should switch off the ACC system:• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy

snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complexdriving situations (i.e., in highway con-struction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway offramp; when driving on roads that are wind-ing, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or havesteep uphill or downhill slopes.

(Continued)

100



• When towing a trailer up or down steepslopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.

The Cruise Control system has two controlmodes:

• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintain-ing an appropriate distance between ve-hicles.

• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode forcruising at a constant preset speed. Foradditional information, refer to “Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in thissection.

NOTE:Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will notreact to preceding vehicles. Always beaware of the mode selected.

You can change the mode by using the CruiseControl buttons. The two control modes functiondifferently. Always confirm which mode is selected.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)OperationThe speed control buttons (located on the rightside of the steering wheel) operates the ACCsystem.

NOTE:Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifi-cations to the vehicle will effect the perfor-mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control.

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC)You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speedis above 0 mph (0 km/h).

The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is19 mph (30 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in theREADY state, the Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC) displays “ACC Ready.”

When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

NOTE:You cannot enable ACC under the followingconditions:

• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.

• When you apply the brakes.

• When the parking brake is set.

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CON-TROL ON/OFF2 — SET+/ACCEL3 — RESUME4 — SET-/DECEL5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE8 — CANCEL

101


• When the automatic transmission is inPARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.

• When the Vehicle speed is outside of thespeed range.

• When the brakes are overheated.

• When the driver door is open.

• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.

To ActivatePush and release the Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in theEVIC displays “ACC Ready.”

To turn the system OFF, push and release theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF buttonagain. At this time, the system will turn off andthe EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) Off.”

WARNING!Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)system on when not in use is dangerous. Youcould accidentally set the system or cause it togo faster than you want. You could lose controland have a collision. Always leave the systemoff when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired ACC SpeedWhen the vehicle reaches the speed desired,push the SET + button or the SET - button andrelease. The EVIC will display the set speed.

If the system is Set when the vehicle speed isbelow 19 mph (30 km/h), the Set Speed shall bedefaulted to 19 mph (30 km/h). If the system isSet when the vehicle speed is above 19 mph(30 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the currentspeed of the vehicle.

NOTE:ACC cannot be set if there is a stationaryvehicle in front of your vehicle in closeproximity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Ifyou do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:

• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will dis-play in the EVIC.

• The system will not be controlling the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicleahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-mined by the position of the acceleratorpedal.

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

102


To CancelThe following conditions cancel the system:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• You press the CANCEL switch.

• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) eventoccurs.

• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.

• The shift lever is removed from the Driveposition.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Con-trol System (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.

• Driver door is opened at low speeds.

• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.

To Turn OffThe system will turn off and clear the set speedin memory if:

• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)ON/OFF button.

• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl ON/OFF button.

• You turn OFF the ignition.

• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.

To ResumeIf there is a set speed in memory press the RES(resume) button and then remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display thelast set speed.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for lon-ger than 2 seconds, then the driver willeither have to press the Resume button,or apply the throttle to reengage the ACCto the existing Set Speed.

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is astationary vehicle in-front of your vehiclein close proximity.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used iftraffic and road conditions permit. Resuminga set speed that is too high or too low forprevailing traffic and road conditions couldcause the vehicle to accelerate or deceleratetoo sharply for safe operation. Failure tofollow these warnings can result in a collisionand death or serious personal injury.

To Vary The Speed SettingWhile ACC is set, you can increase the setspeed by pressing the SET + button.

Pressing the SET + button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

If the SET + button is continually pressed, theset speed will continue to increase in 5 mph(10 km/h) increments until the button is re-leased. The increase in set speed is reflected inthe EVIC display.

103


While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-creased by pressing the SET - button.

Pressing the SET - button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a de-crease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

If the SET - button is continually pressed, theset speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph(10 km/h) increments until the button is re-leased. The decrease in set speed is reflectedin the EVIC display.

NOTE:

• When you override and push the SET +button or SET - buttons, the new SetSpeed will be the current speed of thevehicle.

• When you use the SET - button to decel-erate, if the engine’s braking power doesnot slow the vehicle sufficiently to reachthe set speed, the brake system will auto-matically slow the vehicle.

• The ACC system maintains set speedwhen driving up hill and down hill. How-ever, a slight speed change on moderatehills is normal. In addition, downshiftingmay occur while climbing uphill or de-scending downhill. This is normal opera-tion and necessary to maintain set speed.When driving up hill and down hill, theACC system will cancel if the brakingtemperature exceeds normal range(overheated).

Setting The Following Distance InACCThe specified following distance for ACC can beset by varying the distance setting between fourbars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (me-dium) and one bar (short). Using this distancesetting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculatesand sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. Thisdistance setting displays in the EVIC.

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

104


To increase the distance setting, press theDistance Setting — Increase button and re-

lease. Each time the button is pressed, thedistance setting increases by one bar (longer).

To decrease the distance setting, press theDistance Setting — Decrease button and re-lease. Each time the button is pressed, thedistance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle willmaintain the set speed. If a slower movingvehicle is detected in the same lane, the EVICdisplays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon,and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati-cally to maintain the distance setting, regard-less of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distanceuntil:

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speedabove the set speed.

• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane orview of the sensor.

• The distance setting is changed.

• The system disengages. (Refer to the infor-mation on ACC Activation).

The maximum braking applied by ACC is lim-ited; however, the driver can always apply thebrakes manually, if necessary.

NOTE:The brake lights will illuminate whenever theACC system applies the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACCpredicts that its maximum braking level is notsufficient to maintain the set distance. If thisoccurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in theEVIC and a chime will sound while ACC contin-ues to apply its maximum braking capacity.

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)Brake Alert

105


When this occurs, you should immediately ap-ply the brakes as needed to maintain a safedistance from the vehicle ahead.

Overtake AidWhen driving with ACC engaged and followinga target vehicle, the system will provide anadditional acceleration to assist in passing ve-hicles in front. This additional acceleration istriggered when the driver utilizes the left turnsignal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,Overtake Aid is active only when passing on theleft hand side of the Target vehicles.

When a vehicle goes from a location with lefthand drive traffic to a location with right handdrive traffic, the ACC system will automaticallydetect traffic direction. In this condition, Over-take Aid is active only when passing on the rightside of the Target vehicle. This additional accel-eration is triggered when the driver utilizes theright turn signal. In this condition the ACCsystem will no longer provide Overtake Aid onthe left side until it determines that the vehiclehas moved back to a location with left handdrive traffic.

ACC Operation at StopIf the ACC system brings your vehicle to astandstill while following a target vehicle, if thetarget vehicle starts moving within 2 seconds ofyour vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehiclewill resume motion without the need for anydriver action.

After the ACC system holds your vehicle at astandstill for approximately 3 consecutive min-utes, the parking brake will be activated, andthe ACC system will be cancelled.

While the ACC system is holding your vehicle ata standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled orthe driver door is opened, the parking brake willbe activated, and the ACC system will be can-celled.

WARNING!When the ACC system is resuming speed, thedriver must ensure that there are no pedestri-ans, vehicles or objects in the path of thevehicle. Failure to follow these warnings canresult in a collision and death or serious per-sonal injury.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) MenuThe EVIC displays the current ACC systemsettings. The EVIC is located in the center of theinstrument cluster. The information it displaysdepends on ACC system status.

Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(ACC) ON/OFF button (located on the steeringwheel) until one of the following displays in theEVIC:


When ACC is deactivated, the display will read“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”


When ACC is activated but the vehicle speedsetting has not been selected, the display willread “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”

Press the SET + or the SET- button (located onthe steering wheel) and the following will displayin the EVIC:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display inthe instrument cluster.

106


The ACC screen may display once again if anyACC activity occurs, which may include any ofthe following:

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The EVIC will return to the last display se-lected after five seconds of no ACC displayactivity.

Display Warnings And Maintenance“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front OfVehicle” WarningThe “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front RadarSensor” warning will display and also a chimewill indicate when conditions temporarily limitsystem performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC systemmay also become temporarily blinded due to

obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In thesecases, the EVIC will display “ACC / FCW Un-available Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and thesystem will deactivate.

The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front RadarSensor” message can sometimes be displayedwhile driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tun-nels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). TheACC system will recover after the vehicle hasleft these areas. Under rare conditions, whenthe radar is not tracking any vehicles or objectsin its path this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE:If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe FrontRadar Sensor” warning is active Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still avail-able. For additional information refer to“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise ControlMode” in this section.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the drivershould examine the sensor. It may requirecleaning or removal of an obstruction. Thesensor is located in the center of the vehiclebehind the lower grille.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, itis important to note the following maintenanceitems:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipethe sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautiousnot to damage the sensor lens.

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor.Doing so could cause an ACC system mal-function or failure and require a sensorrealignment.

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle isdamaged due to a collision, see your autho-rized dealer for service.

• Do not attach or install any accessories nearthe sensor, including transparent material oraftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause anACC system failure or malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the systemis no longer present, the system will return tothe “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and willresume function by simply reactivating it.

107


NOTE:

• If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe FrontRadar Sensor” message occurs fre-quently (e.g. more than once on everytrip) without any snow, rain, mud, or otherobstruction, have the radar sensor re-aligned at your authorized dealer.

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protec-tor, an aftermarket grille or modifying thegrille is not recommended. Doing so mayblock the sensor and inhibit ACC / FCWoperation.

“Clean Front Windshield” WarningThe “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality CleanFront Windshield” warning will display and alsoa chime will indicate when conditions temporar-ily limit system performance. This most oftenoccurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snowor heavy rain and fog. The ACC system mayalso become temporarily blinded due to ob-structions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on wind-shield and fog on the inside of glass. In thesecases, the EVIC will display “ACC / FCW Lim-ited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” andthe system will have degraded performance.

The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality CleanFront Windshield” message can sometimes bedisplayed while driving in adverse weather con-ditions. The ACC / FCW system will recoverafter the vehicle has left these areas. Underrare conditions, when the camera is not trackingany vehicles or objects in its path this warningmay temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the drivershould examine the windshield and the cameralocated on the back side of the inside rear viewmirror. They may require cleaning or removal ofan obstruction.

When the condition that created limited func-tionality is no longer present, the system willreturn to full functionality.

NOTE:If the “ACC / FCW Limited FunctionalityClean Front Windshield” message occursfrequently (e.g. more than once on everytrip) without any snow, rain, mud, or otherobstruction, have the windshield and for-ward facing camera inspected at your autho-rized dealer.

Service ACC/FCW WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”or“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,there may be an internal system fault or atemporary malfunction that limits ACC function-ality. Although the vehicle is still drivable undernormal conditions, ACC will be temporarily un-available. If this occurs, try activating ACCagain later, following a key cycle. If the problempersists, see your authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACCIn certain driving situations, ACC may havedetection issues. In these cases, ACC maybrake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs tostay alert and may need to intervene.

Towing A Trailer

NOTE:Towing a trailer is not advised when usingACC.

108


Offset DrivingACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lanethat is offset from your direct line of travel, or avehicle merging in from a side lane. There maynot be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.The offset vehicle may move in and out of theline of travel, which can cause your vehicle tobrake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Turns And BendsWhen driving on a curve with ACC engaged, thesystem may decrease the vehicle speed andacceleration for stability reasons, with no targetvehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of thecurve the system will resume your original SetSpeed. This is a part of normal ACC systemfunctionality.

NOTE:On tight turns ACC performance may belimited.

Using ACC On HillsWhen driving on hills, ACC may not detect avehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steep-ness of the hills, ACC performance may belimited.

109


Lane ChangingACC may not detect a vehicle until it is com-pletely in the lane in which you are traveling. Inthe illustration shown, ACC has not yet detectedthe vehicle changing lanes and it may not detectthe vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC systemto take action. ACC may not detect a vehicleuntil it is completely in the lane. There may notbe sufficient distance to the lane-changing ve-hicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply thebrakes if necessary.

Narrow VehiclesSome narrow vehicles traveling near the outeredges of the lane or edging into the lane are notdetected until they have moved fully into thelane. There may not be sufficient distance to thevehicle ahead.

Stationary Objects And VehiclesACC does not react to stationary objects andstationary vehicles. For example, ACC will notreact in situations where the vehicle you arefollowing exits your lane and the vehicle aheadis stopped in your lane. Always be attentive andready to apply the brakes if necessary.

General Information

FCC Requirements For Vehicular RadarSystems

Classification Specifications:

47 C.F.R. Part 15

47 C.F.R Part 15.515

Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl ModeIn addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, aNormal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode isavailable for cruising at fixed speeds. The Nor-

110


mal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode isdesigned to maintain a set cruising speed with-out requiring the driver to operate the accelera-tor. Cruise Control can only be operated if thevehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).

To change between the different cruise controlmodes, press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CON-TROL (ACC) ON/OFF button which turns theACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) CON-TROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL (FixedSpeed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button willresult in turning ON (changing to) the Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.

WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlmode, the system will not react to vehiclesahead. Be sure to maintain a safe distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.Always be aware which mode is selected.Failure to follow these warnings can result ina collision and death or serious personalinjury.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed)Cruise Control ON. When the ve-hicle has reached the desiredspeed, press the SET (+) or SET (-)button and release. Release theaccelerator and the vehicle will op-

erate at the selected speed. Once a speed hasbeen set a message CRUISE CONTROL SETTO MPH/KM will appear indicating what speedwas set. This light will turn on when the elec-tronic speed control is SET.

To Vary The Speed SettingWhen the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, you can increase speed by pushing theSET (+) button. If the button is continuallypressed, the set speed will continue to increaseuntil the button is released, then the new setspeed will be established.

Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in anincrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, you can increase the set speed bypressing and holding the SET + button. If thebutton is continually pressed, the set speed willcontinue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) incre-ments until the button is released. The increasein set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.

To decrease speed while the Normal (FixedSpeed) Cruise Control is set, push the SET (-)button. If the button is continually held in theSET (-) position, the set speed will continue todecrease until the button is released. Releasethe button when the desired speed is reached,and the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a de-crease of 1 mph (1 km/h).

While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Controlis set, the set speed can be decreased bypressing and holding the SET - button. If thebutton is continually pressed, the set speed willcontinue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) incre-ments until the button is released. The decreasein set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.

111


To CancelThe following conditions will cancel the Normal(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearingthe memory:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• You press the CANCEL button.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Con-trol System (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The braking temperature exceeds normalrange (overheated).

• The shift lever is removed from the Driveposition.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push theRES button and release. Resume can be usedat any speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).

To Turn OffThe system will turn off and erase the set speedin memory if:

• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) CruiseControl ON/OFF button.

• You turn off the ignition.

• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.

• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)On/Off button.

FORWARD COLLISIONWARNING (FCW) WITHMITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)With Mitigation OperationThe Forward Collision Warning (FCW) systemwith mitigation provides the driver with audiblewarnings, visual warnings (within the EVIC),and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driverwhen it detects a potential frontal collision. Thewarnings and limited braking are intended toprovide the driver with enough time to react,avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE:FCW monitors the information from the for-ward looking sensors as well as the Elec-tronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculatethe probability of a forward collision. Whenthe system determines that a forward colli-sion is probable, the driver will be providedwith audible and visual warnings and mayprovide a brake jerk warning. If the driverdoes not take action based upon these pro-gressive warnings, then the system will pro-vide a limited level of active braking to helpslow the vehicle and mitigate the potentialforward collision. If the driver reacts to thewarnings by braking and the system deter-mines that the driver intends to avoid thecollision by braking but has not appliedsufficient brake force, the system will com-pensate and provide additional brake forceas required.

112


When the system determines a collision withthe vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,the warning message will be deactivated.

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is5 mph (10 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on ob-jects other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the courseprediction. This is expected and is a partof normal FCW activation andfunctionality.

• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. Toprevent such misuse of the system, after4 Active Braking events within a keycycle, the Active Braking portion of FCWwill be deactivated until the next keycycle.

• The FCW system is intended for on-roaduse only. If the vehicle is taken off-road,the FCW system should be deactivated toprevent unnecessary warnings to the sur-roundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD LowRange, the FCW system will be automati-cally deactivated.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not in-tended to avoid a collision on its own, norcan FCW detect every type of potential col-lision. The driver has the responsibility toavoid a collision by controlling the vehicle viabraking and steering. Failure to follow thiswarning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF

NOTE:The default status of FCW is “On”, thisallows the system to warn you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you.The forward collision button is located on theswitch panel below the Uconnect® display.

To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forwardcollision button once to turn the system OFF(led turns on).

To turn the FCW system back ON, press theforward collision button again to turn the systemON (led turns off).

FCW Message

Forward Collision Button

113


• Changing the FCW status to “Off” preventsthe system from warning you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you.

• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far.Far warns the driver of a possible collisionearlier and Near warns the driver later.

• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off”prevents the system from providing limitedactive braking, or additional brake support ifthe driver is not braking adequately in theevent of a potential frontal collision, but main-tains the audible and visual warnings.

NOTE:The FCW system state is kept in memoryfrom one key cycle to the next. If the systemis turned OFF, it will remain off when thevehicle is restarted.

Changing FCW And Active Braking Status

To Change The FCW Sensitivity And ActiveBraking Settings With Uconnect® 8.4/8.4ASystem Screen — If Equipped.

Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivityand Active Braking:

NOTE:The settings can only be changed when thevehicle is in PARK.

1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on thebottom of the Uconnect® display.

2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.

3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.

4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far orNear soft-key for your desired preference.

5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.

NOTE:A check mark will appear in the selectionbox to indicate the setting.

To Change The FCW Sensitivity And ActiveBraking Settings With Uconnect® 5.0 Sys-tem Screen — If Equipped.

Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivityand Active Braking:

NOTE:The settings can only be changed when thevehicle is in PARK.

1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on thelower right side of the Uconnect® system.


3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.

4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.

5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far orNear soft-key for your desired preference. Thenpress the back arrow.

6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.

7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.

The default status of FCW is the “Far” settingand the Active Braking is the “On” setting, thisallows the system to warn you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you whenyou are farther away and it applies limitedbraking. This gives you the most reaction timeto avoid a possible collision.

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,allows the system to warn you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you whenyou are much closer. This setting provides less

114


reaction time than the “Far” setting, which al-lows for a more dynamic driving experience.

NOTE:

• The system will retain the last settingselected by the driver after ignition shutdown.

• FCW may not react to irrelevant objectssuch as overhead objects, ground reflec-tions, objects not in the path of the car,stationary objects that are far away, on-coming traffic, or leading vehicles withthe same or higher rate of speed.

• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with theunavailable screens.

FCW Limited WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-shield” momentarily, there may be a conditionthat limits FCW functionality. Although the ve-hicle is still drivable under normal conditions,the active braking may not be fully available.Once the condition that limited the system per-formance is no longer present, the system will

return to its full performance state. If the prob-lem persists, see your authorized dealer.

Service FCW WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault.Although the vehicle is still drivable under nor-mal conditions, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED

LaneSense OperationThe LaneSense system is operational atspeeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense systemuses a forward looking camera to detect lanemarkings and measure vehicle position withinthe lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and thedriver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (noturn signal applied), the LaneSense systemprovides a haptic warning in the form of torque

applied to the steering wheel to prompt thedriver to remain within the lane boundaries. Ifthe driver continues to unintentionally drift out ofthe lane, the LaneSense system provides avisual warning through the instrument cluster toprompt the driver to remain within the laneboundaries.

The driver may manually override the hapticwarning by applying torque into the steeringwheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detectedand the driver unintentionally drifts across thelane marking (no turn signal applied), the La-neSense system provides a visual warningthrough the instrument cluster to prompt thedriver to remain within the lane. When only asingle lane marking is detected, a haptic(torque) warning will not be provided.

115


NOTE:When operating conditions have been met,the LaneSense system will monitor if thedriver’s hands are on the steering wheel andprovides an audible warning to the driverwhen the driver’s hands are not detected onthe steering wheel. The system will cancel ifthe driver does not return their hands to thewheel.

Turning LaneSense ON Or OFFThe default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.

The LaneSense button is located on the switchpanel below the Uconnect® display.

To turn the LaneSense system ON, press theLaneSense button to turn the system ON (LEDturns off). A “Lane Sense On” message isshown in the EVIC.

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press theLaneSense button once to turn the system OFF(LED turns on).

NOTE:The LaneSense system will retain the lastsystem state ON or OFF from the last igni-tion cycle when the ignition is changed tothe ON/RUN position.

LaneSense Warning MessageThe LaneSense system will indicate the currentlane drift condition through the Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC).

3.5 EVIC Screen — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON; the lanelines are gray when the lane boundaries havenot been detected and the LaneSense indicatoris solid white.

LaneSense Warning Button

Lane Sense On Message

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

116


Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane De-tected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, theLaneSense indicator is solid white when onlythe left lane marking has been detected andthe system is ready to provide visual warn-ings in the EVIC if an unintentional lanedeparture occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses thelane has been approached and is in a lanedeparture situation, the left line flashes yel-low and the LaneSense indicator changesfrom solid white to flashing yellow.

NOTE:The LaneSense system operates with thesimilar behavior for a right lane departurewhen only the right lane marking has beendetected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lanelines turn from gray to white to indicate thatthe lane markings have been detected. TheLaneSense indicator is solid green whenboth lane markings have been detected andthe system is “armed” to provide visual warn-ings in the EVIC and a torque warning in thesteering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-ture occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lanedrift situation, the left thick lane line turnsfrom solid white to solid yellow. The La-neSense indicator changes from solid greento solid yellow. At this time torque is appliedto the steering wheel in the opposite directionof the lane boundary.

Lane Approached (Flashing YellowLine/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

117


• For example: If approaching the left side ofthe lane the steering wheel will turn to theright.

• When the LaneSense system senses thelane has been approached and is in a lanedeparture situation, the left lane line flashesfrom a thin yellow line to thick yellow line andthe LaneSense indicator changes from solidyellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque isapplied to the steering wheel in the oppositedirection of the lane boundary.


NOTE:The LaneSense system operates with thesimilar behavior for a right lane departure.

7.0 EVIC Screen — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON; the lanelines are gray when the lane boundaries havenot been detected and the LaneSense indicatoris solid white.

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane De-tected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, theLaneSense indicator is solid white when onlythe left lane marking has been detected andthe system is ready to provide visual warn-ings in the EVIC if an unintentional lanedeparture occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses thelane has been approached and is in a lanedeparture situation, the left thick lane lineflashes (on/off) and the LaneSense indicatorchanges from solid white to flashing yellow.

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, SolidWhite Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

Lane Approached (Flashing Thin Yellow LineTo Thick Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

118


NOTE:The LaneSense system operates with thesimilar behavior for a right lane departurewhen only the right lane marking has beendetected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lanelines turn from gray to white to indicate thatthe lane markings have been detected. TheLaneSense indicator is solid green whenboth lane markings have been detected andthe system is “armed” to provide visual warn-

ings in the EVIC and a torque warning in thesteering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-ture occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lanedeparture situation, the left thick lane line andleft thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSenseindicator changes from solid green to solidyellow. At this time torque is applied to thesteering wheel in the opposite direction of thelane boundary.


• When the LaneSense system senses thelane has been approached and is in a lanedeparture situation, the left thick lane lineflashes thick yellow to thin yellow. The La-neSense indicator changes from solid yellowto flashing yellow. At this time torque isapplied to the steering wheel in the oppositedirection of the lane boundary.


Lane Approached (Flashing ThickLine/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

Lane Sensed (Solid Thick Yellow Line/SolidYellow Indicator)

119


NOTE:The LaneSense system operates with thesimilar behavior for a right lane departure.

Changing LaneSense StatusThe LaneSense system settings can be config-ured through the Uconnect® system screen.

Follow these steps to change the LaneSensesettings:

1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on thebottom of the Uconnect® display.



When in the Safety & Driving Assistancescreen, you can configure the intensity of thetorque warning and the warning zone sensitivity(early/late) through the personalization settings.

NOTE:

• When enabled the system operates above37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph(180 km/h).

• Use of the turn signal suppresses thewarnings.

• The system will not apply torque to thesteering wheel whenever a safety systemengages. (anti-lock brakes, traction con-trol system, electronic stability control,forward collision warning, etc.)

PARKSENSE® REAR PARKASSIST — IF EQUIPPEDThe ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system pro-vides visual and audible indications of the dis-tance between the rear fascia and a detectedobstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parkingmaneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System UsagePrecautions for limitations of this system andrecommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cyclewhen the ignition is changed to the ON/RUNposition.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shiftlever is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabledat this shift lever position, the system will remainactive until the vehicle speed is increased toapproximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. Whenin REVERSE and above the system’s operatingspeed, a warning will appear in the EVIC indi-cating the vehicle speed is too fast. The systemwill become active again if the vehicle speed isdecreased to speeds less than approximately6 mph (9 km/h).

Lane Approached (Flashing Thick Yellow ToThin Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

120


ParkSense® SensorsThe four ParkSense® sensors, located in therear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind thevehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-mately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) fromthe rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-tion, depending on the location, type and orien-tation of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning DisplayThe ParkSense® Warning screen will only bedisplayed if Sound and Display is selected fromthe Customer - Programmable Features sectionof the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect®Settings” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is locatedwithin the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicatethe distance between the rear fascia/bumperand the detected obstacle. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” inUnderstanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

ParkSense® DisplayWhen the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC willdisplay the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle byshowing a single arc in one or more regionsbased on the obstacle’s distance and locationrelative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rearregion, the display will show a single solid arc inthe center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer tothe obstacle, the display will show the single arcmoving closer to the vehicle and the sound tonewill change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or rightrear region, the display will show a single flashingarc in the left and/or right rear region and willproduce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle movescloser to the obstacle, the display will show thesingle arc moving closer to the vehicle and thetone will change from fast to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

121


The vehicle is close to the obstacle when thewarning display shows one flashing arc andsounds a continuous tone. The following chartshows the warning alert operation when thesystem is detecting an obstacle:

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc


Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

122


WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance(in/cm)

Greater than79 in (200 cm)

79-59 in(200-150 cm)

59-47 in(150-120 cm)

47-39 in(120-100 cm)

39-25 in(100-65 cm)

25-12 in(65-30 cm)

Less than12 in (30 cm)

Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Audible AlertChime

None Single 1/2-Second Tone

(for rear centeronly)

Slow(for rear center

only)


only)

Fast(for rear center

only)

Fast Continuous

Radio VolumeReduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE:ParkSense® will reduce the volume of theradio, if on, when the system is sounding anaudio tone.

123


Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled withthe ParkSense® switch, located on the switchpanel below the Uconnect® display.

When the ParkSense® switch is pressed todisable the system, the instrument cluster willdisplay the “PARKSENSE OFF” message forapproximately five seconds. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation. When the shift lever is moved toREVERSE and the system is disabled, theEVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” mes-sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON whenParkSense® is disabled or requires service.The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF whenthe system is enabled. If the ParkSense®switch is pressed, and requires service, theParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily,and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense® Rear ParkAssist SystemDuring vehicle start up, when the ParkSense®Rear Park Assist System has detected a faultedcondition, the instrument cluster will actuate asingle chime, once per ignition cycle, and it willdisplay the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLEWIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSEUNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” mes-sage. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information. When theshift lever is moved to REVERSE and thesystem has detected a faulted condition, theEVIC will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-

QUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle isin REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSensewill not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REARSENSORS” appears in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) make sure the outersurface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirtor other obstruction and then cycle the ignition.If the message continues to appear, see anauthorized dealer.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-QUIRED” appears in the EVIC, see an autho-rized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® SystemClean the ParkSense® sensors with water, carwash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough orhard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense® Switch

124


ParkSense® System UsagePrecautionsNOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free ofsnow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep theParkSense® system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-brations could affect the performance ofParkSense®.

• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the in-strument cluster will display“PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, onceyou turn ParkSense® off, it remains offuntil you turn it on again, even if you cyclethe ignition key.

• When you move the shift lever to theREVERSE position and ParkSense® isturned OFF, the EVIC will display“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as longas the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce thevolume of the radio when it is sounding atone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly,taking care not to scratch or damagethem. The sensors must not be coveredwith ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.Failure to do so can result in the systemnot working properly. The ParkSense®system might not detect an obstacle be-hind the fascia/bumper, or it could pro-vide a false indication that an obstacle isbehind the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn theParkSense® system OFF if objects suchas bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. areplaced within 12 in (30 cm) from the rearfascia/bumper. Failure to do so can resultin the system misinterpreting a close ob-ject as a sensor problem, causing the“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICEREQUIRED” message to be displayed inthe EVIC.

• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate,ParkSense® should be disabled when thetailgate is in the lowered or open positionand the vehicle is in REVERSE. A loweredtailgate could provide a false indicationthat an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it isunable to recognize every obstacle, includ-ing small obstacles. Parking curbs mightbe temporarily detected or not detected atall. Obstacles located above or below thesensors will not be detected when they arein close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing ParkSense® in order to be able tostop in time when an obstacle is detected.It is recommended that the driver looksover his/her shoulder when usingParkSense®.

125


WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using ParkSense®. Alwayscheck carefully behind your vehicle, lookbehind you, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-structions, and blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for safety andmust continue to pay attention to yoursurroundings. Failure to do so can result inserious injury or death.

(Continued)


• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly rec-ommended that the ball mount and hitch ballassembly is disconnected from the vehiclewhen the vehicle is not used for towing.Failure to do so can result in injury or dam-age to vehicles or obstacles because thehitch ball will be much closer to the obstaclethan the rear fascia when the loudspeakersounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-sors could detect the ball mount and hitchball assembly, depending on its size andshape, giving a false indication that an ob-stacle is behind the vehicle.

PARKSENSE® FRONT ANDREAR PARK ASSIST — IFEQUIPPEDThe ParkSense® Park Assist system providesvisual and audible indications of the distancebetween the rear and/or front fascia and adetected obstacle when backing up or movingforward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your

vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Trans-mission, the vehicle brakes may be automati-cally applied and released when performing areverse parking maneuver if the system detectsa possible collision with an obstacle.

NOTE:

• The driver can override the automaticbraking function by pressing the gaspedal, turning ParkSense® off viaParkSense® switch, or changing the gearwhile the automatic brakes are being ap-plied.

• Automatic brakes will not be available ifESC is not available.

• Automatic brakes will not be available ifthere is a faulted condition detected withthe ParkSense® Park Assist system orthe Braking System Module.

• The automatic braking function may onlybe applied if the vehicle deceleration isnot enough to avoid colliding with a de-tected obstacle.

126


• The automatic braking function may notbe applied fast enough for obstacles thatmove toward the rear of the vehicle fromthe left and/or right sides.

• The automatic braking function can beenabled/disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of theUconnect® System.

• ParkSense will retain its last known con-figuration state for the automatic brakingfunction through ignition cycles.

The automatic braking function is intended toassist the driver in avoiding possible collisionswith detected obstacles when backing up inREVERSE gear.

If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual Trans-mission, the automatic braking function in RE-VERSE gear is not available.

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for con-trolling the vehicle.

• The system is provided to assist thedriver and not to substitute the driver.

• The driver must stay in full control of thevehicle’s acceleration and braking and isresponsible for the vehicle’s movements.

Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precau-tions for limitations of this system and recom-mendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cyclewhen the ignition is changed to the ON/RUNposition.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shiftlever is in REVERSE or DRIVE (NON-REVERSE for manual transmission). IfParkSense® is enabled at one of these shiftlever positions, the system will remain activeuntil the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When inREVERSE and above the system’s operatingspeed, a warning will appear in the EVIC indi-cating the vehicle speed is too fast. The systemwill become active again if the vehicle speed isdecreased to speeds less than approximately6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense® SensorsThe four ParkSense® sensors, located in therear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind thevehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-mately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) fromthe rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-tion, depending on the location, type and orien-tation of the obstacle.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with theParkSense® Active Park Assist system, sixsensors will be located in the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the �ParkSense® ActivePark Assist System� section for further in-formation.

The six ParkSense® sensors, located in thefront fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front ofthe vehicle that is within the sensors’ field ofview. The sensors can detect obstacles fromapproximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm)from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontaldirection, depending on the location, type andorientation of the obstacle.

127


ParkSense® Warning DisplayThe ParkSense® Warning screen will only bedisplayed if Sound and Display is selected fromthe Customer - Programmable Features sectionof the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect®Settings” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is locatedwithin the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicatethe distance between the rear fascia/bumperand/or front fascia/bumper and the detectedobstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC)/Settings” in UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

ParkSense® DisplayRear Park Assist

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC willdisplay the park assist ready system status.


If an obstacle is detected in the center rearregion, the display will show a single solid arc inthe center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer tothe obstacle, the display will show the single arcmoving closer to the vehicle and the sound tonewill change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or rightrear region, the display will show a single flash-ing arc in the left and/or right rear region and willproduce a fast sound tone. As the vehiclemoves closer to the obstacle, the display willshow the single arc moving closer to the vehicleand the tone will change from fast to continu-ous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

128



Slow Tone/Solid Arc




129


WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance(in/cm)


79-59 in(200-150 cm)

59-47 in(150-120 cm)

47-39 in(120-100 cm)

39-25 in(100-65 cm)

25-12 in(65-30 cm)


Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Audible AlertChime

None Single 1/2-Second Tone

(for rear centeronly)


only)


only)

Fast(for rear center

only)

Fast Continuous

Radio VolumeReduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes


Front Park Assist

When the vehicle is in DRIVE or NON-REVERSE for manual transmission, theParkSense Warning screen will be displayedwhen an obstacle is detected.


If an obstacle is detected in the center frontregion, the display will show a single arc in thecenter front region. As the vehicle moves closerto the obstacle, the display will show the singlearc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast soundtone will be produced when reaching the 2nd

flashing arc and will change to a continuoussound tone when the 1st flashing arc appears.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or rightfront region, the display will show a singleflashing arc in the left and/or right front regionand will produce a fast sound tone. As thevehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the dis-play will show the single arc moving closer tothe vehicle and the tone will change from fast tocontinuous.

130



No Tone/Solid Arc

No Tone/Flashing Arc



131


WARNING ALERTS

Front Distance(in/cm)


47-39 in(120-100 cm)

39-25 in(100-65 cm)

25-12 in(65-30 cm)


Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Audible AlertChime

None None None Fast Continuous

Radio Volume Re-duced

No No No Yes Yes


Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assistaudible alert (chime) after approximately 3 sec-onds when an obstacle has been detected, thevehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

Front and Rear chime volume settings can beselected from the Customer-ProgrammableFeatures section of the Uconnect® System,refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chimevolume settings will not be accessible from theEVIC.

The chime volume settings include LOW, ME-DIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volumesetting is MEDIUM.

ParkSense will retain its last known configura-tion state through ignition cycles.

132


Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled withthe ParkSense® switch, located on the switchpanel below the Uconnect® display.

When the ParkSense® switch is pressed todisable the system, the instrument cluster willdisplay the “PARKSENSE OFF” message forapproximately five seconds. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation. When the shift lever is moved toREVERSE and the system is disabled, theEVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” mes-sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON whenParkSense® is disabled or requires service.The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF whenthe system is enabled. If the ParkSense®switch is pressed, and requires service, theParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily,and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense® Park AssistSystemDuring vehicle start up, when the ParkSense®System has detected a faulted condition, the in-strument cluster will actuate a single chime, onceper ignition cycle, and it will display the"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-SORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPEFRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UN-AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message forfive seconds. When the shift lever is moved toReverse and the system has detected a faultedcondition, the EVIC will display a "PARKSENSEUNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS","PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONTSENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLESERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for fiveseconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will bedisplayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front

or rear sensor location depending on where thefault is detected. The system will continue toprovide arc alerts for the side that is functioningproperly. These arc alerts will interrupt the"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-SORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPEFRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an ob-ject is detected within the five second pop-upduration. The car graphic will remain displayed foras long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REARSENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLEWIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) makesure the outer surface and the underside of therear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper isclean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or otherobstruction and then cycle the ignition. If themessage continues to appear see an authorizeddealer.

If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICEREQUIRED" message appears in the EVIC,see an authorized dealer.

ParkSense® Switch

133


Cleaning The ParkSense® SystemClean the ParkSense® sensors with water, carwash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough orhard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense® System UsagePrecautionsNOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper arefree of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris tokeep the ParkSense® system operatingproperly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-brations could affect the performance ofParkSense®.

• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instru-ment cluster will display “PARKSENSEOFF.” Furthermore, once you turnParkSense® off, it remains off until you turnit on again, even if you cycle the ignitionkey.

• When you move the shift lever to theREVERSE position and ParkSense® is

turned off, the instrument cluster will dis-play “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long asthe vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce thevolume of the radio when it is sounding atone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly,taking care not to scratch or damagethem. The sensors must not be coveredwith ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.Failure to do so can result in the systemnot working properly. The ParkSense®system might not detect an obstacle be-hind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or itcould provide a false indication that anobstacle is behind or in front of thefascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn theParkSense® system off if objects such asbicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. areplaced within 12 in (30 cm) from the rearfascia/bumper. Failure to do so can resultin the system misinterpreting a close ob-ject as a sensor problem, causing the“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE

REQUIRED” message to be displayed inthe instrument cluster.

• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate,ParkSense® should be disabled when thetailgate is in the lowered or open position.A lowered tailgate could provide a falseindication that an obstacle is behind thevehicle.

• There may be a delay in the object detec-tion rate if the object is moving. This willcause the automatic braking applicationto be delayed.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it isunable to recognize every obstacle, includ-ing small obstacles. Parking curbs mightbe temporarily detected or not detected atall. Obstacles located above or below thesensors will not be detected when they arein close proximity.

(Continued)

134



• The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing ParkSense® in order to be able tostop in time when an obstacle is detected.It is recommended that the driver looksover his/her shoulder when usingParkSense®.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using ParkSense®. Alwayscheck carefully behind your vehicle, lookbehind you, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-structions, and blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for safety andmust continue to pay attention to yoursurroundings. Failure to do so can result inserious injury or death.

(Continued)


• Before using ParkSense®, it is stronglyrecommended that the ball mount andhitch ball assembly is disconnected fromthe vehicle when the vehicle is not used fortowing. Failure to do so can result in injuryor damage to vehicles or obstacles be-cause the hitch ball will be much closer tothe obstacle than the rear fascia when theloudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.Also, the sensors could detect the ballmount and hitch ball assembly, dependingon its size and shape, giving a false indi-cation that an obstacle is behind the ve-hicle.

PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARKASSIST SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDThe ParkSense® Active Park Assist system isintended to assist the driver during parallel andperpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying

a proper parking space, providing audible/visualinstructions, and controlling the steering wheel.The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system isdefined as “semi-automatic” since the drivermaintains control of the accelerator, shift leverand brakes. Depending on the driver’s parkingmaneuver selection, the ParkSense® ActivePark Assist system is capable of maneuvering avehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parkingspace on either side (i.e., driver side or passen-ger side).

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for con-trolling the vehicle, responsible for anysurrounding objects, and must interveneas required.

• The system is provided to assist thedriver and not to substitute the driver.

• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if thedriver touches the steering wheel afterbeing instructed to remove their handsfrom the steering wheel, the system willcancel, and the driver will be required tomanually complete the parking maneuver.

135


• The system may not work in all conditions(e.g. environmental conditions such asheavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching fora parking space that has surfaces that willabsorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).

Enabling And Disabling TheParkSense® Active Park AssistSystemThe ParkSense® Active Park Assist system canbe enabled and disabled with the ParkSense®Active Park Assist switch, located on the switchpanel below the Uconnect® display.

To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assistsystem, press the ParkSense® Active ParkAssist switch once (LED turns on).

To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assistsystem, press the ParkSense® Active ParkAssist switch again (LED turns off).

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system willturn off automatically for any of the followingconditions:

• The parking maneuver is completed

• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)when searching for a parking space

• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)during active steering guidance into the park-ing space

• Touching the steering wheel during activesteering guidance into the parking space

• Pressing the ParkSense® Front and RearPark Assist switch

• Driver’s door is opened

• Rear liftgate is opened

• Electronic Stability Control / Anti-lock BrakingSystem intervention

• Performing 6 parking attempts to position thevehicle into the parking space.

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system willonly operate and search for a parking spacewhen the following conditions are present:

• Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic trans-mission) or in a forward gear (manual trans-mission)

• Ignition is in the RUN position

• ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch isactivated

• Driver’s door is closed

• Rear liftgate is closed

• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)

ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch

136


NOTE:If the vehicle is driven above approximately15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC will instruct thedriver to slow down. If the vehicle is drivenabove approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), thesystem will cancel. The driver must thenreactivate the system by pressing theParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.

• The outer surface and the underside of thefront and rear fascias/bumpers are clean andclear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or otherobstruction.

When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense®Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily,and then the LED will turn OFF if any of theabove conditions are not present.

Parallel Parking Space AssistanceOperation/DisplayWhen the ParkSense® Active Park Assist sys-tem is enabled the “Active ParkSense Search-ing - Press OK for Perpendicular Park” mes-sage will appear in the EVIC display. You mayswitch to perpendicular parking if you desire.

Push the OK button on the left side steeringwheel switch to change your parking spacesetting.

NOTE:

• When searching for a parking space, usethe turn signal indicator to select whichside of the vehicle you want to performthe parking maneuver. The ParkSense®Active Park Assist system will automati-cally search for a parking space on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle if the turnsignal is not activated.

• The driver needs to make sure that theselected parking space for the maneuverremains free and clear of any obstruc-tions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.)

• The driver is responsible to ensure that theselected parking space is suitable for themaneuver and free/clear of anything thatmay be overhanging or protruding into theparking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.from surrounding objects/vehicles)

• When seeking for a parking space, thedriver should drive as parallel or perpen-dicular (depending on the type of maneu-ver) to other vehicles as possible.

• The feature will only indicate the lastdetected parking space (example: if pass-ing multiple available parking spaces, thesystem will only indicate the last detectedparking space for the maneuver).

Active ParkSense Searching

137


When an available parking space has beenfound, and the vehicle is not in position, you willbe instructed to move forward to position thevehicle for a parallel parking sequence.

Once the vehicle is in position, you will beinstructed to place the shift lever into the RE-VERSE position. When the driver places theshift lever into the REVERSE position, the sys-tem will instruct the driver to check their sur-roundings, and to remove their hands from thesteering wheel

NOTE:

• It is the driver’s responsibility to use thebrake and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.

• When the system instructs the driver toremove their hands from the steeringwheel, the driver should check their sur-roundings and begin to back up slowly.

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist sys-tem allows up to 6 parking attempts to bemade.

• The system will cancel the maneuver ifthe vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)during active steering guidance into theparking space. The system will provide awarning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h)that tells them to slow down. The driver isthen responsible for completing the ma-neuver if the system is canceled.

• If the system is canceled during the ma-neuver for any reason, the driver musttake control of the vehicle.

Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse

Check Entire Surroundings — Remove HandsFrom Steering Wheel

138


When the vehicle has been moved into theparallel park position you will be instructed toplace the shift lever into the DRIVE position,move forward slowly and check your surround-ings.

After moving forward and checking your sur-roundings you may be instructed to place theshift lever into the REVERSE position and movebackward slowly into position while you checkyour surroundings.

Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position.When the maneuver is complete, the driver willbe instructed to check the vehicle’s parkingposition. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicleposition, they should shift to PARK. The "ActiveParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position"message will be momentarily displayed.

Perpendicular Parking SpaceAssistance Operation/DisplayWhen the ParkSense® Active Park Assist sys-tem is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Search-ing - Press OK for Perpendicular Park” mes-sage will show in the EVIC display. Push the OKbutton on the left side steering wheel switch tochange your parking space setting to a perpen-dicular maneuver. You may switch back to par-allel parking if you desire.

Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Drive

Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Active ParkSense Complete - Check ParkingPosition

139


NOTE:

• When searching for a parking space, usethe turn signal indicator to select whichside of the vehicle you want to performthe parking maneuver. The ParkSense®Active Park Assist system will automati-cally search for a parking space on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle if the turnsignal is not activated.

• The driver needs to make sure that theselected parking space for the maneuverremains free and clear of any obstruc-tions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.)

• The driver is responsible to ensure thatthe selected parking space is suitable forthe maneuver and free/clear of anythingthat may be overhanging or protrudinginto the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-gates, etc. from surroundingobjects/vehicles)

• When seeking for a parking space, thedriver should drive as parallel or perpen-dicular (depending on the type of maneu-ver) to other vehicles as possible.

• The feature will only indicate the lastdetected parking space (example: if pass-ing multiple available parking spaces, thesystem will only indicate the last detectedparking space for the maneuver).

When an available parking space has beenfound, and the vehicle is not in position, you willbe instructed to move forward to position thevehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence.

Once the vehicle is in position you will beinstructed to place the shift lever into the RE-VERSE position. When the driver places theshift lever into the REVERSE position, the sys-tem will instruct the driver to check their sur-roundings, and to remove their hands from thesteering wheel.

Active ParkSense Searching Display

Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

140


NOTE:

• It is the driver’s responsibility to use thebrake and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.

• When the system instructs the driver toremove their hands from the steeringwheel, the driver should check their sur-roundings and begin to back up slowly.

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist sys-tem allows up to 6 parking attempts to bemade.

• The system will cancel the maneuver ifthe vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)during active steering guidance into theparking space. The system will provide awarning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h)that tells them to slow down. The driver isthen responsible for completing the ma-neuver if the system is canceled.

• If the system is canceled during the ma-neuver for any reason, the driver musttake control of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has been moved into theperpendicular park position you will be in-structed to place the shift lever into the DRIVEposition, move forward slowly, and check yoursurroundings.

Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse

Check Entire Surroundings — Remove HandsFrom Steering Wheel

Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Drive

141


After moving forward and checking your sur-roundings you may be instructed to place theshift lever into the REVERSE position and movebackward slowly into position while you checkyour surroundings.

Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular parkposition. When the maneuver is complete, thedriver will be instructed to check the vehicle’sparking position. If the driver is satisfied with thevehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The"Active ParkSense Complete - Check ParkingPosition" message will be momentarily displayed.

CAUTION!

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist systemis only a parking aid and it is unable torecognize every obstacle, including small ob-stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarilydetected or not detected at all. Obstacleslocated above or below the sensors will notbe detected when they are in close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-tem in order to be able to stop in time whenan obstacle is detected. It is recommendedthat the driver looks over his/her shoulderwhen using the ParkSense® Active ParkAssist system.

Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

Active ParkSense Complete — Check ParkingPosition

142


WARNING!• Drivers must be careful when performing

parallel or perpendicular parking maneuverseven when using the ParkSense® ActivePark Assist system. Always check carefullybehind and in front of your vehicle, lookbehind and in front of you, and be sure tocheck for pedestrians, animals, other ve-hicles, obstructions, and blind spots beforebacking up and moving forward. You areresponsible for safety and must continue topay attention to your surroundings. Failure todo so can result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)


• Before using the ParkSense® Active ParkAssist system, it is strongly recommendedthat the ball mount and hitch ball assembly isdisconnected from the vehicle when the ve-hicle is not used for towing. Failure to do socan result in injury or damage to vehicles orobstacles because the hitch ball will be muchcloser to the obstacle than the rear fasciawhen the loudspeaker sounds the continu-ous tone. Also, the sensors could detect theball mount and hitch ball assembly, depend-ing on its size and shape, giving a falseindication that an obstacle is behind thevehicle.

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UPCAMERA — IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allowsyou to see an on-screen image of the rearsurroundings of your vehicle whenever the shiftlever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed in the touchscreen display along witha caution note to “check entire surroundings”across the top of the screen. After five secondsthis note will disappear. The ParkView camerais located on the rear of the vehicle above therear License plate.

143


When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (withcamera delay turned OFF), the rear camera modeis exited and the navigation or audio screen ap-pears again. When the vehicle is shifted out ofREVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), thecamera image will continue to be displayed for upto 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSEunless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 MPH, thevehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition isswitched to the OFF position. A touch screencontrol (soft button) to disable display of the cam-era image is made available when the vehicle is

not in REVERSE gear. Display of the cameraimage after shifting out of REVERSE can bedisabled via a touch screen control (soft button)personalization entry in the camera settings menu.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaidon the image to illustrate the width of the vehicleand its projected backup path based on thesteering wheel position. A dashed center lineoverlay indicates the center of the vehicle toassist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid onthe image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance tothe rear of the vehicle.

The following table shows the approximate dis-tances for each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

144


WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up evenwhen using the ParkView® Rear Back UpCamera. Always check carefully behind yourvehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blindspots before backing up. You are responsiblefor the safety of your surroundings and mustcontinue to pay attention while backing up.Failure to do so can result in serious injury ordeath.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView®should only be used as a parking aid. TheParkView® camera is unable to view everyobstacle or object in your drive path.

(Continued)


• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle mustbe driven slowly when using ParkView® tobe able to stop in time when an obstacle isseen. It is recommended that the driverlook frequently over his/her shoulder whenusing ParkView®.

NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substancebuilds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Donot cover the lens.

Turning ParkView® On Or Off —With Uconnect® 5.01. Turn the Radio on.

2. Press the “Settings” button.

3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.

4. Press the check box soft key next to“Parkview® Backup Camera” to enable/disable.

NOTE:A check mark will appear in the selectionbox to indicate the system is turned ON.

Turning ParkView® On Or Off —With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on thebottom of the Uconnect® display.



4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” soft-key to turn the ParkView® system ON or OFF.

NOTE:A check mark will appear in the selectionbox to indicate the system is turned ON.

145


POWER SUNROOF WITHPOWER SHADE — IFEQUIPPEDThe power sunroof switch is located to the leftbetween the sun visors on the overhead con-sole.

The power shade switch is located to the rightbetween the sun visors on the overhead console. WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a ve-hicle, and do not leave the key fob in ornear the vehicle. Do not leave the ignitionof a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run mode.Occupants, particularly unattended chil-dren, can become entrapped by the powersunroof while operating the power sunroofswitch. Such entrapment may result inserious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk ofbeing thrown from a vehicle with an opensunroof. You could also be seriously in-jured or killed. Always fasten your seat beltproperly and make sure all passengers arealso properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate thesunroof. Never allow your fingers, other bodyparts, or any object, to project through thesunroof opening. Injury may result.

Power Sunroof Switch

Power Shade Switch

146


Opening Sunroof — ExpressA comfort stop position and full open positionare the programmed automatic stops for thesunroof open positions. The comfort stop posi-tion has been optimized to minimize wind buf-feting.

Press the switch rearward and release it withinone-half second. The sunroof will open auto-matically to the comfort stop position (if thesunshade is in the closed position when theoperation is initiated the sunshade will auto-matically open to the half open position prior tothe sunroof opening). Press the switch rearwardand release it again, the sunroof will open to thefull open position and automatically stop. This iscalled “Express Open”. During Express Openoperation, any movement of the sunroof switchwill stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual ModeA comfort stop position is a programmed auto-matic stop for the sunroof open position. Thecomfort stop position has been optimized tominimize wind buffeting.

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switchrearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at

the comfort stop position (if the sunshade is inthe closed position when the operation is initi-ated the sunshade will automatically open to thehalf open position prior to the sunroof opening).Press and hold the switch rearward again, thesunroof will open to the full open position andautomatically stop. Any release of the switch willstop the movement. The sunroof and sunshadewill remain in a partially opened condition untilthe switch is pushed and held rearward again.

Closing Sunroof — ExpressPress the switch forward and release it withinone-half second and the sunroof will closeautomatically from any position. The sunroof willclose fully and stop automatically. This is called“Express Close”. During Express Close opera-tion, any movement of the switch will stop thesunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual ModeTo close the sunroof, press and hold the switchin the forward position. Any release of theswitch will stop the movement and the sunroofwill remain in a partially closed condition untilthe switch is pushed and held forward again.

Venting Sunroof — ExpressPress and release the "Vent" button withinone-half second and the sunroof will open to thevent position. This is called “Express Vent”, andit will occur regardless of sunroof position. Dur-ing Express Vent operation, any movement ofthe switch will stop the sunroof.

NOTE:If the sunshade is in the closed positionwhen the vent switch is pressed, the sun-shade will automatically cycle to the halfwayopen position prior to the sunroof openingto the Vent position.

Opening Power Shade — ExpressPress the shade switch rearward and release itwithin one-half second and the shade will auto-matically open to the halfway position and stopautomatically. Press the switch a second timefrom the halfway position and the shade willautomatically open to the full open position andstop automatically. This is called “ExpressOpen”. During Express Open operation, anymovement of the shade switch will stop theshade.

147


Opening Power Shade — ManualModeTo open the shade, press and hold the switchrearward. The shade will open and stop auto-matically at the half-open position. Press andhold the shade switch rearward again and theshade will open automatically to the full-openposition. Any release of the switch will stop themovement and the shade will remain in a par-tially opened condition until the switch is pushedand held rearward again.

Closing Power Shade — ExpressPress the switch forward and release it withinone-half second and the shade will close auto-matically from any position. If the sunroof iscompletely closed the shade will close fully andstop automatically. This is called “ExpressClose”. During Express Close operation, anymovement of the switch will stop the shade.

NOTE:If the sunroof is open, the shade will close tothe half-open position. Pressing the shadeclose button again will automatically closeboth the sunroof and shade completely.

Closing Power Shade — ManualModeTo close the shade, press and hold the switch inthe forward position. Any release of the switchwill stop the movement and the shade willremain in a partially closed condition until theswitch is pushed and held forward again.

Pinch Protect FeatureThis feature will detect an obstruction in theopening of the sunroof during Express Closeoperation. If an obstruction in the path of thesunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-cally retract. Remove the obstruction if thisoccurs. Next, press the switch forward andrelease to Express Close.

NOTE:If three consecutive sunroof close attemptsresult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourthclose attempt will be a Manual Close move-ment with Pinch Protect disabled.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the percep-tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-typesound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind

buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof(if equipped) in certain open or partially openpositions. This is a normal occurrence and canbe minimized. If the buffeting occurs with therear windows open, then open the front and rearwindows together to minimize the buffeting. Ifthe buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,adjust the sunroof opening to minimize thebuffeting or open any window.

Sunroof MaintenanceUse only a non-abrasive cleaner and a softcloth to clean the glass panel.

Ignition Off OperationFor Vehicles Not Equipped With The Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

The power sunroof switch will remain active for45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned tothe LOCK position. Opening either front doorwill cancel this feature.

148


For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC

The power sunroof switch will remain active forup to approximately ten minutes after the igni-tion switch is turned to the LOCK position.Opening either front door will cancel this fea-ture.

SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTHOPEN ROOF — IF EQUIPPEDThe Sky Slider™ is a full-length, soft-top, powerroof that opens front to rear or rear to front.

Sky Slider™ Usage PrecautionsNOTE:

• The system will not operate when ambienttemperature is at –4°F (–20°C) or lower.

• The system will not operate at vehiclespeeds of 86 mph (138 km/h) or above.

• Opening and closing the Sky Slider™ re-peatedly without the engine running mayrun the battery down.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the Sky Slider™ vehicle contents,and the vehicle interior:• Never attempt to open or close the Sky

Slider™ when it is frozen. Wait until theSky Slider™ is thawed before operating.

• Opening the Sky Slider™ when damp,wet, or dirty can cause stains, mildew, anddamage to the soft-top material and theinside of your vehicle. Make sure the SkySlider™ is dry before opening.

• Always close the Sky Slider™ when leav-ing your vehicle, damage to the vehicleinterior can occur.

• Do not leave the Sky Slider™ open forseveral weeks at a time. Close it occasion-ally to prevent discoloration in the folds ofthe fabric and to allow the creases tosmooth out. This is especially important ifthe Sky Slider™ was opened when notcompletely dry.

WARNING!

Failure to follow these warnings can result ininjuries that are serious or fatal to you, yourpassengers, and others around you:• In an accident, there is a greater risk of

being thrown from a vehicle with the SkySlider™ open. Always fasten your seat beltproperly and make sure all passengers areproperly secured too.

• Before operating the Sky Slider™ makesure that no moving parts of the SkySlider™ can injure a person or animal.

• Never place any extremities (hands, feet,etc.) near the Sky Slider™ components orthe roof area while operating the SkySlider™.

• If potential danger exists while opening orclosing the Sky Slider™ in AutomaticMode, press and release the switch imme-diately to interrupt the operation.

(Continued)

149



• If potential danger exists while opening orclosing the Sky Slider™ in Operator Mode,release the switch immediately to interruptthe operation.

• Do not allow small children to operate theSky Slider™.

• Never leave children unattended in a ve-hicle, and do not leave the key in theignition switch (or leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).Occupants, particularly unattended chil-dren, can become entrapped by the SkySlider™ while operating the Sky Slider™switch. Such entrapment may result inserious injury or death.

Sky Slider™ ControlThe Sky Slider™ switch is located between thesun visors on the overhead console.

NOTE:The Sky Slider™ switch will operate whenthe ignition switch is turned to the ON orACC position.

Opening The Sky Slider™Using Automatic ModePress the switch rearward and release it withinone-half second and the Sky Slider™ will openfrom the front and move automatically towardthe rear of the vehicle.

Press the switch forward and release it withinone-half second and the Sky Slider™ will openfrom the rear and move automatically towardthe front of the vehicle.

NOTE:

• During operation, any movement of theSky Slider™ switch will stop the SkySlider™ roof.

• To resume the operation from a partiallyopen position, press and release theswitch a second time.

• The Sky Slider™ will not open from thefront and the rear at the same time. The

Sky Slider™ must close fully before open-ing it from the opposite end.

Using Operator ModePress the switch rearward and hold it, the SkySlider™ will open from the front and movetoward the rear of the vehicle.

Press the switch forward and hold it, the SkySlider™ will open from the rear and movetoward the front of the vehicle.

NOTE:During operation, any movement of the SkySlider™ switch will stop the Sky Slider™roof.

Closing The Sky Slider™Using Automatic ModePress and release the button in the center of theswitch and the Sky Slider™ will close automati-cally from any position.

Using Operator ModeIf the Sky Slider™ is open from the front, pressthe switch forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™will move forward. Release the switch to stopthe Sky Slider™ travel at any point.

150


If the Sky Slider™ is open from the rear, pressthe switch rearward and hold it and the SkySlider™ will move rearward. Release the switchto stop the Sky Slider™ travel at any point.

Manual OverrideThe Sky Slider™ drive motors are mounted tothe roof above the cargo lamp. In the event thatyour vehicle losses battery power, you canclose the Sky Slider™ by turning the drive gearsin the appropriate motor with a 6 mm Allenwrench. To do so, you must first remove thecargo lamp from the headliner. Then, insert thewrench into the “Allen” shaped hole in theappropriate motor and turn the wrench clock-wise until the top closes completely. The leftmotor facing forward will close the top when it isopen from the rear of the vehicle. The rightmotor will close the top when it is open from thefront of the vehicle.

Anti-Pinch Protect FeatureThe Sky Slider™ will retract automatically if itdetects an obstruction while closing. If thisoccurs, remove the obstruction and use theswitch again to close the Sky Slider™.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when theSky Slider™ is almost closed. Be sure toclear all objects from the Sky Slider™ beforeclosing.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be described as the percep-tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-typesound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit windbuffeting with the windows down, or the SkySlider™ in certain open or partially open posi-tions. This is a normal occurrence and can beminimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rearwindows open, then open the front and rearwindows together to minimize the buffeting. Ifthe buffeting occurs with the Sky Slider™ open,adjust the Sky Slider™ opening to minimize thebuffeting or open any window.

Sky Slider™ MaintenanceRefer to “Sky Slider™ Top Care” in “MaintainingYour Vehicle” for further information.

ELECTRICAL POWEROUTLETSYour vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)power outlets that can be used to power cellularphones, small electronics and other low pow-ered electrical accessories. The power outletsare labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.Power outlets labeled with a “key” are poweredwhen the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCposition, while the outlets labeled with a “bat-tery” are connected directly to the battery andpowered at all times.

NOTE:

• All accessories connected to the “bat-tery” powered outlets should be removedor turned off when the vehicle is not inuse to protect the battery against dis-charge.

• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation,a MOPAR® knob and element must beused.

151


CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not insert any other object inthe power outlets as this will damage theoutlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damage not coveredby your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The front power outlet is located inside thestorage area on the center stack of the instru-ment panel.

In addition to the front power outlet, there is alsoa power outlet located in the storage area of thecenter console.

The rear power outlet is located in the left rearcargo area.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:• Only devices designed for use in this type

of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Voltoutlet.

(Continued)


• Do not touch with wet hands.• Close the lid when not in use and while

driving the vehicle.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged indraw power from the vehicle’s battery,even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough,the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-ciently to degrade battery life and/or pre-vent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) willdegrade the battery even more quickly.Only use these intermittently and withgreater caution.

(Continued)Front Power Outlet

Rear Power Outlet

152



• After the use of high power draw accesso-ries, or long periods of the vehicle notbeing started (with accessories stillplugged in), the vehicle must be driven asufficient length of time to allow the gen-erator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a wirelesscharging pad located inside the upper portion ofthe center console. This charging pad is designedto wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobilephone. Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induc-tion to transfer power to your mobile device.

Your mobile phone must be designed for Qiwireless charging, be equipped with an after-market sleeve or equipped with a back platefrom your mobile phone provider.

The wireless charging pad is equipped with ananti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold yourmobile phone in place and an LED indicatorlight.

NOTE:Visit www.driveuconnect.com for additionalinformation and for supported mobilephones.

Wireless Charging Pad OperationTo use the wireless charging pad, perform thefollowing:

1. Place only one mobile Qi enabled phone onthe wireless charging pad.

2. Adjust the position of the mobile phone onthe pad until charging begins.

3. Use the adjustable cradle to hold the mobilephone in position. The cradle moves by pushingdown on the finger tabs and moving the cradlein or out.

Wireless Charging Pad

Adjustable Cradle

153


NOTE:The initial adjustment will only need to bedone once as long as only one mobile phoneis used. If a different mobile phone is used,the cradle will need to be readjusted.

The LED indicator will flash green while themobile phone is charging. The Qi enabledphone is able to function normally as it ischarging.

CAUTION!

Do not place your vehicle key fob on thewireless charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature may not work properly while amobile phone is being charged.

WARNING!

Do not place metal object(s) between themobile phone and wireless charging pad.Metal object(s) such as coins, rings or keyswill become very HOT. If metal object(s)

(Continued)


become lodged between the mobile phoneand wireless charging pad, carefully removethe mobile phone and allow the metal ob-ject(s) to cool before removing. Failure towait until the object(s) cool could result inpersonal injury, including burns.

CUPHOLDERSThere are two cupholders for the front seatpassengers, located in the center console.

There are two cupholders for the rear seatpassengers, located in the center armrest.

STORAGE

Glove Box Storage CompartmentThe glove box storage compartment is locatedon the passengers side of the instrument panel.Pull outward on the latch to open the storagecompartment.

There is also an additional storage bin locatedabove the instrument panel in the center of thedash.Front Cupholders

Rear Cupholders

154


Console Storage CompartmentSome vehicles may be equipped with a wirelesscharging pad located in the upper portion of thecenter console. Refer to Wireless ChargingPad-If Equipped in this section for more infor-mation.

To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.

The center console has a storage area whichcan hold cell phones, PDAs, and other smallitems.

WARNING!Do not operate this vehicle with a consolecompartment lid in the open position. Cellularphones, music players, and other handheldelectronic devices should be stowed while driv-ing. Use of these devices while driving cancause an accident due to distraction, resultingin death or injury.

Glove Box Storage Compartment Upper Console Charging Pad

Center Console

Center Console Storage

155


CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Load FloorThe cargo load floor system has a load capacityof 400 lbs (181 kg).

To provide additional storage area, each rearseat can be folded flat. This allows for extendedcargo space and still maintains some rear seat-ing room. Refer to “Seats” in this section forfurther information.

Rear Storage BinThe rear storage bins are located in the rear ofthe vehicle on the sides of the load floor.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And LoopsThe tie-downs located on the cargo area floorshould be used to secure loads safely when thevehicle is moving.

Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trimpanels.

WARNING!

• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for achild seat tether strap. In a sudden stop oraccident, a tie-down could pull loose andallow the child seat to come loose. A childcould be badly injured. Use only the an-chors provided for child seat tethers.

• To help protect against personal injury,passengers should not be seated in therear cargo area. The rear cargo space isintended for load carrying purposes only,not for passengers, who should sit in seatsand use seat belts.

WARNING!

The weight and position of cargo and pas-sengers can change the vehicle center ofgravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss ofcontrol resulting in personal injury, followthese guidelines for loading your vehicle:• Do not carry loads that exceed the load

limits described on the label attached tothe left door or left door center pillar.

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargofloor. Put heavier objects as low and as farforward as possible.

• Place as much cargo as possible in front ofthe rear axle. Too much weight or improp-erly placed weight over or behind the rearaxle can cause the vehicle to sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher thanthe top of the seatback. This could impairvisibility or become a dangerous projectilein a sudden stop or accident.

Cargo Load Floor Loops

156


Retractable Cargo Area Cover — IfEquipped

NOTE:The purpose of this cover is for privacy, notto secure loads. It will not prevent cargofrom shifting or protect passengers fromloose cargo.

The removable retractable cargo area covermounts in the cargo area behind the top of therear seats.

The cover, when extended, covers the cargoarea to keep items out of sight. Notches in thetrim panels near the liftgate opening secure theextended cover in place.

The cover rolls away neatly inside its housingwhen not in use. You can also remove the coverfrom the vehicle to make more room in thecargo area.

To install the cover, position it in the vehicle sothat the flat side of the housing faces upward.Then, insert the right spring-loaded post (lo-cated on the end of the cover housing) into theright attachment points.

Then, insert on the opposite end of the coverhousing into the attachment point on the oppo-site side of the vehicle.

Next, grab the cover handle and pull the covertoward you. As the cover nears the liftgateopening, guide the rear attachment posts (onboth ends of the cover) into the notches in thetrim panels. Then, lower the cover to positionthe posts into the bottom of the notches andrelease the handle.

WARNING!

In a collision, a cargo cover loose in thevehicle could cause injury. It could fly aroundin a sudden stop and strike someone in thevehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on thecargo floor or in the passenger compartment.Remove the cover from the vehicle whentaken from its mounting. Do not store in thevehicle.

Retractable Cargo Area Cover

157


REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper/washer controls are located onthe windshield wiper/washer lever on the rightside of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, locatedat the middle of the lever.

Rotate the center portion of the leverupward to the first detent for intermit-tent operation and to the second de-

tent for continuous rear wiper operation.

To use the washer, push the leverforward and hold while spray is de-sired. If the lever is pushed while in theintermittent setting, the wiper will turn

on and operate for several wipe cycles after theend of the lever is released, and then resumethe intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the offposition, the wiper will operate for several wipecycles, then turn off.

NOTE:As a protective measure, the pump will stopif the switch is held for more than 20 sec-onds. Once the lever is released the pumpwill resume normal operation.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition isturned OFF, the wiper will automatically returnto the “park” position.

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button islocated on the switch bank by themanual climate controls. Press thisbutton to turn on the rear window de-

froster and the heated outside mirrors. An indi-cator in the button will illuminate when the rearwindow defroster is on. The rear window de-froster automatically turns off after approxi-mately 10 minutes. For an additional five min-utes of operation, press the button a secondtime.

NOTE:To prevent excessive battery drain, use therear window defroster only when the engineis operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the heating elements:• Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive windowcleaners on the interior surface of thewindow. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash-ing solution, wiping parallel to the heatingelements. Labels can be peeled off aftersoaking with warm water.

(Continued)

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

158



• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, orabrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from thewindow.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IFEQUIPPEDNOTE:Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used onvehicles equipped with Skyslider®.The load carried on the roof, when equippedwith a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributedover the cargo area.

Crossbars should always be used whenevercargo is placed on the roof rack. Check thestraps frequently to be sure that the load re-mains securely attached.

External racks do not increase the total loadcarrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that thetotal occupant and luggage load inside thevehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, donot exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

CAUTION!

• To avoid damage to the roof rack andvehicle, do not exceed the maximum roofrack load capacity. Always distribute heavyloads as evenly as possible and secure theload appropriately.

• Long loads, which extend over the wind-shield, such as wood panels or surfboards,should be secured to both the front andrear of the vehicle.

• Place a blanket or other protection be-tween the surface of the roof and the load.

(Continued)


• Travel at reduced speeds and turn cornerscarefully when carrying large or heavyloads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due tonatural causes or nearby truck traffic, canadd sudden upward loads. This is espe-cially true on large flat loads and mayresult in damage to the cargo or yourvehicle.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied down beforedriving your vehicle. Improperly securedloads can fly off the vehicle, particularly athigh speeds, resulting in personal injury orproperty damage. Follow the roof rack cau-tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

159


160


4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166• ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . .171

• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays —3.5” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays —7” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

• Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186• Driver Assist Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Messages . . . . .187• EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188• Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

• Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191• Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191• Soft-Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

161


• Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings . . .191• Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201• iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201• STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .202

• Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202• CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

• CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202• RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203• CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

• Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen — If Equipped . . .203• Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . .206• Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If Equipped . . .209• Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213• Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

162


INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Demister Outlet 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 13 — Stop/Start Ignition Button2 — Air Outlet 6 — Electronic Speed Controls 10 — Glove Compartment 14 — Trunk Release Button3 — Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) Controls

7 — Storage Compartment 11 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Dimmer Switches

4 — Horn / Driver Air Bag 8 — Radio 12 — Uconnect® Hard Controls / Cli-mate Controls

16 — Headlight Switch

163


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

164


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

165


INSTRUMENT CLUSTERDESCRIPTIONS1. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions perminute (RPM x 1000).

2. High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on highbeam.

3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when thefront fog lights are on.

4. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate whenthe park lights or headlights areturned on.

5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) Display/Odometer Display

The odometer display shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis-play shows the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) messages. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center”.

6. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake func-tions, including brake fluid level andparking brake application. If the brake

light turns on it may indicate that the parkingbrake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low,or that there is a problem with the anti-lockbrake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brakehas been disengaged, and the fluid level is atthe full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, itindicates a possible brake hydraulic systemmalfunction or that a problem with the BrakeBooster has been detected by the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light will

remain on until the condition has been cor-rected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applyingthe brake and a brake pedal pulsation may befelt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reservebraking capacity in the event of a failure to aportion of the hydraulic system. A leak in eitherhalf of the dual brake system is indicated by theBrake Warning Light, which will turn on whenthe brake fluid level in the master cylinder hasdropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause iscorrected.

NOTE:The light may flash momentarily duringsharp cornering maneuvers, which changefluid level conditions. The vehicle shouldhave service performed, and the brake fluidlevel checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair isnecessary.

166


WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system mayhave failed. It will take longer to stop thevehicle. You could have a collision. Have thevehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), are also equipped with Elec-tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In theevent of an EBD failure, the Brake WarningLight will turn on along with the ABS Light.Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can bechecked by turning the ignition switch from theOFF position to the ON/RUN position. The lightshould illuminate for approximately two sec-onds. The light should then turn off unless theparking brake is applied or a brake fault isdetected. If the light does not illuminate, havethe light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch in theON/RUN position.

NOTE:This light shows only that the parking brakeis applied. It does not show the degree ofbrake application.

7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS). The light willturn on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON/RUN position andmay stay on for as long as four

seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on whiledriving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion ofthe brake system is not functioning and thatservice is required. However, the conventionalbrake system will continue to operate normally ifthe BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system shouldbe serviced as soon as possible to restore thebenefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS lightdoes not turn on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON/RUN position, have the lightinspected by an authorized dealer.

8. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light — IfEquipped

The “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” in the instrumentcluster will come on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with

the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-ously with the engine running, a malfunctionhas been detected in the ESC system. If thislight remains on after several ignition cycles,and the vehicle has been driven several miles(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soonas possible to have the problem diagnosed andcorrected .

NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the“ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” come on momentarily each timethe ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

167


• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if itwas turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing orclicking sounds when it is active. This isnormal; the sounds will stop when ESCbecomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFFIndicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the ElectronicStability Control (ESC) is off.

10. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

11. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turnedto the ON/RUN position, this light willturn on for four to eight seconds as abulb check. During the bulb check, if

the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will

sound. After the bulb check or when driving, ifthe driver or front passenger seat belt remainsunbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light willflash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Oc-cupant Restraints” in “Things To Know BeforeStarting Your Vehicle” for further information.

12. Turn Signal Indicator

The arrows will flash with the exteriorturn signals when the turn signal leveris operated. A tone will chime, and an

EVIC message will appear if either turn signal isleft on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTE:If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate,check for a defective outside light bulb.

13. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMS

168


malfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detectsa malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continu-ously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle, to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the origi-nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-sures and warning have been established forthe tire size equipped on your vehicle. Un-

(Continued)


desirable system operation or sensor dam-age may result when using replacementequipment that is not of the same size, type,and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use tire sealant froma can or balance beads if your vehicle isequipped with a TPMS, as damage to thesensors may result.

14. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fueltank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUNposition. The fuel pump symbol points to theside of the vehicle where the fuel door islocated.

15. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolanttemperature. Any reading within the normalrange indicates that the engine cooling systemis operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a highertemperature when driving in hot weather, upmountain grades, or when towing a trailer. Itshould not be allowed to exceed the upper limitsof the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling systemcould damage your vehicle. If the tempera-ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop thevehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-tioner turned off until the pointer drops backinto the normal range. If the pointer remainson the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,turn the engine off immediately and call anauthorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.You or others could be badly burned bysteam or boiling coolant. You may want to

(Continued)

169



call an authorized dealer for service if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look un-der the hood yourself, see “Maintaining YourVehicle”. Follow the warnings under theCooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

16. Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four toeight seconds as a bulb checkwhen the ignition switch is firstturned to the ON/RUN position. Ifthe light is either not on during

starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, havethe system inspected at an authorized dealer assoon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Re-straints” in “Things To Know Before StartingYour Vehicle” for further information.

17. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)is part of an onboard diagnostic sys-tem called OBD II that monitors en-gine and automatic transmission con-

trol systems. The light will illuminate when thekey is in the ON/RUN position before enginestart. If the bulb does not come on when turningthe key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condi-tion checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missinggas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminatethe light after engine start. The vehicle shouldbe serviced if the light stays on through severalof your typical driving cycles. In most situations,the vehicle will drive normally and will notrequire towing.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage tothe engine control system. It also could affectfuel economy and driveability. If the MIL isflashing, severe catalytic converter damageand power loss will soon occur. Immediateservice is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as ref-erenced above, can reach higher tempera-tures than in normal operating conditions.This can cause a fire if you drive slowly orpark over flammable substances such as dryplants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re-sult in death or serious injury to the driver,occupants or others.

18. Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for ap-proximately 15 seconds when thevehicle theft alarm is arming. Thelight will flash at a slower speedcontinuously after the alarm is set.

The security light will also come on for about threeseconds when the ignition is first turned on.

170


ELECTRONIC VEHICLEINFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)The Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) features a driver-interactive display thatis located in the instrument cluster.

This system allows the driver to select a varietyof useful information by pressing the switchesmounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC con-sists of the following:

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Driver Assist

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)

• Stop/Start — If Equipped

• Audio Info

• Messages

• Screen Setup

• Speed Warning — If Equipped

The system allows the driver to select informa-tion by pressing the following buttons mountedon the steering wheel:

• UP Arrow Button

Press and release the UP arrowbutton to scroll upward through themain menu and submenus (MainGauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info,Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel

Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Mes-sages, Screen Set Up).

• DOWN Arrow Button

Press and release the DOWN ar-row button to scroll downwardthrough the main menu and sub-menus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h,Vehicle Info, Terrain, Driver Assist,

Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, StoredMessages, Screen Set Up).Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Location

EVIC Buttons

171


• RIGHT Arrow Button

Press and release the RIGHT ar-row button to access the informa-tion screens or sub-menu screensof a main menu item.

• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button

Press and release the LEFT arrowbutton to access the informationscreens or sub-menu screens of amain menu item.

• OK Button

Press the OK button to access/select the infor-mation screens or sub-menu screens of a mainmenu item. Press and hold the OK arrow buttonfor one second to reset displayed/selected fea-tures that can be reset.

Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) Displays — 3.5”DisplayThe EVIC displays are located in the center por-tion of the cluster and consists of eight sections:

1. Brake Warning Light — If Equipped

This light monitors various brakefunctions, including brake fluidlevel and parking brake applica-tion. If the brake light turns on itmay indicate that the parking brake

is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or thatthere is a problem with the anti-lock brakesystem reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brakehas been disengaged, and the fluid level is atthe full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, itindicates a possible brake hydraulic systemmalfunction or that a problem with the Brake

Booster has been detected by the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light willremain on until the condition has been cor-rected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applyingthe brake and a brake pedal pulsation may befelt during each stop.




172



WARNING!






2. Electronic Park Brake Failure — IfEquipped

This telltale indicates that there isan Electronic Park Brake Fault.Please see your authorized dealerfor assistance.

3. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated en-gine condition. As temperatures riseand the gauge approaches H, this in-

dicator will illuminate and a single chime willsound after reaching a set threshold.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull overand stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEU-

TRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperaturereading does not return to normal, turn theengine off immediately and call for service.Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for more information.

4. Reconfigurable Telltail Display Area

The main display area will normally display themain menu or the screens of a selected featureof the main menu. The main display area alsodisplays “pop up” messages that consist ofapproximately 60 possible warning or informa-tion messages. These pop up messages fallinto several categories:• Five Second Stored MessagesWhen the appropriate conditions occur, this type ofmessage takes control of the main display area forfive seconds and then returns to the previousscreen. Most of the messages of this type are thenstored (as long as the condition that activated itremains active) and can be reviewed from the“Messages” main menu item. As long as there is astored message, an “i” will be displayed in theEVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples ofthis message type are “Right Front Turn SignalLamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.

173


• Unstored MessagesThis message type is displayed indefinitely oruntil the condition that activated the message iscleared. Examples of this message type are“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and“Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).• Unstored Messages Until RUNThese messages deal primarily with the Re-mote Start feature. This message type is dis-played until the ignition is in the RUN state.Examples of this message type are “RemoteStart Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press BrakePedal and Push Button to Start”.• Five Second Unstored MessagesWhen the appropriate conditions occur, thistype of message takes control of the maindisplay area for five seconds and then returns tothe previous screen. An example of this mes-sage type is “Automatic High Beams On”.

5. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — IfEquipped

The Lane Departure Warning(LDW) system provides the driverwith visual and steering torquewarnings when the vehicle starts todrift out of its lane unintentionally

without the use of a turn signal.When the LDW system is ON and ready thelane lines and LDW indicator are the color gray.When the LDW system is armed, the lane lineschange to white and the LDW indicator changesto green.When the LDW system senses a lane crosssituation, the approaching lane line and theLDW indicator change from white to yellow.

For further information, refer to “Lane DepartureWarning” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle”.


This light monitors various brakefunctions, including brake fluidlevel and parking brake applica-tion. If the brake light turns on it

may indicate that the parking brake is applied,that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is aproblem with the anti-lock brake system reser-voir.

If the light remains on when the parking brakehas been disengaged, and the fluid level is atthe full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, itindicates a possible brake hydraulic systemmalfunction or that a problem with the BrakeBooster has been detected by the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light willremain on until the condition has been cor-rected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applyingthe brake and a brake pedal pulsation may befelt during each stop.


174





WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isdangerous. Part of the brake system may havefailed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. Youcould have a collision. Have the vehiclechecked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-tem (ABS), are also equipped with ElectronicBrake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of anEBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn onalong with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to theABS system is required.




7. Fuel Gauge

Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fueltank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUNposition.

8. Low Fuel Telltale

When the fuel level reaches approxi-mately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turnon, and remain on until fuel is added.

9. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped

This light indicates when the rearaxle lock has been activated.

10. Reconfigurable Telltale Display

• Transmission Temperature Warning LightThis light indicates that there is ex-cessive transmission fluid tempera-ture that might occur with severeusage such as trailer towing. It mayalso occur when operating the ve-hicle in a high torque converter slip

condition, such as 4-wheel drive operation (e.g.,snow plowing, off- road operation). If this lightcomes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine atidle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRALuntil the light goes off.

175


CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the TransmissionTemperature Warning Light illuminated willeventually cause severe transmission dam-age or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle whenthe Transmission Temperature Warning Lightis illuminated you could cause the fluid to boilover, come in contact with hot engine orexhaust components and cause a fire.

• Low Coolant Level IndicatorThis telltale will turn on to indicatethe vehicle coolant level is low.

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low IndicatorThis telltale will turn on to indicatethe windshield washer fluid is low.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunc-tion

This light will turn on when a ACCis not operating and needs service.For further information, refer to“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in“Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle.”

• LaneSense Service — If EquippedThis telltale will turn on to indicatethat the Lane Sense Departure hasdetected a failure.

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message IndicatorThis telltale will turn on to indicatethe fuel filler cap is loose.

11. Dedicated Speed Warning Telltale — IfEquipped

This area displays the dedicatedspeed warning telltale.

12. Speed For Electronic Cruise ControlSetting

This displays the set speed of theElectronic Speed Control.

176


13. Reconfigurable Telltale Area

• Hill Descent Indicator — If EquippedThe symbol illuminates (is armed)when the 4WD Low switch is acti-vated and the transmission rangeindicator is in LOW or REVERSEposition (Off-Road Mode).

• Selec Speed Control Indicator — IfEquipped

The symbol illuminates and is ac-tive only in 4WD Low range wheneither the HDC switch on the in-strument panel is selected orROCK mode for Selec-Terrain isselected.

If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, thefollowing message is displayed “Selec-SpeedUnavailable”.• Electronic Speed Control ON

This light will turn on when theelectronic speed control is ON. Forfurther information, refer to “Elec-tronic Speed Control” in “Under-standing The Features Of YourVehicle.”

• Electronic Speed Control SETThis light will turn on when theelectronic speed control is SET.For further information, refer to“Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-derstanding The Features Of YourVehicle.”

14. Reconfigurable Telltale Display

• Power Steering System Over Tempera-ture — If Equipped

If the “POWER STEERING SYS-TEM OVER TEMP” message anda icon are displayed on the EVICscreen, it indicates that extremesteering maneuvers may have oc-curred, which caused an over tem-

perature condition in the power steering sys-tem. You will lose power steering assistancemomentarily until the over temperature condi-tion no longer exists. Once driving conditionsare safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle. Afterfive minutes, the system will cool and return tonormal operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in“Starting and Operating” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if power steering assistance is nolonger operational, it is still possible tosteer the vehicle. Under these conditionsthere will be a substantial increase insteering effort, especially at very low ve-hicle speeds and during parking maneu-vers.

• If the condition persists, see your autho-rized dealer for service.

• Door AjarThis light will turn on to indicatethat one or more doors may beajar.

• Liftgate AjarThis light will turn on to indicatethat liftgate may be ajar.

177


• Oil Pressure Warning LightThis light indicates low engine oil pres-sure. The light should turn on momen-tarily when the engine is started. If the

light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle andshut off the engine as soon as possible. A chimewill sound for four minutes when this light turnson.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause iscorrected. This light does not show how muchoil is in the engine. The engine oil level must bechecked under the hood.• Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the elec-trical charging system. If the light stayson or comes on while driving, turn off

some of the vehicle’s non-essential electricaldevices or increase engine speed (if at idle). Ifthe charging system light remains on, it meansthat the vehicle is experiencing a problem withthe charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMME-DIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do InEmergencies”.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) LightThis light informs you of a problemwith the Electronic Throttle Control(ETC) system. The light will comeon when the ignition is first turnedON and remain on briefly as a bulbcheck. If the light does not come on

during starting, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come onwhile the engine is running. Cycle the ignitionkey when the vehicle has completely stoppedand the shift lever is placed in the PARK posi-tion. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running,your vehicle will usually be drivable. However,see an authorized dealer for service as soon aspossible. If the light is flashing when the engineis running, immediate service is required. Youmay experience reduced performance, anelevated/rough idle or engine stall and yourvehicle may require towing.

• Oil Temperature Warning LightThis telltale indicates engine oiltemperature is high. If the lightturns on while driving, stop thevehicle and shut off the engine assoon as possible.

15. 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is inthe four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front andrear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-gether forcing the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. Low range provides agreater gear reduction ratio to provide in-creased torque at the wheels.

For further information on four-wheel drive op-eration and proper use, refer to “Four-WheelDrive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting AndOperating”.

178


16. SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is inneed of service. If this light is illuminated, seeyour authorized dealer as soon as possible.

17. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolanttemperature. Any reading within the normalrange indicates that the engine cooling systemis operating satisfactorily.


CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling systemcould damage your vehicle. If the tempera-ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop thevehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-tioner turned off until the pointer drops back

(Continued)


into the normal range. If the pointer remainson the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,turn the engine off immediately and call anauthorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.You or others could be badly burned bysteam or boiling coolant. You may want tocall an authorized dealer for service if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look un-der the hood yourself, see “Maintaining YourVehicle”. Follow the warnings under theCooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) Displays — 7” DisplayThe EVIC displays are located in the centerportion of the cluster and consists of eightsections:

1. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

The Lane Departure Warning(LDW) system provides the driverwith visual and steering torquewarnings when the vehicle starts todrift out of its lane unintentionally

without the use of a turn signal.When the LDW system is ON and ready thelane lines and LDW indicator are the color gray.When the LDW system is armed, the lane lineschange to white and the LDW indicator changesto green.

179


When the LDW system senses a lane crosssituation, the approaching lane line and theLDW indicator change from white to yellow.

For further information, refer to “Lane DepartureWarning” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle”.

2. EVIC Selectable Display Area

This area displays selectable information (Com-pass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, AverageMPG).

3. Electronic Park Brake Failure

This telltale indicates that there isan Electronic Park Brake Fault.Please see your authorized dealerfor assistance.


This light monitors various brakefunctions, including brake fluidlevel and parking brake applica-tion. If the brake light turns on itmay indicate that the parking brake

is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or thatthere is a problem with the anti-lock brakesystem reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brakehas been disengaged, and the fluid level is atthe full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, itindicates a possible brake hydraulic systemmalfunction or that a problem with the BrakeBooster has been detected by the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light willremain on until the condition has been cor-rected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applyingthe brake and a brake pedal pulsation may befelt during each stop.





WARNING!



180





5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)

The main display area will normally display themain menu or the screens of a selected featureof the main menu. The main display area alsodisplays “pop up” messages that consist ofapproximately 60 possible warning or informa-tion messages. These pop up messages fallinto several categories:

• Five Second Stored MessagesWhen the appropriate conditions occur, thistype of message takes control of the maindisplay area for five seconds and then returns tothe previous screen. Most of the messages ofthis type are then stored (as long as the condi-tion that activated it remains active) and can bereviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.As long as there is a stored message, an “i” willbe displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outsidetemp line. Examples of this message type are“Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “LowTire Pressure”.• Unstored MessagesThis message type is displayed indefinitely oruntil the condition that activated the message iscleared. Examples of this message type are“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and“Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).• Unstored Messages Until RUNThese messages deal primarily with the Re-mote Start feature. This message type is dis-played until the ignition is in the RUN state.Examples of this message type are “RemoteStart Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press BrakePedal and Push Button to Start”.

• Five Second Unstored MessagesWhen the appropriate conditions occur, thistype of message takes control of the maindisplay area for five seconds and then returns tothe previous screen. An example of this mes-sage type is “Automatic High Beams On”.

6. Dedicated Speed Warning Telltale — IfEquipped

This area displays the dedicatedspeed warning telltale.

7. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Set-ting

This displays the set speed of theElectronic Speed Control.

181


8. EVIC Selectable Display Area

This area displays selectable information (Com-pass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, AverageMPG).

9. Reconfigurable Telltale Area

• Hill Descent Indicator — If EquippedThe symbol illuminates (is armed)when the 4WD Low switch is acti-vated and the transmission rangeindicator is in LOW or REVERSEposition (Off-Road Mode).

• Selec Speed Control Indicator — IfEquipped

The symbol illuminates and is ac-tive only in 4WD Low range wheneither the HDC switch on the in-strument panel is selected orROCK mode for Selec-Terrain isselected.

If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, thefollowing message is displayed “Selec-SpeedUnavailable”.

• Electronic Speed Control ONThis light will turn on when theelectronic speed control is ON. Forfurther information, refer to “Elec-tronic Speed Control” in “Under-standing The Features Of YourVehicle.”

• Electronic Speed Control SETThis light will turn on when theelectronic speed control is SET.For further information, refer to“Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-derstanding The Features Of YourVehicle.”

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) DistanceSetting Display

This will display the distance set-ting for the ACC system. For furtherinformation, refer to “AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-standing The Features OF YourVehicle”.

10. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)

The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1”are displayed indicating the shift lever position.Telltales “9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1” indicate the ElectronicRange Select (ERS) feature has been engagedand the gear selected is displayed. For furtherinformation on ERS, refer to “Starting AndOperating”.

11. Instructional Area

This area will display text to the visual warnings(i.e., “Push Brake To Start”).

12. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display

• Transmission Temperature Warning LightThis light indicates that there is ex-cessive transmission fluid tempera-ture that might occur with severeusage such as trailer towing. It mayalso occur when operating the ve-hicle in a high torque converter slip

condition, such as 4-wheel-drive operation (e.g.,snow plowing, off- road operation). If this lightcomes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine atidle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRALuntil the light goes off.

182


CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the TransmissionTemperature Warning Light illuminated willeventually cause severe transmission dam-age or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle whenthe Transmission Temperature Warning Lightis illuminated you could cause the fluid to boilover, come in contact with hot engine orexhaust components and cause a fire.

• Low Fuel TelltaleWhen the fuel level reaches approxi-mately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light willturn on, and remain on until fuel isadded.

• Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If EquippedThis light indicates when the rearaxle lock has been activated.

• Low Coolant Level IndicatorThis telltale will turn on to indicatethe vehicle coolant level is low.

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low IndicatorThis telltale will turn on to indicatethe windshield washer fluid is low.

• 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If EquippedThis light alerts the driver that the vehicle is inthe four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front andrear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-gether forcing the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. Low range provides a

greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-creased torque at the wheels.

For further information on four-wheel drive op-eration and proper use, refer to “Four-WheelDrive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting AndOperating”.• SERV 4WD Indicator Light — IfEquippedThis light alerts the driver that the 4WD is inneed of service. If this light is illuminated, seeyour authorized dealer as soon as possible.• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunc-tion

This light will turn on when a ACCis not operating and needs service.For further information, refer to“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in“Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle.”

• LaneSense Service — If EquippedThis telltale will turn on to indicatethat the Lane Sense Departure hasdetected a failure.

183


• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message IndicatorThis telltale will turn on to indicatethe fuel filler cap is loose.

13. Odometer Display / Fuel Gauge / Tem-perature Gauge / Submenu Area

The odometer display shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

When the appropriate conditions exist, this dis-play shows the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) messages and Submenus.• Fuel GaugeFuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fueltank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUNposition.• Temperature GaugeThe temperature gauge shows engine coolanttemperature. Any reading within the normalrange indicates that the engine cooling systemis operating satisfactorily.


CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling systemcould damage your vehicle. If the tempera-ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop thevehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-tioner turned off until the pointer drops backinto the normal range. If the pointer remainson the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,turn the engine off immediately and call anauthorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.You or others could be badly burned bysteam or boiling coolant. You may want to

(Continued)


call an authorized dealer for service if yourvehicle overheats. If you decide to look un-der the hood yourself, see “Maintaining YourVehicle”. Follow the warnings under theCooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

14. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display

• Engine Temperature Warning LightThis light warns of an overheated en-gine condition. As temperatures riseand the gauge approaches H, this in-dicator will illuminate and a single

chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull overand stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEU-TRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperaturereading does not return to normal, turn theengine off immediately and call for service.Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for more information.

184


• Power Steering System Over Tempera-ture — If Equipped

If the “POWER STEERING SYS-TEM OVER TEMP” message anda icon are displayed on the EVICscreen, it indicates that extremesteering maneuvers may have oc-curred, which caused an over tem-

perature condition in the power steering sys-tem. You will lose power steering assistancemomentarily until the over temperature condi-tion no longer exists. Once driving conditionsare safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle. Afterfive minutes, the system will cool and return tonormal operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in“Starting and Operating” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if power steering assistance is nolonger operational, it is still possible tosteer the vehicle. Under these conditionsthere will be a substantial increase insteering effort, especially at very low ve-hicle speeds and during parking maneu-vers.


• Door AjarThis light will turn on to indicatethat one or more doors may beajar.

• Liftgate AjarThis light will turn on to indicatethat liftgate may be ajar.

• Oil Pressure Warning LightThis light indicates low engine oil pres-sure. The light should turn on momen-tarily when the engine is started. If the

light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle andshut off the engine as soon as possible. A chimewill sound for four minutes when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause iscorrected. This light does not show how muchoil is in the engine. The engine oil level must bechecked under the hood.

• Charging System LightThis light shows the status of the elec-trical charging system. If the light stayson or comes on while driving, turn off

some of the vehicle’s non-essential electricaldevices or increase engine speed (if at idle). Ifthe charging system light remains on, it meansthat the vehicle is experiencing a problem withthe charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMME-DIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump StartingProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problemwith the Electronic Throttle Control(ETC) system. The light will comeon when the ignition is first turnedON and remain on briefly as a bulbcheck. If the light does not come on

during starting, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come onwhile the engine is running. Cycle the ignitionkey when the vehicle has completely stopped

185


and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position.The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running,your vehicle will usually be drivable. However,see an authorized dealer for service as soon aspossible. If the light is flashing when the engineis running, immediate service is required. Youmay experience reduced performance, anelevated/rough idle or engine stall and yourvehicle may require towing.• Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oiltemperature is high. If the lightturns on while driving, stop thevehicle and shut off the engine assoon as possible.

Engine Oil Change Indicator SystemOil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oilchange indicator system. The “Oil Change Re-quired” message will flash in the EVIC displayfor approximately 10 seconds after a singlechime has sounded, to indicate the next sched-uled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle based, whichmeans the engine oil change interval may fluc-tuate, dependent upon your personal drivingstyle.

Unless reset, this message will continue todisplay each time you turn the ignition switch tothe ON/RUN position or cycle the ignition to theON/RUN position if equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™. To turn off the message tempo-rarily, press and release the MENU button. Toreset the oil change indicator system (afterperforming the scheduled maintenance) refer tothe following procedure.

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™

1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press theENGINE START/STOP button and cycle theignition to the ON/ RUN position (Do not startthe engine.)

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly,three times within 10 seconds.

3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press theENGINE START/STOP button once to returnthe ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:If the indicator message illuminates whenyou start the vehicle, the oil change indica-tor system did not reset. If necessary, repeatthis procedure.

Driver Assist MenuAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) MenuThe EVIC displays the current ACC systemsettings. The information displayed depends onACC system status.

Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(ACC) ON/OFF button (located on the steeringwheel) until one of the following displays in theEVIC:


When ACC is deactivated, the display will read“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

186



When ACC is activated but the vehicle speedsetting has not been selected, the display willread “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”

Press the SET + or the SET- button (located onthe steering wheel) and the following will displayin the EVIC:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display inthe instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if anyACC activity occurs, which may include any ofthe following:

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The EVIC will return to the last display se-lected after five seconds of no ACC displayactivity.

For further information, refer to “AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Under-standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

LaneSense MenuThe EVIC displays the current LaneSense sys-tem settings. The information displayed de-pends on LaneSense system status and theconditions that need to be met. For furtherinformation, refer to “LaneSense — IfEquipped” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle”.

Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) Messages• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Service Airbag System

• Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low

• Oil Pressure Low

• Oil Change Due

• Fuel Low

• Service Antilock Brake System

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “In-flate Tire to XX”

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Lights On

187


• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Turn Signal On

• Vehicle Not in Park

• Key in Ignition

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Light

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Tailgate Open

• Gear Not Available

• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick ServiceReq.

• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait toCool

• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive

• Service Transmission

• Service Shifter

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On

• Washer Fluid LowThe Reconfigurable Telltales section is dividedinto the white telltales area on the right, ambertelltales in the middle, and red telltales on theleft.

EVIC Selectable Menu ItemsPress and release the UP or DOWN arrowbuttons until the desired Selectable Menu iconis highlighted in the EVIC.

Digital Speedometer

Press and release the UP orDOWN arrow button until the Digi-tal display icon is highlighted in theEVIC. Press and release theRIGHT arrow button to scrollthrough the sub-menus and press

the OK button to change the display betweenDigital Speedometer or Analog Speedometer.

Vehicle Info (Customer InformationFeatures)

Press and release the UP orDOWN arrow button until the Ve-hicle Info icon is highlighted in theEVIC. Press and release theRIGHT arrow button and CoolantTemp will be displayed. Press the

LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll throughthe information sub-menus and press the OKbutton to select or reset the following resettablesub-menus:

Transmission Temperature – AutomaticTransmission Only

188


Oil Temp

Coolant Temperature

Oil Life

Battery Voltage

Tire Pressure

Press and release the UP or DOWN arrowbutton until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in theEVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrowbutton and one of the following will be dis-played:

If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICONis displayed with tire pressure values in eachcorner of the ICON.

If one or more tires have low pressure, “InflateTire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICONand the tire pressure values in each corner ofthe ICON with the pressure value of the low tiredisplayed in a different color than the other tirepressure value.

If the Tire Pressure system requires service,“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.

Tire PSI is an information only function andcannot be reset. Press and release the LEFTarrow button to return to the main menu.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” under “Starting and Operating” forfurther information.

Fuel Economy

Press and release the UP orDOWN arrow button until the FuelEconomy icon is highlighted.

• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon(MPG or L/100 km with Bargraph)

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

Trip InfoPress and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttonuntil the Trip icon is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggleleft or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip Ainformation will display the following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset all the information.

Stored Messages

Press and release the UP arrowbutton until the Messages displayicon is highlighted in the EVIC. Thisfeature shows the number ofstored warning messages. Press-ing the RIGHT arrow button will

allow you to see what the stored messages are.

189


Audio

Press and release the UP orDOWN arrow button until the Audiodisplay icon is highlighted in theEVIC.

Screen Setup

Press and release the UP orDOWN arrow button until theScreen Setup display icon is high-lighted in the EVIC. Press and re-lease the OK button to enter thesub-menus. The Screen Setup fea-

ture allows you to change what information isdisplayed in the instrument cluster as well asthe location that information is displayed.

Screen Setup Driver SelectableItemsGear Display

• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator

• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator

Upper Left

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp (default setting)

• Oil Temp

• Time


• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Trip A

• Trip B

Upper Right

• None

• Compass (default setting)

• Outside Temp

• Oil Temp

• Time


• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Trip A

• Trip B

Restore To Defaults (Restores All SettingsTo Default Settings)

• Cancel

• Okay

Center

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp.

• Time

• Range to Empty

• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Audio Information

• Menu Title (Default Setting)

190


Uconnect® SETTINGSThe Uconnect® system uses a combination ofsoft and hard keys located on the center of theinstrument panel that allows you to access andchange the customer programmable features.

Hard-KeysHard-Keys are located below the Uconnect®system in the center of the instrument panel. Inaddition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knoblocated on the right side of the Climate Controlsin the center of the instrument panel. Turn thecontrol knob to scroll through menus andchange settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press thecenter of the control knob one or more times toselect or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect® system may also have aScreen Off and Back hard-keys located belowthe system.

Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off theUconnect® screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time to turn the screen on.

Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu orcertain option on the Uconnect® system.

Soft-KeysSoft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect®display.

Customer Programmable Features— Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 SettingsPress the Apps soft-key, then press the Settingssoft-key to display the menu setting screen. Inthis mode the Uconnect® system allows you toaccess programmable features that may beequipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-OnComfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®and SiriusXM Setup.

Uconnect® 5.0 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys

1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys

Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys

1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys

191


NOTE:Only one touchscreen area may be selectedat a time.

When making a selection, press the soft-key toenter the desired mode. Once in the desiredmode, press and release the preferred settinguntil a check-mark appears next to the setting,showing that setting has been selected. Oncethe setting is complete, either press the BackArrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return tothe previous menu or press the X soft-key toclose out of the settings screen. Pressing theUp or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side ofthe screen will allow you to toggle up or downthrough the available settings.

DisplayAfter pressing the Display soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select one of theauto display settings. To change Mode status,touch and release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the bright-ness with the headlights on. Adjust the bright-ness with the + and – setting soft-keys or byselecting any point on the scale between the +and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the bright-ness with the headlights off. Adjust the bright-ness with the + and – setting soft-keys or byselecting any point on the scale between the +and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one ofthree languages for all display nomenclature,including the trip functions and the navigationsystem (if equipped). Touch the Set Languagesoft-key and then touch the desired languagesoft-key until a check-mark appears next to thelanguage, showing that setting has been se-lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

• Units

When in this display, you may select to have theEVIC, odometer, and navigation system (ifequipped) changed between US and Metricunits of measure. Touch US or Metric until acheck-mark appears next to the setting, show-ing that setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the VoiceResponse Length settings. To change the VoiceResponse Length, touch the Brief or Detailedsoft-key until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut offthe sound heard when a touchscreen button(soft-key) is pressed. Touch the TouchscreenBeep soft-key until a check-mark appears nextto the setting, showing that setting has been

192


selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turndirections will appear in the display as thevehicle approaches a designated turn within aprogrammed route. To make your selection,touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Clustersoft-key, until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

ClockAfter pressing the Clock soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Sync Time With GPS

When in this display, you may automaticallyhave the radio set the time. To change the SyncTime setting, touch the Sync with GPS Timesoft-key until a check-mark appears next to thesetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Set Time Hours

When in this display, you may adjust the hours.The Sync with GPS Time soft-key must beunchecked. To make your selection, touch the +or - soft-keys to adjust the hours up or down.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu or touch the X soft-key to closeout of the settings screen.

• Set Time Minutes

When in this display, you may adjust the min-utes. The Sync with GPS Time soft-key must beunchecked. To make your selection, touch the +or - soft-keys to adjust the minutes up or down.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu or touch the X soft-key to closeout of the settings screen.

• Time Format

When in this display, you may select the timeformat display setting. Touch the Time Formatsoft-key until a check-mark appears next to the12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting hasbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

Safety / AssistanceAfter pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-keythe following settings will be available:

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — IfEquipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature canbe can be set to Far, or set to Near. The defaultstatus of FCW is the Far setting. This means thesystem will warn you of a possible collision withthe vehicle in front of you when you are fartheraway. This gives you the most reaction time. Tochange the setting for more dynamic driving,select the Near setting. This warns you of apossible collision when you are much closer tothe vehicle in front of you. This allows for a moredynamic driving experience. To change theFCW status, touch and release the Near or Farbutton. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

For further information, refer to “AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle”.

193


• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) ActiveBraking — If Equipped

The FCW system includes Advanced BrakeAssist (ABA). When this feature is selected, itwill apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in caseof potential forward collision. The ABA appliesadditional brake pressure when the driver re-quests insufficient brake pressure to avoid apotential frontal collision. The ABA system be-comes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).

For further information, refer to “Forward Colli-sion Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Under-standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, it sets the dis-tance at which the steering wheel will providefeedback for potential lane departures. TheLDW sensitivity can be set to provide either anearly, medium or late warning zone start point.

For further information, refer to “Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)” in “Understanding The Fea-tures Of Your Vehicle”.

• Lane Departure Torque — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it sets thestrength of the steering wheel feedback forpotential lane departures. The amount of direc-tional torque the steering system can apply tothe steering wheel to correct for vehicle lanedeparture can be set at Low, Medium or High.

For further information, refer to “Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)” in “Understanding The Fea-tures Of Your Vehicle”.

• ParkSense® Active Park Assist — IfEquipped

The Rear Park Assist system will scan forobjects behind the vehicle when the transmis-sion shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehiclespeed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). Thesystem can be enabled with Sound Only, orSound and Display. To change the Park Assiststatus, touch and release the Sound Only orSounds and Display button. Then touch thearrow back soft-key.

Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”for system function and operating information.

• ParkSense® Front Park Assist ChimeVolume — If Equipped

Front Park Assist chime volume settings can beselected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System(if equipped). The chime volume settings in-clude LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factorydefault volume setting is MEDIUM.

Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Set-tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information.

• ParkSense® Rear Park Assist ChimeVolume — If Equipped

Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can beselected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System(if equipped). The chime volume settings in-clude LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factorydefault volume setting is MEDIUM.

Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Set-tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information.

194


• ParkSense® Active Park Assist Braking— If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the park assistsystem will detect objects located behind thevehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stopthe vehicle.

Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”for system function and operating information.

• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the outsidesideview mirrors will tilt downward when theignition is in the RUN position and the transmis-sion shift lever is in the REVERSE position. Themirrors will move back to their previous positionwhen the transmission is shifted out of RE-VERSE. To make your selection, touch the TiltMirrors In Reverse soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Blind SpotAlert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lightsand Chime. The Blind Spot Alert feature can beactivated in “Lights” mode. When this mode isselected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) systemis activated and will only show a visual alert inthe outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors aswell as an audible alert when the turn signal ison. When “Off” is selected, the Blind SpotMonitor (BSM) system is deactivated. Tochange the Blind Spot Alert status, touch theOff, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.

NOTE:If your vehicle has experienced any damagein the area where the sensor is located, evenif the fascia is not damaged, the sensor mayhave become misaligned. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer to verify sensoralignment. Having a sensor that is mis-aligned will result in the BSM not operatingto specification.

• ParkView® Rear Backup Camera — IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with theParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allowsyou to see an on-screen image of the rearsurroundings of your vehicle whenever the shiftlever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed on the radio touchscreen displayalong with a caution note to “check entire sur-roundings” across the top of the screen. Afterfive seconds, this note will disappear. TheParkView® camera is located on the rear of thevehicle above the rear License plate. To makeyour selection, touch the ParkView® BackupCamera soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, showing that setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Active ParkView® Rear Backup CameraGuide Lines — If Equipped

When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic)grid lines are overlaid on the Rear BackupCamera image to illustrate the width of thevehicle and its projected back up path based onthe steering wheel position. A dashed center

195


line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle toassist with parking or aligning to ahitch/receiver.

• Fixed ParkView® Rear Backup CameraGuide Lines — If Equipped

When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) gridlines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Cameraimage to illustrate the width of the vehicle.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay

When this feature is enabled, it will allow theParkView® Backup Camera display to remainon while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph(13 km/h).

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system willautomatically activate the windshield wipers if itsenses moisture on the windshield. To makeyour selection, touch the Rain Sensing soft-key,until a check-mark appears next to setting,showing that setting has been selected. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Electric Park Brake Service Mode

This feature provides a means for a technicianor vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated,menu driven system, to command the electricpark brake retraction, to service the rear foun-dation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors,etc.).

For further information, refer to “Electric ParkingBrake (EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”

LightsAfter pressing the Lights soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Headlights Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows theadjustment of the amount of time the headlightsremain on after the engine is shut off. To changethe Headlights Off Delay setting, touch theHeadlights Off Delay soft-key, and choose ei-ther 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Acheck-mark appears next to setting indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights willactivate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90seconds when the doors are unlocked with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Tochange the Illuminated Approach status, touchthe + or - soft-key to select your desired timeinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlightswitch is in the AUTO position, the headlightswill turn on approximately 10 seconds after thewipers are turned on. The headlights will alsoturn off when the wipers are turned off if theywere turned on by this feature. To make yourselection, touch the Headlights With Wiperssoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, indicating that the setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

196


• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the high beamheadlights will activate/deactivate automaticallyunder certain conditions. To make your selec-tion, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — IfEquipped” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle” for further information.

• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights willturn on whenever the engine is running. Tomake your selection, touch the Daytime Run-ning Lights soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, indicating that the setting hasbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Adaptive Front Lighting

When this feature is selected, the headlights willturn relative to a change in the direction of thesteering wheel. To make your selection, touch

the Adaptive Front Lighting soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, indicatingthat the setting has been selected. Touch theback arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

• Flash Headlights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the headlights willflash when the doors are locked or unlockedwith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-ter. This feature may be selected with or withoutthe sound horn on lock feature selected. Tomake your selection, touch the Flash Head-lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

Doors & LocksAfter pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key thefollowing settings will be available:

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors willunlock when the vehicle is stopped and thetransmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL posi-tion and the driver’s door is opened. To make

your selection, touch the Auto Unlock On Exitsoft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, showing that setting has been selected.Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Auto Lock

When this feature is selected, all doors will lockautomatically when the vehicle reaches a speedof 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection,touch the Auto Lock soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, indicating that the set-ting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn willsound when the door locks are activated. Tomake your selection, touch the Sound HornWith Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appearsnext to setting, showing that setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

197


• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn willsound when the remote start is activated. Tomake your selection, touch the Sound HornWith Remote Start soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is se-lected, only the driver’s door will unlock on thefirst press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter UNLOCK button. When 1st Press OfKey Fob Unlocks is selected, you must pressthe RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice tounlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock AllDoors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doorswill unlock on the first press of the RKE trans-mitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE:If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press OfKey Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock nomatter which Passive Entry equipped doorhandle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key FobUnlocks is programmed, only the driver’sdoor will unlock when the driver’s door isgrasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press OfKey Fob Unlocks is programmed touchingthe handle more than once will only result inthe driver’s door opening. If driver door firstis selected, once the driver door is opened,the interior door lock/unlock switch can beused to unlock all doors (or use RKE trans-mitter).

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock thevehicles door(s) without having to press theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock orunlock buttons. To make your selection, touchthe Passive Entry soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To KnowBefore Starting Your Vehicle”.

• Memory To FOB — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat po-sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-ing and exiting the vehicle. To make your selec-tion, touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft-key,until a check-mark appears next to setting,showing that setting has been selected. Touchthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previousmenu.

NOTE:The seat will return to the memorized seatlocation (if Recall Memory with Remote KeyUnlock is set to ON) when the Remote Key-less Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to un-lock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”in “Understanding The Features Of YourVehicle” for further information.

Auto-On ComfortAfter pressing the Auto-On Comfort soft-key thefollowing settings will be available:

198


• Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn willsound when the remote start is activated. Tomake your selection, touch the Sound HornWith Remote Start soft-key, until a check-markappears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — IfEquipped

When this feature is selected the driver’sheated seat and heated steering wheel willautomatically turn on when temperatures arebelow 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures areabove 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat willturn on. To make your selection, touch the AutoHeated Seats soft-key, until a check-mark ap-pears next to setting, showing that setting hasbeen selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

Engine Off OptionsAfter pressing the Engine Off Options soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power win-dow switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped),power sunroof (if equipped), and power outletswill remain active for up to 10 minutes after theignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either frontdoor will cancel this feature. To change theEngine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutessoft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver canchoose to have the headlights remain on for 0,30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.To change the Headlight Off Delay status, touchthe + or - soft-key to select your desired timeinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to returnto the previous menu.

Compass Setting — If EquippedAfter pressing the Compass Settings soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Variance

Compass Variance is the difference betweenMagnetic North and Geographic North. To com-pensate for the differences the variance shouldbe set for the zone where the vehicle is driven,per the zone map. Once properly set, the com-pass will automatically compensate for the dif-ferences, and provide the most accurate com-pass heading.

NOTE:Keep magnetic materials away from the topof the instrument panel, such as iPod’s,Mobile Phones, Laptop Computers and Ra-dar Detectors. This is where the compassmodule is located, and it can cause interfer-ence with the compass sensor, and it maygive false readings.

199


• Perform Compass Calibration

Touch the Calibration soft-key to change thissetting. This compass is self-calibrating, whicheliminates the need to manually reset the com-pass. When the vehicle is new, the compassmay appear erratic and the EVIC will displayCAL until the compass is calibrated. You mayalso calibrate the compass by pressing the ONsoft-key and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal ormetallic objects) until the CAL indicator dis-played in the EVIC turns off. The compass willnow function normally.

AudioAfter pressing the Audio soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Balance/Fade

When in this display you may adjust the Bal-ance and Fade settings.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass,Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings withthe + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting anypoint on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

NOTE:Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slideyour finger up or down to change the settingas well as touch directly on the desiredsetting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volumerelative to vehicle speed. To change the SpeedAdjusted Volume touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround soundmode. To make your selection, touch the Sur-round Sound soft-key, select On or Off followedby pressing the arrow back soft-key.

Phone/Bluetooth®After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-keythe following settings will be available:

• Paired Devices

This feature shows which phones are paired tothe Phone / Bluetooth® system. For furtherinformation, refer to the Uconnect® SupplementManual.

Radio SetupAfter pressing the Radio Setup soft-key thefollowing settings will be available.

• Regional

When this feature is selected it forces regionalservice-following enabling automatic switchingto network stations. To change the Regionalsetting touch the Off or On soft-key. A checkmark will appear in the box when selected. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.

Compass Variance Map

200


Restore SettingsAfter pressing the Restore Settings soft-key thefollowing settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset Dis-play, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to theirdefault. To restore the settings to their defaultsetting touch the Yes or No soft-key. A checkmark will appear in the box when selected. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.

Clear Personal DataAfter pressing the Clear Personal Data Settingssoft-key the following settings will be available:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will removepersonal data including Bluetooth® devices andpresets. To Clear Personal Data touch the Yesor No soft-key. A check mark will appear in thebox when selected. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

Uconnect® RADIOS — IFEQUIPPEDFor detailed information about your Uconnect®radio, refer to your Uconnect® SupplementManual.

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —IF EQUIPPED

1 – USB Port 2 – SD Card Slot

3 – AUX Port

Located in the front storage area, this featureallows an iPod® or external USB device to beplugged into the USB port.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod®software versions may not fully support theiPod® control features. Please visit Apple’swebsite for software updates.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect®User’s Manual.

201


STEERING WHEEL AUDIOCONTROLS — IF EQUIPPEDThe remote sound system controls are locatedon the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reachbehind the wheel to access the switches.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switchwith a pushbutton in the center and controls thevolume and mode of the sound system. Press-ing the top of the rocker switch will increase thevolume, and pressing the bottom of the rockerswitch will decrease the volume.

Pressing the center button will make the radioswitch between the various modes available(AM/FM/SXM/CD/AUX, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switchwith a pushbutton in the center. The function ofthe left-hand control is different depending onwhich mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand controloperation in each mode.

Radio OperationPressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up forthe next listenable station and pressing thebottom of the switch will “Seek” down for thenext listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-handcontrol will tune to the next preset station thatyou have programmed in the radio preset push-button.

CD PlayerPressing the top of the switch once will go to thenext track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of theswitch once will go to the beginning of the

current track, or to the beginning of the previoustrack if it is within one second after the currenttrack begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it playsthe second track; three times, it will play thethird, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switchhas no function for a single-disc CD player.However, when a multiple-disc CD player isequipped on the vehicle, the center button willselect the next available CD in the player.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCETo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take thefollowing precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touchingthe surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with asoft cloth, wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoidscratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thin-ner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View OfSteering Wheel)

202


5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperaturesmay become too high.

NOTE:If you experience difficulty in playing a par-ticular disc, it may be damaged (i.e.,scratched, reflective coating removed, ahair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,or have protection encoding. Try a knowngood disc before considering disc playerservice.

RADIO OPERATION ANDMOBILE PHONESUnder certain conditions, the mobile phonebeing on in your vehicle can cause erratic ornoisy performance from your radio. This condi-tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat-ing the mobile phone antenna. This condition isnot harmful to the radio. If your radio perfor-mance does not satisfactorily “clear” by therepositioning of the antenna, it is recommendedthat the radio volume be turned down or off

during mobile phone operation when not usingUconnect® (if equipped).

CLIMATE CONTROLSThe air conditioning and heating system isdesigned to make you comfortable in all typesof weather. This system can be operatedthrough either the controls on the instrumentpanel or through the Uconnect® system display.

When the Uconnect® system is in differentmodes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) thedriver and passenger temperature settings willbe indicated at the top of the display.

Manual Climate Controls WithoutTouchscreen — If EquippedThe controls for the manual heating and airconditioning system in this vehicle consist of aseries of outer rotary dials and inner pushknobs. These comfort controls can be set toobtain desired interior conditions.

1 – RECIRCULATIONControl

5 – Air Conditioning(A/C)

2 – Front Blower Control 6 – REAR DEFROSTMode

3 – MAX Air Condition-ing (A/C)

7 – MODE Control

4 – Temperature Control

203


Front Blower Control

There are seven blowerspeeds. Use this controlto regulate the amountof air forced through thesystem in any mode youselect. The blowerspeed increases as youmove the control clock-wise from the OFFposition.

NOTE:For vehicles equipped with Remote Start,the climate controls will not function duringRemote Start operation if the blower controlis left in the OFF position.

Temperature Control

Use this control to regu-late the temperature ofthe air inside the pas-senger compartment.Rotating the knob coun-terclockwise, from topcenter into the blue areaof the scale, indicatescooler temperatures.Rotating the knob clock-

wise, into the red area, indicates warmertemperatures.

Air Conditioning OperationPush the A/C button to engage the Air Condi-tioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/Csystem is engaged.

MAX A/CFor maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is se-lected the A/C is turned on automatically andthe air is recirculated.

NOTE:A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/Cposition. The LED will blink three times if theA/C button is pushed. If your air conditioningperformance seems lower than expected,check the front of the A/C condenser (locatedin front of the radiator), for an accumulation ofdirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water sprayfrom behind the radiator and through the con-denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may re-duce airflow to the condenser, reducing airconditioning performance.

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Mode control allows youto choose from severalpatterns of air distribu-tion. You can select ei-ther a primary mode, asidentified by the sym-bols, or a blend of two ofthese modes. Thecloser the control is to a

204


particular mode, the more air distribution youreceive from that mode.

Panel Mode

Air is directed through the outlets in theinstrument panel. These outlets can beadjusted to direct airflow.

Bi-Level Mode

Air is directed through the panel andfloor outlets.

NOTE:There is a difference in temperature (in anyconditions other than full cold or full hot),between the upper and lower outlets foradded comfort. The warmer air goes to thefloor outlets. This feature gives improvedcomfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor Mode

Air is directed through the floor outletswith a small amount through the de-frost and side window demist outlets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrostand side window demist outlets. Thissetting works best in cold or snowyconditions that require extra heat at

the windshield. This setting is good for maintain-ing comfort, while reducing moisture on thewindshield.

Defrost Mode

Air is directed through the windshieldand side window demist outlets. Usethe DEFROST mode with maximum

blower and warm temperature settings for bestwindshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE:The air conditioning compressor operates inMIX and DEFROST, or a blend of thesemodes even if the A/C button is not pressed.This dehumidifies the air to help dry thewindshield. To improve fuel economy, usethese modes only when necessary.

Recirculation ControlPress this button to choose between outside airintake or recirculation of the air inside thevehicle. A LED will illuminate when you are inRecirculation mode. Only use the Recirculationmode to temporarily block out any outsideodors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interiorrapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humidweather.

NOTE:

• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressedwhen the system is in Defrost mode theRecirculation LED indicator will flashthree times and then turn off to indicateRecirculation mode is not allowed.

• Continuous use of the Recirculationmode may make the inside air stuffy andwindow fogging may occur. Extended useof this mode is not recommended.

• In cold or damp weather, the use of theRecirculation mode will cause windows tofog on the inside because of moisturebuildup inside the vehicle. For maximumdefogging, select the outside air position.

205


• The A/C can be deselected manually with-out disturbing the mode control selectionby pressing the A/C button.

Air OutletsThe airflow from each of the instrument paneloutlets can be adjusted for direction, and turnedon or off to control airflow.

NOTE:For maximum airflow to the rear, the centerinstrument panel outlets can be directedtoward the rear seat passengers.

Economy ModeIf ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/Cbutton to turn off the LED indicator and the A/Ccompressor. Rotate the temperature controlknob to the desired temperature. Also, makesure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floormodes.

Stop/Start System – If EquippedWhile in an Autostop, the Climate Controlssystem may automatically adjust airflow tomaintain cabin comfort. Customer settings willbe maintained upon return to an engine runningcondition.

Manual Climate Controls WithTouchscreen — If EquippedHard-Keys

The hard-keys located below the Uconnect®screen.

Soft-Keys

Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect®system screen.

Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls —Hard-keys

Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls— Soft-keys

Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls— Soft-keys

206


Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.Performing this function again will cause theMAX A/C operation to switch into manual modeand the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Per-forming this function again will cause the A/Coperation to switch into manual mode and theA/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when ON.

4. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflowsetting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-nates when this feature is ON. Air comes fromthe windshield and side window demist outlets.When the defrost button is selected, the blowerlevel will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-mum temperature settings for best windshieldand side window defrosting and defogging.

5. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rearwindow defroster and the heated outside mir-rors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminatewhen the rear window defroster is on. The rearwindow defroster automatically turns off after 10minutes. For each additional press of this but-ton, five additional minutes will be added to thetimer function.

CAUTION!





6. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount ofair forced through the climate system. There areseven blower speeds available. Adjusting theblower will cause automatic mode to switch tomanual operation. The speeds can be selectedusing either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:

207


Hard-key

The blower speed increases as you turn thecontrol clockwise from the lowest blower set-ting. The blower speed decreases as you turnthe knob counterclockwise.

Soft-key

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blowersetting and the large blower icon to increase theblower setting. Blower can also be selected bypressing the blower bar area between the icons.

7. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjustedso air comes from the instrument panel outlets,floor outlets, demist outlets and defrost outlets.The Mode settings are as follows:Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the in-strument panel. Each of these outletscan be individually adjusted to direct

the flow of air. The air vanes of the centeroutlets and outboard outlets can be moved upand down or side to side to regulate airflowdirection. There is a shut off wheel located

below the air vanes to shut off or adjust theamount of airflow from these outlets.Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument paneloutlets and floor outlets. A slightamount of air is directed through the

defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfortconditions to provide cooler air out of thepanel outlets and warmer air from the flooroutlets.Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. Aslight amount of air is directed throughthe defrost and side window demister

outlets.Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost andside window demist outlets. This modeworks best in cold or snowy conditions.

NOTE:The air conditioning compressor operates inMIX and DEFROST modes even if the A/Cbutton is not pressed. This dehumidifies theair to help dry the windshield. To improvefuel economy, use these modes only whennecessary.

8. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Cli-mate Control ON/OFF.

9. Temperature Control Down Button(Uconnect® 8.4)

Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature settings or onthe touchscreen, press and slide the soft-keytemperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.

208


10. Temperature Control Up Button(Uconnect® 8.4)

Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature settings oron the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-keytemperature bar towards the red arrow soft-keyfor warmer temperature settings.

11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)

Press the temperature soft-key to regulate thetemperature of the air inside the passengercompartment. Moving the temperature bar intothe red area, indicates warmer temperatures.Moving the temperature bar into the blue areaindicates cooler temperatures.

Automatic Climate Controls WithTouchscreen — If EquippedHard-Keys

The hard-keys located below the Uconnect®screen.

Soft-Keys

Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect®system screen.

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.Performing this function again will cause theMAX A/C operation to switch into manual modeand the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls —Hard-keys

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic TemperatureControls — Soft-keys

209


2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Per-forming this function again will cause the A/Coperation to switch into manual mode and theA/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting,the indicator illuminates when ON.

4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin tem-perature by adjusting airflow distribution andamount. Performing this function will cause theATC to switch between manual mode and au-tomatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation”for more information.

5. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflowsetting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-nates when this feature is ON. Air comes fromthe windshield and side window demist outlets.When the defrost button is selected, the blowerlevel will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-mum temperature settings for best windshieldand side window defrosting and defogging. Per-forming this function will cause the ATC toswitch into manual mode. If the front defrostmode is turned off the climate system will returnto the previous setting.

6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rearwindow defroster and the heated outside mir-rors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminatewhen the rear window defroster is on. The rearwindow defroster automatically turns off after 10minutes. For each additional press of this but-ton, five additional minutes will be added to thetimer function.

CAUTION!





7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the passenger with independent tem-perature control. Push the hard-key button forwarmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the soft-key tempera-ture bar towards the red arrow soft-key forwarmer temperature settings.

210


NOTE:Pressing this button while in Sync mode willautomatically exit Sync.

8. Passenger Temperature Control DownButton

Provides the passenger with independent tem-perature control. Push the hard-key button forcooler temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the soft-key tempera-ture bar towards the blue arrow soft-key forcooler temperature settings.

NOTE:Pressing this button while in Sync mode willautomatically exit Sync.

9. SYNC

Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Syncfeature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminatedwhen this feature is enabled. Sync is used tosynchronize the passenger temperature settingwith the driver temperature setting. Changingthe passenger temperature setting while inSync will automatically exit this feature.

10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount ofair forced through the climate system. There areseven blower speeds available. Adjusting theblower will cause automatic mode to switch tomanual operation. The speeds can be selectedusing either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:

Hard-key

The blower speed increases as you turn thecontrol clockwise from the lowest blower set-ting. The blower speed decreases as you turnthe knob counterclockwise.

Soft-key

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blowersetting and the large blower icon to increase theblower setting. Blower can also be selected bypressing the blower bar area between the icons.

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjustedso air comes from the instrument panel outlets,floor outlets, demist outlets and defrost outlets.The Mode settings are as follows:

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instru-ment panel. Each of these outlets can beindividually adjusted to direct the flow of

air. The air vanes of the center outlets and out-board outlets can be moved up and down or sideto side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shutoff wheel located below the air vanes to shut off oradjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument paneloutlets and floor outlets. A slightamount of air is directed through the

defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfortconditions to provide cooler air out of thepanel outlets and warmer air from the flooroutlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slightamount of air is directed through thedefrost and side window demister

outlets.

211


Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost andside window demist outlets. This modeworks best in cold or snowy conditions.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Cli-mate Control ON/OFF.

13. Driver Temperature Control Down But-ton

Provides the driver with independent tempera-ture control. Push the hard-key button for coolertemperature settings or on the touchscreen,press and slide the soft-key temperature bartowards the blue arrow soft-key for cooler tem-perature settings.

NOTE:In Sync mode, this button will also automati-cally adjust the passenger temperature set-ting at the same time.

14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the driver with independent tempera-ture control. Push the hard-key button forwarmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the soft-key tempera-ture bar towards the red arrow soft-key forwarmer temperature settings.

NOTE:In Sync mode, this button will also automati-cally adjust the passenger temperature set-ting at the same time.

Climate Control FunctionsA/C (Air Conditioning)The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the op-erator to manually activate or deactivate the airconditioning system. When the air conditioningsystem is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flowthrough the outlets into the cabin. For improvedfuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off theair conditioning and manually adjust the blowerand airflow mode settings. Also, make sure toselect only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield orside glass, select Defrost mode and in-crease blower speed.

• If your air conditioning performanceseems lower than expected, check thefront of the A/C condenser (located infront of the radiator), for an accumulationof dirt or insects. Clean with a gentlewater spray from behind the radiator andthrough the condenser. Fabric front fas-cia protectors may reduce airflow to thecondenser, reducing air conditioning per-formance.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum coolingperformance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/Cand the prior settings. The soft-key illuminateswhen MAX A/C is ON.

212


In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode positioncan be adjusted to desired user settings. Press-ing other settings will cause the MAX A/Coperation to switch to the selected setting andcause MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

When outside air contains smoke,odors, or high humidity, or if rapidcooling is desired, you may wish torecirculate interior air by pressingthe Recirculation control button.The recirculation indicator will illu-

minate when this button is selected. Push thebutton a second time to turn off the Recircula-tion mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE:In cold weather, use of Recirculation modemay lead to excessive window fogging. Therecirculation feature may be unavailable (softbutton greyed out) if conditions exist thatcould create fogging on the inside of the wind-shield. On systems with Manual Climate Con-trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed inDefrost mode to improve window clearing op-eration. Recirculation will be disabled auto-matically if this mode is selected. Attemptingto use Recirculation while in this mode willcause the LED in the control button to blinkand then turn off.

Automatic Temperature Control(ATC)Automatic Operation

1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button(4) on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would likethe system to maintain by adjusting the driverand passenger temperature hard or soft controlbuttons (7, 8, 13, 14,). Once the desired tem-perature is displayed, the system will achieveand automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfortlevel, it is not necessary to change the settings.You will experience the greatest efficiency bysimply allowing the system to function automati-cally.

213


NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the tempera-ture settings for cold or hot vehicles. Thesystem automatically adjusts the tem-perature, mode, and blower speed to pro-vide comfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.or Metric units by selecting theUconnect® customer-programmable fea-ture. Refer to the “Uconnect® SystemSettings” in this section of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in theAutomatic mode, during cold start-ups theblower fan will remain on low until the enginewarms up. The blower will increase in speedand transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation OverrideThe system allows for manual selection ofblower speed, air distribution mode, A/C statusand recirculation control.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixedspeed by adjusting the blower control. The fanwill now operate at a fixed speed until additionalspeeds are selected. This allows the front oc-cupants to control the volume of air circulated inthe vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of theairflow by selecting one of the available modesettings. A/C operation and Recirculation con-trol can also be manually selected in Manualoperation.

Operating TipsNOTE:Refer to the chart at the end of this sectionfor suggested control settings for variousweather conditions.

Summer OperationThe engine cooling system must be protectedwith a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provideproper corrosion protection and to protectagainst engine overheating. A solution of 50%OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant thatmeets the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-12106 and 50% water is recom-mended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolantselection.

214


Winter OperationUse of the air Recirculation mode during Wintermonths is not recommended because it maycause window fogging.

Vacation StorageAny time you store your vehicle or keep it out ofservice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,run the air conditioning system at idle for aboutfive minutes in the fresh air and high blowersetting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-cation to minimize the possibility of compressordamage when the system is started again.

Window FoggingInterior fogging on the windshield can be quicklyremoved by turning the mode selector to De-frost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used tomaintain a clear windshield and provide suffi-cient heating. If side window fogging becomesobjectionable, increase blower speed to im-prove airflow and clearing of the side windows.Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mildbut rainy or humid weather.

NOTE:

• Recirculate without A/C should not beused for long periods, as fogging mayoccur.

• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC)will automatically adjust the climate con-trol settings to reduce or eliminate win-dow fogging on the front windshield.When this occurs, recirculation will beunavailable.

Outside Air IntakeMake sure the air intake, located directly in frontof the windshield, is free of obstructions such asleaves. Leaves collected in the air intake mayreduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum,they could plug the water drains. In Wintermonths, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,slush, and snow.

A/C Air FilterThe climate control system filters outside aircontaining dust, pollen and some odors. Strongodors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for filter replacement instructions.

215


Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

216


5STARTING AND OPERATING

• STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221• Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221• Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . .221• Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221• If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222• After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222• Normal Starting – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

• ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .224• AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

• Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226• Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . .226• Nine–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226• Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

• MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .230• Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231• Downshifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

• FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233• 1–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .233• 2–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .233

217


• Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234• Shifting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235• Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System – If Equipped. . . . . . .236

• SELEC-TERRAIN™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237• Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

• ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238• OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

• When To Use 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238• Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239• Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239• Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239• Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240• After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

• POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241• ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

• Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244• Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244• Brake Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

• ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245• ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

• Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246• Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247• Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247• Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247• Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248• Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249• Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

218


• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253• ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF

Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256• Ready Alert Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257• Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257• Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

• TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257• Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257• Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258• Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .259• Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259• Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260• Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260• Spare Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260• Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262• Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262• Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263• Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

• TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264• TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265• TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . .266

• Base System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267• Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269• TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES . . . . . . . . . .272• 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

219


• 3.2L Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272• Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272• Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273• Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273• MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273• Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273• ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

• Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

• TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275• Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276• Breakaway Cable Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276• Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . .278• Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278• Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279• Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282• Trailer Hitch Attaching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282• Trailer Hitch Attaching Points (Trailhawk Models) . . . . . . . . . . .283

• RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . .284• Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284• Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . .285• Recreational Towing — 4WD Models with 1-Speed Power

Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285• Recreational Towing — 4WD Models with 2-Speed Power

Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

220


STARTING PROCEDURESBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,adjust both inside and outside mirrors, andfasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow-ing children to be in a vehicle unattendedis dangerous for a number of reasons. Achild or others could be seriously or fatallyinjured. Children should be warned not totouch the parking brake, brake pedal or theshift lever.

(Continued)


• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A childcould operate power windows, other con-trols, or move the vehicle.

Start the engine with the shift lever in theNEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brakebefore shifting to any driving range.

Normal StartingNOTE:Normal starting of either a cold or a warmengine is obtained without pumping orpressing the accelerator pedal.Turn the ignition switch to the START position andrelease when the engine starts. If the engine failsto start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Tip Start FeatureTurn the ignition switch to START position andrelease it as soon as the starter engages. Thestarter motor will continue to run, but will auto-matically disengage itself when the engine isrunning. If the engine fails to start, the starterwill disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Ifthis occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the“Normal Starting” procedure.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°FOr −29°C)To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-tures, use of an externally powered electricengine block heater (available from your autho-rized dealer) is recommended.

Extended Park StartingNOTE:Extended Park condition occurs when thevehicle has not been started or driven for atleast 35 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables tothe battery to ensure a full battery charge duringthe crank cycle.

221


2. Place the ignition in the START position andrelease it when the engine starts.

3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,place the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)position, wait 5 seconds to allow the starter tocool, then repeat the Extended Park Startingprocedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts,allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes,then repeat the procedure.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid intothe throttle body air inlet opening in an at-tempt to start the vehicle. This could result inflash fire causing serious personal injury.

(Continued)


• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicleto get it started. Vehicles equipped with anautomatic transmission cannot be startedthis way. Unburned fuel could enter thecatalytic converter and once the enginehas started, ignite and damage the con-verter and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the batteryin another vehicle. This type of start can bedangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emer-gencies” for further information.

With Tip StartIf the engine fails to start after you have followedthe “Normal Starting” or “Extreme ColdWeather” procedures, it may be flooded. Toclear any excess fuel, press the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then,turn the ignition switch to the START positionand release it as soon as the starter engages.

The starter motor will disengage automaticallyin 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release theaccelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to theLOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, thenrepeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to15 seconds before trying again.

After StartingThe idle speed is controlled automatically and itwill decrease as the engine warms up.

Normal Starting – Diesel EngineObserve the following when the engine is oper-ating.

• All message center lights are off.

• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.

• Low Oil Pressure Light is off.

222


Cold Weather PrecautionsOperation in ambient temperature below 32°F(0°C) may require special considerations. Thefollowing chart suggests these options.

*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel (ULSD)should only be used where extended arcticconditions -10°F (-23°C) exist.

NOTE:

• Use of Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel orNumber 1 ULSD Diesel Fuel results in anoticeable decrease in fuel economy.

• Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel is a blend ofNumber 2 ULSD and Number 1 ULSDDiesel Fuels, which reduces the tempera-ture at which wax crystals form in fuel.

NOTE:This engine requires the use of “Ultra LowSulfur Diesel Fuel.” Use of incorrect fuelcould result in exhaust system damage. Re-fer to “Fuel Requirements – Diesel Engine”in “Starting and Operating” for further infor-mation.

Battery Blanket UsageA battery loses 60% of its cranking power as thebattery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). Forthe same decrease in temperature, the enginerequires twice as much power to crank at the sameRPM. The use of battery blankets will greatlyincrease starting capability at low temperatures.Suitable battery blankets are available from yourauthorized MOPAR® dealer.

Engine Starting Procedure

WARNING!

NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid intothe air inlet opening in an attempt to start thevehicle. This could result in a flash fire causingserious personal injury.

1. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL orPARK position before you can start the engine.

2. With your foot on the brake pedal, press theENGINE START/STOP button.

3. Watch the “Wait To Start Light” in the instru-ment cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information. It may glow for up to threeseconds, depending on engine temperature.

4. When the “Wait To Start Light” goes out, theengine will automatically start.

5. After the engine starts, allow it to idle forapproximately 30 seconds before driving. Thisallows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo-charger.Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperaturesbelow 0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling maybe harmful to your engine because combustionchamber temperatures can drop so low that thefuel may not burn completely. Incomplete com-bustion allows carbon and varnish to form onpiston rings and injector nozzles. Also, theunburned fuel can enter the crankcase, dilutingthe oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.

223


Engine Warm UpAvoid full throttle operation when the engine iscold. When starting a cold engine, bring theengine up to operating speed slowly to allow theoil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.

NOTE:High-speed, no-load running of a cold en-gine can result in excessive white smokeand poor engine performance. No-load en-gine speeds should be kept under 1,200RPM during the warm-up period, especiallyin cold ambient temperature conditions.

If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operatethe engine at moderate speeds for five minutesbefore full loads are applied.

Engine Idling – In Cold WeatherAvoid prolonged idling in ambient temperaturesbelow 0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling maybe harmful to your engine because combustionchamber temperatures can drop so low that thefuel may not burn completely. Incomplete com-bustion allows carbon and varnish to form onpiston rings and injector nozzles. Also, theunburned fuel can enter the crankcase, dilutingthe oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.

Stopping The EngineBefore turning off your turbo diesel engine,always allow the engine to return to normal idlespeed and run for several seconds. This as-sures proper lubrication of the turbocharger.This is particularly necessary after any period ofhard driving.

Idle the engine a few minutes before routineshutdown. After full load operation, idle theengine three to five minutes before shutting itdown. This idle period will allow the lubricatingoil and coolant to carry excess heat away fromthe combustion chamber, bearings, internalcomponents, and turbocharger. This is espe-cially important for turbocharged, charge aircooled engines.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IFEQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms the engine, andpermits quicker starts in cold weather. Connectthe cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electricaloutlet with a grounded three-wire extensioncord.

The engine block heater cord is found under thehood clipped to the heater line on the left side ofthe engine.

The engine block heater must be plugged in atleast one hour to have an adequate warmingeffect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine blockheater cord before driving. Damage to the110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could causeelectrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if thefollowing precautions are not observed:• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has

come to a complete stop.

(Continued)

224



• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after thevehicle has come to a complete stop andthe engine is at idle speed.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE:You must press and hold the brake pedalwhile shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• Unintended movement of a vehicle couldinjure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit a ve-hicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,turn the engine OFF, and remove the keyfob. When the ignition is in the full OFF(key removal) position, the transmission islocked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob and lock your vehicle.


(Continued)


• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition (in avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Achild could operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle andhit someone or something. Only shift intogear when the engine is idling normallyand your foot is firmly pressing the brakepedal.

225


Key Ignition Park InterlockThis vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition ParkInterlock which requires the transmission to bein PARK before the ignition switch can be turnedto the full OFF (key removal) position. The keyfob can only be removed from the ignition whenthe ignition is in the full OFF position, and thetransmission is locked in PARK whenever theignition switch is in the full OFF position.

Brake/Transmission Shift InterlockSystemThis vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-sion Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds theshift lever in PARK unless the brakes are ap-plied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, theignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUNposition (engine running or not) and the brakepedal must be pressed.

Nine–Speed AutomaticTransmissionYour vehicle is equipped with a state of the art,fuel efficient nine-speed transmission. Thetransmission gear range (PRND) is displayedboth beside the shift lever and in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To select agear range, press the lock button on the shiftlever and move the lever rearward or forward.You must also press the brake pedal to shift thetransmission out of PARK, or to shift fromNEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when thevehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds(refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift InterlockSystem" in this section). Select the DRIVErange for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission pro-vides a precise shift schedule. The transmissionelectronics are self-calibrating; therefore, thefirst few shifts on a new vehicle may be some-what abrupt. This is a normal condition, andprecision shifts will develop within a few hun-dred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSEwhen the accelerator pedal is released and thevehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot onthe brake pedal when shifting between thesegears.

The transmission shift lever has PARK, RE-VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and ElectronicRange Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual

downshifts can be made using the ERS shiftcontrol (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS)Operation" in this section for further informa-tion). Moving the shift lever into the ERS (-/+)position (beside the DRIVE position) displaysthe current gear in the instrument cluster, andprevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. InERS mode, toggling the shift lever forward (-) orrearward (+) will change the highest availablegear.

Gear RangesDO NOT race the engine when shifting fromPARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

Shift Lever

226


NOTE:

• After selecting any gear range, wait amoment to allow the selected gear toengage before accelerating. This is espe-cially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)This range supplements the parking brake bylocking the transmission. The engine can bestarted in this range. Never attempt to usePARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply theparking brake when leaving the vehicle in thisrange.

When parking on a level surface, you may shiftthe transmission into PARK first, and then applythe parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakebefore shifting the transmission to PARK, oth-erwise the load on the transmission lockingmechanism may make it difficult to move theshift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution,turn the front wheels toward the curb on adownhill grade and away from the curb on anuphill grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substi-tute for the parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when parked toguard against vehicle movement and pos-sible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure youand others if it is not completely in PARK.Check by trying to move the shift lever outof PARK with the brake pedal released.Make sure the transmission is in PARKbefore leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle andhit someone or something. Only shift intogear when the engine is idling normallyand your foot is firmly pressing the brakepedal.

(Continued)


• Unintended movement of a vehicle couldinjure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit a ve-hicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,turn the engine OFF, and remove the keyfob. When the ignition is in the full OFF(key removal) position, the transmission islocked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob and lock your vehicle.


(Continued)

227



• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Achild could operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK,you must place the ignition from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, andalso press the brake pedal. Otherwise,damage to the shift lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shiftingfrom PARK or NEUTRAL into another gearrange, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used toensure that you have engaged the transmissioninto the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, firmly move theshift lever all the way forward until it stopsand is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position dis-play and verify that it indicates the PARKposition.

• With brake pedal released, verify that theshift lever will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)This range is for moving the vehicle backward.Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle hascome to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)Use this range when the vehicle is standing forprolonged periods with the engine running. Theengine may be started in this range. Apply theparking brake and shift the transmission intoPARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn offthe ignition to coast down a hill. These areunsafe practices that limit your response tochanging traffic or road conditions. You mightlose control of the vehicle and have a colli-sion.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving forany other reason with the transmission inNEUTRAL can cause severe transmissiondamage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Dis-abled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergen-cies” for further information.

228


DRIVE (D)This range should be used for most city andhighway driving. It provides the smoothest up-shifts and downshifts, and the best fueleconomy. The transmission automatically up-shifts through all forward gears. The DRIVEposition provides optimum driving characteris-tics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs(such as when operating the vehicle underheavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, travel-ing into strong head winds, or while towingheavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select(ERS) shift control (refer to "Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) Operation" in this section) to se-lect a lower gear range. Under these conditions,using a lower gear range will improve perfor-mance and extend transmission life by reducingexcessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission operating temperature ex-ceeds normal operating limits, the transmissioncontroller may modify the transmission shiftschedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expandthe range of torque converter clutch engage-ment. This is done to prevent transmissiondamage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” mayilluminate and the transmission may operatedifferently until the transmission cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission opera-tion may be modified depending on engine andtransmission temperature as well as vehiclespeed. This feature improves warm up time ofthe engine and transmission to achieve maxi-mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque con-verter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, areinhibited until the transmission fluid is warm(refer to the “Note” under “Torque ConverterClutch” in this section). Normal operation willresume once the transmission temperature hasrisen to a suitable level.

SPORT - IF EQUIPPEDThis mode alters the transmission’s automaticshift schedule for sportier driving. Upshiftspeeds are increased to make full use of avail-able engine power.

SPORT mode is activated using the rotaryswitch on the center console. Refer to "Selec-Terrain" in this section for further information.

Transmission Limp Home ModeTransmission function is monitored electroni-cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition isdetected that could result in transmission dam-age, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-vated. In this mode, the transmission remains infourth gear regardless of which forward gear isselected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL willcontinue to operate. The Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp HomeMode allows the vehicle to be driven to anauthorized dealer for service without damagingthe transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, thetransmission can be reset to regain all forwardgears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFFposition.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

229


6. Shift into the desired gear range. If theproblem is no longer detected, the transmissionwill return to normal operation.

NOTE:Even if the transmission can be reset, werecommend that you visit your authorizeddealer at your earliest possible conve-nience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-tic equipment to determine if the problemcould recur. If the transmission cannot bereset, authorized dealer service is required.

Electronic Range Select (ERS) OperationThe Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift controlallows the driver to limit the highest availablegear. For example, if you shift the transmissioninto 5 (fifth gear), the transmission will not shiftabove fifth gear, but will shift through the lowergears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS modeat any vehicle speed. When the shift lever is inthe DRIVE position, the transmission will oper-ate automatically, shifting between all availablegears.

Moving the shift lever to the ERS position(beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, displaythe current gear in the instrument cluster, andmaintain that gear as the top available gear.Once in ERS mode, moving the shift leverforward (-) or rearward (+) will change the topavailable gear.

To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift leverto the DRIVE position.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheelscould lose their grip and the vehicle couldskid, causing a collision or personal injury.

NOTE:To select the proper gear position for maxi-mum deceleration (engine braking), simplypress and hold the shift lever forward (-).The transmission will shift to the range fromwhich the vehicle can best be slowed down.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IFEQUIPPED

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leavethe vehicle unattended without having theparking brake fully applied. The parkingbrake should always be applied when thedriver is not in the vehicle, especially on anincline.

CAUTION!

Never drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicleon a hill with the clutch pedal partially en-gaged, as this will cause abnormal wear onthe clutch.

NOTE:During cold weather, you may experienceincreased effort in shifting until the trans-mission fluid warms up. This is normal.

230


ShiftingFully press the clutch pedal before shiftinggears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightlypress the accelerator pedal.

You should always use first gear when startingfrom a standing position.

Recommended Vehicle Shift SpeedsTo utilize your manual transmission efficientlyfor both fuel economy and performance, it

should be upshifted as listed in recommendedshift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speedslisted for acceleration. When heavily loaded orpulling a trailer these recommended up-shiftspeeds may not apply.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

1.4L, 2.0L and 2.4LEngines

Engine Speeds 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6

Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)

Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

DownshiftingMoving from a high gear down to a lower gear isrecommended to preserve brakes when drivingdown steep hills. In addition, downshifting at theright time provides better acceleration when youdesire to resume speed. Downshift progres-sively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeedingthe engine and clutch.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheelscould lose their grip, and the vehicle couldskid.

CAUTION!

• Skipping gears and downshifting into lowergears at higher vehicle speeds can dam-age the engine and clutch systems, Anyattempt to shift into lower gear with clutchpedal depressed may result damage to theclutch system. Shifting into lower gear andreleasing the clutch may result in enginedamage.

(Continued)

231



• When descending a hill, be very careful todownshift one gear at a time to preventoverspeeding the engine which can causeengine damage, and/or clutch damage, evenif the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer caseis in low range the vehicle speeds to causeengine and clutch damage are significantlylower.

(Continued)


• Failure to follow the maximum recom-mended downshifting speeds may causethe engine damage and/or damage theclutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

• Descending a hill in low range with clutchpedal depressed could result in clutchdamage

Maximum Recommended DownshiftSpeeds

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the maximum recom-mended downshifting speeds may cause theengine to overspeed and/or damage theclutch disc, even if the clutch pedal ispressed.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1

Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

232


CAUTION!

If you skip a gear while downshifting ordownshift at too high of a vehicle speed,these conditions may cause the engine tooverspeed if too low of a gear is selected andthe clutch pedal is released. Damage to theclutch and the transmission can result fromskipping a gear while downshifting or down-shifting at too high of a vehicle speed even ifthe clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., notreleased).

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVEOPERATION

1–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) —If EquippedThis feature provides on-demand four-wheeldrive (4WD). The system is automatic with nodriver inputs or additional driving skills required.Under normal driving conditions, the frontwheels provide most of the traction. If the frontwheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted

automatically to the rear wheels. The greaterthe front wheel traction loss, the greater thepower transfer to the rear wheels.

Additionally, on dry pavement under heavythrottle input (where one may have no wheelspin), torque will be sent to the rear in apre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launchand performance characteristics.

CAUTION!

All wheels must have the same size and typetires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.Unequal tire size may cause failure of thepower transfer unit.

2–Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) —If Equipped

1–Speed 4WD Switch

2–Speed 4WD Switch

233


The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in thenormal driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttonsprovide three selectable mode positions:

• 4WD LOW

• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)

• NEUTRAL

When additional traction is required, the 4WDLOW range position can be used to provide anadditional gear reduction which allows for in-creased torque to be delivered to both the frontand rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended forloose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in

4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads maycause increased tire wear and damage to drive-line components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, theengine speed is approximately three times thatof the normal driving mode at a given roadspeed. Take care not to overspeed the engineand do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehiclesdepends on tires of equal size, type, and cir-cumference on each wheel. Any difference willadversely affect shifting and cause damage tothe driveline components.

Because four-wheel drive provides improvedtraction, there is a tendency to exceed safeturning and stopping speeds. Do not go fasterthan road conditions permit.

Shift PositionsFor additional information on the appropriateuse of each 4WD system mode position, seethe information below:

NEUTRALThis range disengages the driveline from thepowertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind

another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing”in “Starting and Operating” for further informa-tion.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leavethe vehicle unattended with the power trans-fer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position withoutfirst fully engaging the parking brake. TheNEUTRAL (N) position disengages both thefront and rear drive shafts from the pow-ertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. Theparking brake should always be appliedwhen the driver is not in the vehicle.

4WD LOWThis range is for low speed four-wheel drive. Itprovides an additional gear reduction whichallows for increased torque to be delivered toboth the front and rear wheels while providingmaximum pulling power for loose, slippery roadsurfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Selec-Terrain Switch

234


NOTE:Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” forfurther information on the various positionsand their intended usages.

Shifting ProceduresShifting Into 4WD LOWWith the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position orthe engine running, shift the transmission intoNEUTRAL, and press the “4WD LOW” buttononce. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in theinstrument cluster will begin to flash and remainon solid when the shift is complete.

NOTE:If shift conditions/interlocks are not met amessage will flash from the Electronic Ve-hicle Information Center (EVIC) with instruc-tions on how to complete the requestedshift. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

Shifting Out Of 4WD LOWWith the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position orthe engine running, shift the transmission intoNEUTRAL, and press the “4WD LOW” buttononce. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in theinstrument cluster will flash and go out when theshift is complete.

NOTE:

• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met,a message will flash from the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) withinstructions on how to complete the re-quested shift. Refer to “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is pos-sible with the vehicle completely stopped;however, difficulty may occur due to themating clutch teeth not being properlyaligned. Several attempts may be re-quired for clutch teeth alignment and shiftcompletion to occur. The preferredmethod is with the vehicle rolling 0 to3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle ismoving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the4WD system will not allow the shift.

NEUTRAL Shift Procedure

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave thevehicle unattended with the power transfer unitin the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fullyengaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)position disengages both the front and reardrive shafts from the powertrain and will allowthe vehicle to move regardless of the transmis-sion position. The parking brake should alwaysbe applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

Selec-Terrain Switch

235


1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shiftthe transmission to PARK.

2. Turn OFF the ignition.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN po-sition, but do not start the engine.

4. Press and hold the brake pedal.

5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, pressand hold the recessed power transfer unit NEU-TRAL (N) button (located above the selectorswitch) for four seconds. The light behind theNEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shiftin progress. The light will stop blinking (stay onsolid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is com-plete.

7. After the shift is completed and the NEU-TRAL light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N)button.

8. Start the engine.

9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

10. Release the brake pedal for five secondsand ensure that there is no vehicle movement.

11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

12. Apply the parking brake.

13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn theengine OFF, and remove the key fob.

14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using asuitable tow bar.

15. Release the parking brake.

Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker)System – If EquippedThe Rear E-Locker System features a mechani-cal locking rear differential to provide bettertraction in the 4WD LOW position. The “REARLOCK” button is on the Selec-Terrain Knob.

Activating the Rear E-Locker

To activate the Rear E-Locker System, thefollowing conditions must be met:

1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.

2. The ignition switch in the ON position or theengine running.

3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH(24 km/h).

4. To engage Rear E-Locker, press the REARLOCK button once.

Neutral Switch

236


Deactivating the Rear E-Locker System

To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, thefollowing conditions must be met:

1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and theREAR LOCK indicator light on.

2. The ignition switch in the ON position or theengine running.

3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, press theREAR LOCK button once.

NOTE:

• It may also be necessary to drive slowlysteering back and forth to complete en-gagement and disengagement of the E-Locker.

• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indi-cator lights in the instrument cluster andon the REAR LOCK button will begin toflash. When the shift is complete theREAR LOCK indicator lights will remainon.

• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the in-dicator lights in the instrument clusterand on the REAR LOCK button will beginto flash. When the shift is complete theREAR LOCK indicator lights will remainoff.

• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker ispossible with the vehicle completelystopped; however, difficulty may occurdue to the mating clutch teeth not beingproperly aligned. Several attempts maybe required for clutch teeth alignment andshift completion to occur. The preferredmethod is for the vehicle to be rolling,below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while includingright and left steering maneuvers to allowfor the clutch teeth to align.

• The Rear E-Locker System must be dis-engaged prior to taking the vehicle out of4WD LOW range. If 4WD LOW shiftconditions/interlocks are not met, a mes-sage will flash from the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) with instruc-tions on how to complete the requestedshift.

SELEC-TERRAIN™

DescriptionSelec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of thevehicle control systems, along with driver input,to provide the best performance for all terrains.

Rotate the Selec-Terrain™ knob to select thedesired mode.

Selec-Terrain™ offers the following modes:

• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheeldrive operation can be used on and off road.Balances traction with seamless steering feel

Selec-Terrain™ Switch

237


to provide improved handling and accelera-tion over two-wheel drive vehicles.

• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability ininclement weather. Use on and off road onloose traction surfaces such as snow. Whenin SNOW mode (depending on certain oper-ating conditions), the transmission may usesecond gear (rather than first gear) duringlaunches, to minimize wheel slippage.

• Sport – This mode alters the transmission’sautomatic shift schedule for sportier driving.Upshift speeds are increased to make fulluse of available engine power.

NOTE:SPORT mode is not available when 4WDLOW is selected.

• Sand/Mud – Off road calibration for use onlow traction surfaces such as mud, sand, orwet grass. Driveline is maximized for traction.Some binding may be felt on less forgivingsurfaces. The electronic brake controls areset to limit traction control management ofthrottle and wheel spin.

• Rock – Off-road calibration only available in4WD LOW range. Traction based tuning withimproved steer-ability for use on high tractionoff-road surfaces. Use for low speed ob-stacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.

NOTE:Rock mode is only available on the vehiclesequipped with the Off-Road package.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) Display MessagesWhen the appropriate conditions exist, a mes-sage will appear in the EVIC display. Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPSUtility vehicles have higher ground clearanceand a narrower track to make them capable ofperforming in a wide variety of off-road applica-tions. Specific design characteristics give thema higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance isa better view of the road, allowing you toanticipate problems. They are not designed forcornering at the same speeds as conventionaltwo-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform sat-isfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all pos-sible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

When To Use 4WD LOW RangeWhen off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW foradditional traction and control on slippery ordifficult terrain, ascending or descending steephills, and to increase low-speed pulling power(Refer to “All Wheel Drive and Four-WheelDrive Operation” in this section for further de-tails). This range should be limited to extremesituations such as deep snow, mud, or sandwhere additional low speed pulling power is

238


needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WDLOW range.

Driving Through WaterAlthough your vehicle is capable of drivingthrough water, there are a number of precau-tions that must be considered before enteringthe water:

CAUTION!

When driving through water, do not exceed5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depthbefore entering as a precaution, and checkall fluids afterward. Driving through watermay cause damage that may not be coveredby the new vehicle limited warranty.

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution toensure safety and prevent damage to yourvehicle. If you must drive through water, try todetermine the depth and the bottom condition(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.Proceed with caution and maintain a steady

controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) indeep water to minimize wave effects.

Flowing Water

If the water is swift flowing and rising (as instorm run-off) avoid crossing until the waterlevel recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. Ifyou must cross flowing-water, avoid depths inexcess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing watercan erode the streambed causing your vehicleto sink into deeper water. Determine exitpoint(s) that are downstream of your entry pointto allow for drifting.

Standing Water

Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20inches (51 cm), and reduce speed appropriatelyto minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 20inches (51 cm) of water is less than 5 mph(8 km/h).

Maintenance

After driving through deep water, inspect yourvehicle fluids and lubricants (engine, transmis-sion, Power Transfer Unit and Rear Drive Mod-ule) to assure they have not been contami-nated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants

(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent com-ponent damage.

Driving In Snow, Mud And SandIn heavy snow, when pulling a load, or foradditional control at slower speeds, shift thetransmission to a low gear and shift the 4WDsystem to the appropriate terrain mode, using4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-WheelDrive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” forfurther information. Do not shift to a lower gearthan necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels andtraction will be lost.

Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roadsbecause engine braking may cause skiddingand loss of control.

Hill ClimbingNOTE:Before attempting to climb a hill, determinethe conditions at the crest and/or on theother side.Before climbing a steep hill, shift the trans-mission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD

239


System to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WDLOW for very steep hills.

If you stall or begin to lose headway whileclimbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to cometo a stop and immediately apply the brakes.Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE. Backslowly down the hill allowing the compressionbraking of the engine to help regulate yourspeed. If the brakes are required to controlvehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoidlocking or skidding the tires.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway orcannot make it to the top of a steep hill orgrade, never attempt to turn around. To do somay result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.Always back straight down a hill in RE-VERSE gear carefully. Never back down ahill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.

Remember, never drive diagonally across ahill - drive straight up or down.

If the wheels start to slip as you approach thecrest of a hill, ease off the accelerator andmaintain headway by turning the front wheelsslowly left and right. This may provide a fresh“bite” into the surface and will usually providetraction to complete the climb.

Traction DownhillShift the transmission into a low gear and the4WD System to 4WD LOW range or Select HillDescent Control if equipped (refer to "ElectronicBrake Control System" in this section for furtherinformation. Let the vehicle go slowly down thehill with all four wheels turning against enginecompression drag. This will permit you to con-trol the vehicle speed and direction.

When descending mountains or hills, repeatedbraking can cause brake fade with loss ofbraking control. Avoid repeated heavy brakingby downshifting the transmission wheneverpossible.

After Driving Off-RoadOff-road operation puts more stress on yourvehicle than does most on-road driving. Aftergoing off-road, it is always a good idea to checkfor damage. That way you can get any problemstaken care of right away and have your vehicleready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of yourvehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,suspension, and exhaust system for dam-age.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris andclean as required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, par-ticularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-nents, steering, and suspension. Retightenthem, if required, and torque to the valuesspecified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush.These things could be a fire hazard. Theymight hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, wa-ter, or similar dirty conditions, have the radia-

240


tor, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings,and axle yokes inspected and cleaned assoon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakesmay cause excessive wear or unpredictablebraking. You might not have full brakingpower when you need it to prevent a colli-sion. If you have been operating your vehiclein dirty conditions, get your brakes checkedand cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driv-ing in mud, slush or similar conditions, checkthe wheels for impacted material. Impactedmaterial can cause a wheel imbalance andfreeing the wheels of it will correct thesituation.

POWER STEERINGThe electric power steering system will give yougood vehicle response and increased ease ofmaneuverability in tight spaces. The system will

vary its assist to provide light efforts whileparking and good feel while driving. If the elec-tric steering system experiences a fault thatreduces assist or prevents the vehicle fromproviding assist, you will still have the ability tosteer the vehicle manually.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assistcould pose a safety risk to yourself andothers. Service should be obtained as soonas possible.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEER-ING” message and a steeringwheel icon are displayed on theEVIC screen, it indicates that thevehicle needs to be taken to thedealer for service. It is likely the

vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Re-fer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for fur-ther information.

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance isno longer operational, it is still possible tosteer the vehicle. Under these conditionsthere will be a substantial increase insteering effort, especially at low speedsand during parking maneuvers.


ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE(EPB)Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park-ing Brake System (EPB) that offers simpleoperation, and some additional features thatmake the parking brake more convenient anduseful.

The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-vent the vehicle from rolling while parked. Be-fore leaving the vehicle, make sure that theparking brake is applied. Also, be certain toleave the transmission in PARK.

241


You can engage the parking brake in two ways;

• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.

• Automatically, by enabling the Auto ParkBrake feature in the customer programmablefeatures section of the Uconnect® settings.

The parking brake switch is located in the centerconsole.

To apply the parking brake manually, pull up onthe switch momentarily. You may hear a slightwhirring sound from the back of the vehiclewhile the parking brake engages. Once theparking brake is fully engaged, The BRAKE

warning lamp in the instrument cluster and anindicator on the switch will illuminate. If your footis on the brake pedal while you apply theparking brake, you may notice a small amountof brake pedal movement. The park brake canbe applied even when the ignition switch if OFF,however, it can only be released when theignition switch is ON.

If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, theparking brake will automatically engage when-ever the transmission is placed into PARK, orwith a manual transmission, when the ignitionswitch is turned OFF. Once the park brake isengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the in-strument cluster and the LED indicator on theswitch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brakepedal, you may notice a small amount of brakepedal movement while the parking brake isengaging.

The parking brake will release automaticallywhen the Ignition switch is ON, the transmissionis in Drive or Reverse, the driver seat belt isbuckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.

To release the park brake manually, the ignitionswitch must be ON. Put your foot on the brake

pedal, then push the parking brake switch downmomentarily. You may hear a slight whirringsound from the back of the car while the parkingbrake disengages. You may also notice a smallamount of movement in the brake pedal. Oncethe parking brake is fully disengaged, TheBRAKE warning lamp in the instrument clusterand the LED indicator on the switch will extin-guish.

NOTE:When parking on a hill, it is important to turnthe front wheels toward the curb on a down-hill grade and away from the curb on anuphill grade. Apply the parking brake beforeplacing the shift lever in PARK, otherwisethe load on the transmission locking mecha-nism may make it difficult to move the shiftlever out of PARK. The parking brake shouldalways be applied whenever the driver is notin the vehicle.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

242


WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substi-tute for the parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when parked toguard against vehicle movement and pos-sible injury or damage.

• When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the ignition and lock yourvehicle.


(Continued)


• Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren, and do not leave a vehicle equippedwith Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC orON/RUN mode. A child could operatepower windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-gaged before driving; failure to do so canlead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake whenleaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury. Also be certain toleave the transmission in PARK. Failure todo so may allow the vehicle to roll andcause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remainson with the parking brake released, a brakesystem malfunction is indicated. Have thebrake system serviced by an authorizeddealer immediately.

If exceptional circumstances should make itnecessary to engage the parking brake whilethe vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pres-sure on the electric park brake switch for as longas engagement is desired. The Brake warninglamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime willsound. The rear stop lamps will also be illumi-nated automatically while the vehicle remains inmotion.

To disengage the parking brake while the ve-hicle is in motion, release the switch. If thevehicle is brought to a complete stop using theparking brake, when the vehicle reaches ap-proximately 3 mph, the parking brake will re-main engaged.

243


WARNING!

Driving the vehicle with the parking brakeengaged, or repeated use of the parkingbrake to slow the vehicle may cause seriousdamage to the brake system.

In the unlikely event of a malfunction of theElectric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB faultlamp will illuminate. This may be accompaniedby the Brake warning lamp flashing. In thisevent, urgent service of the electric park brakesystem is required. Do not rely on the parkingbrake to hold the vehicle stationary.

Auto Park BrakeThe electric park brake can be programmed tobe applied automatically whenever the vehicleis at a standstill and the automatic transmissionis placed in PARK, or with a manual transmis-sion, whenever the ignition switch is turned off.Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled bycustomer selection through the customer pro-grammable features section of the Uconnect®Settings.

Any single auto park brake application can bebypassed by pressing the EPB switch to therelease position while the transmission isplaced in PARK.

SafeholdSafehold is a safety feature of the Electric ParkBrake System that will engage the park brakeautomatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. Ifthe automatic transmission is not in Park, theseat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is open,the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is noattempt to depress the brake pedal or accelera-tor pedal, the park brake will automaticallyengage to prevent the vehicle from rolling.

Safehold can be temporarily bypassed bypressing the Electric Park Brake Switch whilethe driver door is open. Once manually by-passed, Safehold will be enabled again oncethe vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or theignition is turned to the OFF position and backto ON again.

Brake Service ModeWe recommend having your brakes serviced byyour authorized dealer. You should only makerepairs for which you have the knowledge andthe right equipment. You should only enterBrake Service Mode during brake service.

When servicing your rear brakes, it may benecessary for you or your technician push therear piston into the rear caliper bore. With theelectric park brake system, this can only bedone after retracting the Electric Park Brakeactuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can bedone easily by entering the Brake Service Modethrough the ’Uconnect® Settings in your ve-hicle. This menu based system will guide youthrough the steps necessary to retract the EPBactuator in order to perform rear brake service.

Service Mode has requirements that must bemet in order to be activated:

• The vehicle must be at a standstill.

• The park brake must be unapplied.

• The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.

244


While in service mode, the Electric Park Brakefault lamp will flash continuously while the igni-tion switch is ON.

When brake service work is complete, the fol-lowing steps must be followed to reset the parkbrake system to normal operation:

• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.

• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.

• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Do only that servicework for which you have the knowledge andthe right equipment. If you have any doubtabout your ability to perform a service job,take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMThe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto aid the driver in maintaining vehicle controlunder adverse braking conditions. The systemoperates with a separate computer to modulatehydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-upand help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the samesize and type, and tires must be properly in-flated, to produce accurate signals for the com-puter.

WARNING!

Significant over or under-inflation of tires ormixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehiclecan lead to loss of braking effectiveness.

The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test atabout 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your footlightly on the brake while this test is occurring,you may feel slight pedal movement. The move-ment can be more apparent on ice and snow.This is normal.

The ABS pump motor runs during the self-testat 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop.The pump motor makes a low humming noiseduring operation, which is normal.

WARNING!

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will di-minish their effectiveness and may lead toa collision. Pumping makes the stoppingdistance longer. Just press firmly on yourbrake pedal when you need to slow downor stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural lawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, norcan it increase braking or steering effi-ciency beyond that afforded by the condi-tion of the vehicle brakes and tires or thetraction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, includ-ing those resulting from excessive speedin turns, following another vehicle tooclosely, or hydroplaning.

(Continued)

245



• The capabilities of an ABS equipped ve-hicle must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner, which could jeopar-dize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

CAUTION!

The ABS is subject to possible detrimentaleffects of electronic interference caused byimproperly installed aftermarket radios ortelephones.

NOTE:During severe braking conditions, a pulsingsensation may occur and a clicking noisewill be heard. This is normal, indicating thatthe ABS is functioning.

• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your footon the pedal. This could overheat the brakesand result in unpredictable braking action,longer stopping distances, or brake damage.

• When descending mountains or hills, re-peated braking can cause brake fade withloss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavybraking by downshifting the transmission orlocking out overdrive whenever possible.

• Engines may idle at higher speeds duringwarm-up, which could cause rear wheels tospin and result in loss of vehicle control. Beespecially careful while driving on slipperyroads, in close-quarter maneuvering, park-ing, or stopping.

• Do not drive too fast for road conditions,especially when roads are wet or slushy. Awedge of water can build up between the tiretread and the road. This hydroplaning actioncan cause loss of traction, braking ability, andcontrol.

• After going through deep water or a carwash, brakes may become wet, resulting indecreased performance and unpredictablebraking action. Dry the brakes by gentle,intermittent pedal action while driving at veryslow speeds.

ELECTRONIC BRAKECONTROL SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with an advancedelectronic brake control system commonly re-ferred to as ESC. This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction ControlSystem (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), HillStart Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation(ERM), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC).These systems work together to enhance bothvehicle stability and control in various drivingconditions.

Your vehicle is also equipped with Trailer SwayControl (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), RainBrake Support (RBS), and Dynamic SteeringTorque (DST). Further, all vehicles equippedwith a two-speed power transfer unit have HillDescent Control (HDC) and some vehicles mayalso be equipped with Selec Speed Control(SSC).

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)This system aids the driver in maintaining ve-hicle control under adverse braking conditions.The system controls hydraulic brake pressure

246


to prevent wheel lock-up to help avoid skiddingon slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to“Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Op-erating” for further information.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road condi-tions. ABS cannot prevent collisions, includ-ing those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, orhydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited ina reckless or dangerous manner, whichcould jeopardize the user’s safety or thesafety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)This system monitors the amount of wheel spinof each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin isdetected, brake pressure is applied to the slip-ping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to

provide enhanced acceleration and stability. Afeature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Dif-ferential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slipdifferential and controls the wheel spin across adriven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle isspinning faster than the other, the system willapply the brake of the spinning wheel. This willallow more engine torque to be applied to thewheel that is not spinning. This feature remainsactive even if TCS and ESC are in the “PartialOff” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this sec-tion for further information.

Brake Assist System (BAS)The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’sbraking capability during emergency brakingmaneuvers. The system detects an emergencybraking situation by sensing the rate andamount of brake application and then appliesoptimum pressure to the brakes. This can helpreduce braking distances. The BAS comple-ments the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Apply-ing the brakes very quickly results in the bestBAS assistance. To receive the benefit of thesystem, you must apply continuous brakingpressure during the stopping sequence, (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedalpressure unless braking is no longer desired.Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS isdeactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-vent the natural laws of physics from actingon the vehicle, nor can it increase the trac-tion afforded by prevailing road conditions.BAS cannot prevent collisions, includingthose resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, orhydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited ina reckless or dangerous manner, whichcould jeopardize the user’s safety or thesafety of others.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)This system anticipates the potential for wheellift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheelinput and the speed of the vehicle. When ERMdetermines that the rate of change of the steer-

247


ing wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are suffi-cient to potentially cause wheel lift, it thenapplies the appropriate brake and may alsoreduce engine power to lessen the chance thatwheel lift will occur. ERM will only interveneduring very severe or evasive driving maneu-vers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheellift occurring during severe or evasive drivingmaneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due toother factors, such as road conditions, leavingthe roadway, or striking objects or other ve-hicles.

NOTE:ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “FullOff” mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) for a complete explanation of theavailable ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, roadconditions, and driving conditions, influencethe chance that wheel lift or rollover mayoccur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can-

(Continued)


not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, espe-cially those that involve leaving the roadwayor striking objects or other vehicles. Thecapabilities of an ERM-equipped vehiclemust never be exploited in a reckless ordangerous manner, which could jeopardizethe user’s safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)The HSA system is designed to help the driveraccelerate the vehicle from a complete stopwhile on an incline. If the driver releases thebrake while stopped on an incline, HSA willcontinue to hold the brake pressure for a shortperiod. If the driver does not apply the throttlebefore this time expires, the system will releasebrake pressure and the vehicle will roll down thehill as normal. The system will release brakepressure in proportion to amount of throttleapplied.

The following conditions must be met in orderfor HSA to activate:

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• The vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate)grade or greater hill.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphilldirection (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in for-ward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in RE-VERSE gear).

• For vehicles equipped with an automatictransmission, the HSA will work in REVERSEgear and all forward gears. The system willnot activate if the transmission is in PARK.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill StartAssist (HSA) will not activate and slight roll-ing may occur, such as on minor hills or witha loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer.HSA is not a substitute for active drivinginvolvement. It is always the driver’s respon-sibility to be attentive to distance to other

(Continued)248



vehicles, people, and objects, and most im-portantly brake operation to ensure safeoperation of the vehicle under all road con-ditions. Your complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving to maintain safe con-trol of your vehicle. Failure to follow thesewarnings can result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

Towing With HSAHSA will provide assistance during accelerationon an incline while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with yourtrailer, the trailer brakes may be activatedand deactivated with the brake switch. If so,there may not be enough brake pressure tohold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hillwhen the brake pedal is released. In order toavoid rolling down an incline while resumingacceleration, manually activate the trailerbrake or apply more vehicle brake pressureprior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when leaving yourvehicle. Also, be certain to leave the trans-mission in PARK.

• Failure to follow these warnings can resultin a collision or serious personal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSAIf you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can bedone using the Uconnect® Access Settings.Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — IfEquipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road drivingwhile in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains ve-hicle speed while descending hills during vari-ous driving situations. HDC controls vehiclespeed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not acti-vate)

Hill Descent Control

249


2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready butactivation conditions are not met, or driver isactively overriding with brake or throttle applica-tion)

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively con-trolling vehicle speed)

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch,but the following conditions must also be met toenable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• Vehicle speed is below 5mph

• Parking brake is released

• Driver door is closed

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automati-cally if driven down a grade of sufficient magni-tude (greater than approximately 8%). The setspeed for HDC is selectable by the driver, andcan be adjusted by using the gear shift lever.The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled butwill not activate.

• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)

NOTE:During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is usedfor HDC target speed selection but will notaffect the gear chosen by the transmission.During HDC the transmission will shift ap-propriately for the driver-selected set speedand corresponding driving conditions.

Driver Override:

The driver may override HDC activation withthrottle or brake application at anytime.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available ifany of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttleor brake application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remainsbelow 40 mph.

• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficientmagnitude (less than approximately 8%), ison level ground, or is on an uphill grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

250


Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any ofthe following conditions occur:

• The driver presses the HDC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD LowRange.

• The parking brake is applied.

• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph forgreater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph(HDC exits immediately)

Feedback to the driver:

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and theHDC switch has an LED which offer feedback tothe driver about the state HDC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-nate and remain on solid when HDC isenabled or activated. This is the normaloperating condition for HDC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash forseveral seconds then extinguish when thedriver presses the HDC switch but enableconditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash forseveral seconds then extinguish when HDCdeactivates due to excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashwhen HDC deactivates due to overheatedbrakes. The flashing will stop and HDC willactivate again once the brakes have cooledsufficiently.

The Hill Descent Switch is located within theSelec-Terrain knob in the upper right position.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver incontrolling vehicle speed when descendinghills. The driver must remain attentive to thedriving conditions and is responsible formaintaining a safe vehicle speed.

Selec Speed Control (SSC) — IfEquipped

SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD LowRange only. SSC maintains vehicle speed byactively controlling engine torque and brakes.

SSC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not acti-vate)

Selec Speed Control Switch

251


2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready butactivation conditions are not met, or driver isactively overriding with brake or throttle applica-tion)

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively con-trolling vehicle speed)

Enabling SSCSSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, butthe following conditions must also be met toenable SSC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph

• Parking brake is released

• Driver door is closed

• Driver is not applying throttle

Activating SSCOnce SSC is enabled it will activate automati-cally once the following conditions are met:

• Driver releases throttle

• Driver releases brake

• Transmission is in any selection other than P

• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph

The set speed for SSC is selectable by thedriver, and can be adjusted by using the gearshift lever. Additionally, the SSC set speed isautomatically reduced when climbing a gradeand the level of set speed reduction depends onthe magnitude of grade. The following summa-rizes the SSC set speeds:

4WD Low Range Set Speeds

• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th= 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)

• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)

• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active

NOTE:These SSC default set speeds are depen-dent on hill grade. That is the steeper thegrade of the hill the vehicle travels on thelower the values of the set speed will be forall listed gears, with the minimal value being.6 mph (1 km/h).

NOTE:

• During SSC the ERS +/- shifter input isused for SSC target speed selection butwill not affect the gear chosen by thetransmission. During SSC the transmis-sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and correspondingdriving conditions.

• SSC performance is influenced by theTerrain Select mode. This difference maybe notable to the driver and may be per-ceived as a varying level ofaggressiveness.

Driver Override:

The driver may override SSC activation withthrottle or brake application at any time.

252


Deactivating SSC

SSC will be deactivated but remain available ifany of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttleor brake application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remainsbelow 40 mph.

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

Disabling SSC

SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of thefollowing conditions occur:

• The driver presses the SSC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD LowRange.

• The parking brake is applied.

• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph forgreater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph(HDC exits immediately).

Feedback To The Driver:

The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and theSSC switch has an LED which offer feedback tothe driver about the state SSC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-nate and remain on solid when SSC is en-abled or activated. This is the normal oper-ating condition for SSC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash forseveral seconds then extinguish when thedriver presses the SSC switch but enableconditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash forseveral seconds then extinguish when SSCdeactivates due to excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flashthen extinguish when SSC deactivates dueto overheated brakes.

WARNING!

SSC is only intended to assist the driver incontrolling vehicle speed when driving in offroad conditions. The driver must remain atten-tive to the driving conditions and is responsiblefor maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)This system enhances directional control andstability of the vehicle under various drivingconditions. ESC corrects for oversteering orundersteering of the vehicle by applying thebrake of the appropriate wheel to assist incounteracting the oversteer or understeer con-dition. Engine power may also be reduced tohelp the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determinethe vehicle path intended by the driver andcompares it to the actual path of the vehicle.When the actual path does not match theintended path, ESC applies the brake of theappropriate wheel to assist in counteracting theoversteer or understeer condition.

253


• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning morethan appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning lessthan appropriate for the steering wheelposition.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” located in the instrument cluster will startto flash as soon as the tires lose traction and theESC system becomes active. The “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” alsoflashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins toflash during acceleration, ease up on the accel-erator and apply as little throttle as possible. Besure to adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can-not prevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road condi-tions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, includ-

(Continued)


ing those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, orhydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent col-lisions resulting from loss of vehicle controldue to inappropriate driver input for the con-ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillfuldriver can prevent collisions. The capabilitiesof an ESC equipped vehicle must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerous mannerwhich could jeopardize the user’s safety orthe safety of others.

ESC Operating ModesDepending upon model and mode of operation,the ESC system has up to three operatingmodes: “ESC On” “Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”

ESC On – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles AndFour-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WDHigh Range

This is the normal operating mode for ESCwhen operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It isalso the normal mode for operating a four-wheel

drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH range. TheESC system will be in “ESC On” mode when-ever the vehicle is started or the power transferunit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOWrange. This mode should be used for mostdriving situations. ESC should only be turned to“Partial Off” or “Full Off” for specific reasons asnoted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to “Full Off” foradditional information.

Partial Off – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles AndFour-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WDHigh Range

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving indeep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raisesthe threshold for TCS and ESC activation,which allows for more wheel spin than whatESC normally allows.

The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switchbank above the climate control. To enter the“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESCOff” button and the "ESC Off" indicator light willilluminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarilypress the "ESC OFF" button and the "ESC Off"indicator light will turn off. This will restore thenormal “ESC On” mode of operation.

254


NOTE:To improve the vehicle’s traction when driv-ing with snow chains, or when starting off indeep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desir-able to switch to the “Partial Off” mode bymomentarily pressing the “ESC Off” button.Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”mode is overcome, turn ESC back on bymomentarily pressing the “ESC Off” button.This may be done while the vehicle is inmotion.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slipfeature described in the TCS section), hasbeen disabled and the “ESC Off IndicatorLight” will be illuminated. When in “PartialOff” mode, the engine power reductionfeature of TCS is disabled, and the en-hanced vehicle stability offered by the ESCsystem is reduced.

(Continued)


• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabledwhen the ESC system is in the "Partial Off"mode.

Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WDHigh And 4WD Low Range

The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highwayand off-road use when ESC stability featurescould inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trailconditions.

The “ESC Off” button is located in the lowerswitch bank above the climate control panel. Toenter “Full Off” mode, press and hold the “ESCOff” button for five seconds while the vehicle isstopped with the engine running. After fiveseconds, the "ESC Off" indicator light will illumi-nate and an “ESC Off” message will appear inthe odometer.

In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off(except for the “limited slip” feature described inthe TCS section) until the vehicle reaches aspeed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At speeds over40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically

switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above.When the vehicle speed returns to less than35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system will return to“Full Off” mode. The "ESC OFF" indicator lightis always illuminated when ESC is off. To turnESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”button. This will restore the normal “ESC On”mode of operation.

NOTE:

• “Full Off” is the only operating mode forESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC systemwill be in this mode whenever the vehicleis started in 4WD LOW range or the powertransfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOWrange.

• The “ESC OFF” message will display anda chime will sound when the shift lever ismoved from any position to the PARKposition and then moved out of the PARKposition. This will occur even if the mes-sage was cleared previously.

255


WARNING!

With the ESC switched off, the enhancedvehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-able. In an emergency evasive maneuver,the ESC system will not engage to assist inmaintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is onlyintended for off-highway or off-road use.

ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/MalfunctionIndicator Light” in the instrumentcluster will come on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the ONposition. It should go out with theengine running. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comeson continuously with the engine running, amalfunction has been detected in the ESCsystem. If this light remains on after severalignition cycles, and the vehicle has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers) at speeds greaterthan 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized

dealer as soon as possible to have the problemdiagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” (located in the instrument cluster) startsto flash as soon as the tires lose traction and theESC system becomes active. The “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” alsoflashes when TCS is active. If the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins toflash during acceleration, ease up on the accel-erator and apply as little throttle as possible. Besure to adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica-tor Light” and the “ESC OFF IndicatorLight” come on momentarily each timethe ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, theESC system will be ON even if it wasturned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing orclicking sounds when it is active. This isnormal; the sounds will stop when ESC

becomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" in-dicates the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) is partially off or fulloff.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle torecognize an excessively swaying trailer andwill take the appropriate actions to attempt tostop the sway. The system may reduce enginepower and apply the brake of the appropriatewheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.TSC will become active automatically once anexcessively swaying trailer is recognized.

Always use caution when towing a trailer andfollow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-tions. When TSC is functioning, the “ESCActivation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash,the engine power may be reduced and you mayfeel the brakes being applied to individualwheels to attempt to stop the trailer from sway-ing. TSC is only active in the default “ESC On”

256


mode. TSC can be disabled by pressing the“ESC Off” switch and entering “ESC Partial Off”mode. It is not active in the “ESC Partial Off” or“ESC Full Off” modes. Refer to the ESC portionof this section for an explanation of the differentESC operating modes.

NOTE:TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.

WARNING!

If the TSC activates while driving, slow thevehicle down, stop at the nearest safe loca-tion, and adjust the trailer load to eliminatetrailer sway.

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time re-quired to reach full braking during emergencybraking situations. It anticipates when an emer-gency braking situation may occur by monitor-ing how fast the throttle is released by the driver.When the throttle is released very quickly,Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount ofbrake pressure. This brake pressure will not be

noticed by the driver. The brake system usesthis brake pressure to allow a fast brake re-sponse if the driver applies the brakes.

Rain Brake Support (RBS)Rain Brake Support may improve braking per-formance in wet conditions. It will periodicallyapply a small amount of brake pressure toremove any water buildup on the front brakerotors. It is triggered by the windshield wipersetting and only functions when they are in use.When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is nonotification to the driver and no driver interac-tion is required.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of theESC and EPS modules that provide a torque atthe steering wheel for certain driving conditionsin which the ESC module is detecting vehicleinstability. The torque that the steering wheelreceives is only meant to help the driver realizeoptimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notificationthe driver receives that the feature is active isthe torque applied to the steering wheel.

NOTE:The DST feature is only meant to help thedriver realize the correct course of actionthrough small torques on the steeringwheel, which means the effectiveness of theDST feature is highly dependent on the driv-ers sensitivity and overall reaction to theapplied torque. It is very important to realizethat this feature will not steer the vehicle,meaning the driver is still responsible forsteering the vehicle.

TIRES — GENERALINFORMATION

Tire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is essential to thesafe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.Three primary areas are affected by impropertire pressure:

257


Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerousand can cause collisions.

• Under-inflation increases tire flexing andcan result in over-heating and tire failure.

• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability tocushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that resultin tire failure.

• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires canaffect vehicle handling and can fail sud-denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steeringproblems. You could lose control of yourvehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to therecommended cold tire inflation pressure.

EconomyImproper inflation pressures can cause unevenwear patterns to develop across the tire tread.These abnormal wear patterns will reduce treadlife resulting in a need for earlier tire replace-ment. Under-inflation also increases tire rollingresistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortableride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and un-comfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle andcan produce a feeling of sluggish response orover responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to sidemay cause erratic and unpredictablesteering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side maycause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of thedriver’s side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a goodquality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do notmake a visual judgement when determiningproper inflation. Tires may look properly in-flated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visibledamage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt from en-tering the valve stem, which could damagethe valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard arealways “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tireinflation pressure is defined as the tire pressureafter the vehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)after a three hour period. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed the maximum infla-tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

258


Check tire pressures more often if subject to awide range of outdoor temperatures, as tirepressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.Keep this in mind when checking tire pressureinside a garage, especially in the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) thenthe cold tire inflation pressure should be in-creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside tem-perature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reducethis normal pressure build up or your tire pres-sure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High SpeedOperationThe manufacturer advocates driving at safespeeds and within posted speed limits. Wherespeed limits or conditions are such that thevehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-

tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-hicle loading may be required for high-speedvehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tiredealer or original equipment vehicle dealer forrecommended safe operating speeds, loadingand cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them to fail.You could have a serious collision. Do notdrive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca-pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph(120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types oftires on your vehicle will cause your vehicleto handle poorly. The instability could cause

(Continued)


a collision. Always use radial ply tires in setsof four. Never combine them with other typesof tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be re-paired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section ofyour tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than ¼" (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairsand additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires thathave experienced a loss of pressure should bereplaced immediately with another Run Flat tireof identical size and service description (LoadIndex and Speed Code).

259


Tire TypesAll Season Tires — If EquippedAll Season tires provide traction for all seasons(spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levelsmay vary between different all season tires. Allseason tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Useall season tires only in sets of four; failure to doso may adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — IfEquippedSummer tires provide traction in both wet anddry conditions, and are not intended to bedriven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle isequipped with summer tires, be aware thesetires are not designed for winter or cold drivingconditions. For more information, contact a au-thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain theall season designation or mountain/snowflakesymbol on the tire sidewall.

Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure todo so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.

Snow TiresSome areas of the country require the use ofsnow tires during the winter. Snow tires can beidentified by a mountain/snowflake symbol onthe tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent insize and type to the original equipment tires.Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to doso may adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratingsthan what was originally equipped with yourvehicle and should not be operated at sustainedspeeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speedsabove 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to originalequipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec-ommended safe operating speeds, loading andcold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance onice, skid and traction capability on wet or drysurfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studdedtires; therefore, local laws should be checkedbefore using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If EquippedRun Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapidloss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss ofinflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. ARun Flat mode occurs when the tire inflationpressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once aRun Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it haslimited driving capabilities and needs to bereplaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is notrepairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loadedat full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is inthe run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section formore information.

Spare Tires — If EquippedNOTE:For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT insteadof a spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT”in “What To Do In Emergencies” for furtherinformation.

260


CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through an auto-matic car wash with a compact, full size orlimited-use temporary spare installed. Dam-age to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped TireAnd Wheel — If EquippedYour vehicle may be equipped with a spare tireand wheel equivalent in look and function to theoriginal equipment tire and wheel found on thefront or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tiremay be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.If your vehicle has this option, refer to anauthorized tire dealer for the recommended tirerotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If EquippedThe compact spare is for temporary emergencyuse only. You can identify if your vehicle isequipped with a compact spare by looking atthe spare tire description on the Tire and Load-ing Information Placard located on the driver’sside door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the

letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the originalequipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op-portunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mounta conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,since the wheel is designed specifically for thecompact spare tire. Do not install more than onecompact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle atany given time.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emer-gency use only. With these spares, do notdrive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo-rary use spares have limited tread life. Whenthe tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,the temporary use spare tire needs to bereplaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,

(Continued)


which apply to your spare. Failure to do socould result in spare tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If EquippedThe full size spare is for temporary emergencyuse only. This tire may look like the originallyequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the temporary use fullsize spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it isnot the same as your original equipment tire,replace (or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-nity.

Limited-Use Spare — If EquippedThe limited-use spare tire is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire is identified by alabel located on the limited-use spare wheel.This label contains the driving limitations for thisspare. This tire may look like the originalequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-

261


use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since itis not the same as your original equipment tire,replace (or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-nity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited-use spare tireaffects vehicle handling. With this tire, do notdrive more than the speed listed on thelimit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to thecold tire inflation pressures listed on yourTire and Loading Information Placard lo-cated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rearedge of the driver’s side door. Replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire at the firstopportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.Failure to do so could result in loss of vehiclecontrol.

Tire SpinningWhen stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-tions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 secondscontinuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause tire damage or failure. Atire could explode and injure someone. Donot spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 secondscontinuously when you are stuck, and do notlet anyone near a spinning wheel, no matterwhat the speed.

Tread Wear IndicatorsTread wear indicators are in the original equip-ment tires to help you in determining when yourtires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom ofthe tread grooves. They will appear as bandswhen the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm).When the tread is worn to the tread wearindicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to“Replacement Tires” in this section for furtherinformation.

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

262


Life Of TireThe service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance driven

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating ofV or higher, and summer tires typically havea reduced tread life. Rotation of these tiresper the vehicle maintenance schedule ishighly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning canresult in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting in seri-ous injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible. Protecttires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement TiresThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balanceof many characteristics. They should be in-spected regularly for wear and correct cold tireinflation pressure. The manufacturer stronglyrecommends that you use tires equivalent to theoriginals in size, quality and performance whenreplacement is needed. Refer to the paragraphon “Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tireand Loading Information placard or the VehicleCertification Label for the size designation ofyour tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol foryour tire will be found on the original equipmenttire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart examplefound in the Tire Safety Information section ofthis manual for more information relating to theLoad Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tiresor two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tirecan seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. Ifyou ever replace a wheel, make sure that thewheel’s specifications match those of the origi-nal wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorizedtire dealer or original equipment dealer with anyquestions you may have on tire specifications or

capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-ment tires may adversely affect the safety,handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating otherthan that specified for your vehicle. Somecombinations of unapproved tires andwheels may change suspension dimen-sions and performance characteristics, re-sulting in changes to steering, handling,and braking of your vehicle. This cancause unpredictable handling and stressto steering and suspension components.You could lose control and have a collisionresulting in serious injury or death. Useonly the tire and wheel sizes with loadratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

263



• Never use a tire with a smaller load indexor capacity, other than what was originallyequipped on your vehicle. Using a tire witha smaller load index could result in tireoverloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability can re-sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve-hicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-ent size may result in false speedometer andodometer readings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTIONDEVICES)Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommenda-tions to guard against damage.

• Use on Front Tires Only

• Due to limited clearance, the following trac-tion devices are recommended:

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models

• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire sizes are not chainable.

• The use of 7mm snow chains is permittedwith the use of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x7.0 ET41 wheels.

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Mod-els without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit

• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire sizes are not chainable.


Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Mod-els with a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit

• The use of 7mm snow chains is permittedwith 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tires.

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models


CAUTION!

• Use on Front Tires Only• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Mod-

els may result if tire chains or tractiondevices are used with original equipmentsize tires.

• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Mod-els without a Two-Speed Power TakeoffUnit may result if tire chains or tractiondevices are used with original equipmentsize tires.

(Continued)

264



• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trail-hawk Models may result if tire chains ortraction devices are used with originalequipment size tires.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,Snow) between front and rear axles cancause unpredictable handling. You couldlose control and have a collision.

TIRE ROTATIONRECOMMENDATIONSThe tires on the front and rear of your vehicleoperate at different loads and perform differentsteering, handling, and braking functions. Forthese reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotationof tires. The benefits of rotation are especiallyworthwhile with aggressive tread designs such

as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation willincrease tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,and wet traction levels, and contribute to asmooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals. The reasons forany rapid or unusual wear should be correctedprior to rotation being performed.

The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rota-tion method is the “rearward cross” shown in thefollowing diagram. This rotation pattern doesnot apply to some directional tires that must notbe reversed.

The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tirerotation method is the “forward-cross” shown inthe following diagram.

CAUTION!

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehiclesdepends on tires of equal size, type andcircumference on each wheel. Any differencein tire size can cause damage to the powertransfer unit. Tire rotation schedule shouldbe followed to balance tire wear.

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation

265


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORSYSTEM (TPMS)The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) willwarn the driver of a low tire pressure based onthe vehicle recommended cold placard pres-sure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature byabout 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). Thismeans that when the outside temperature de-creases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tirepressure should always be set based on coldinflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tirepressure after the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours, or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The coldtire inflation pressure must not exceed the maxi-mum inflation pressure molded into the tiresidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”in “Starting and Operating” for information onhow to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. Thetire pressure will also increase as the vehicle isdriven. This is normal and there should be noadjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tirepressure if the tire pressure falls below thelow-pressure warning limit for any reason, in-cluding low temperature effects and naturalpressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of lowtire pressure as long as the condition exists,and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at orabove the recommended cold placard pressure.Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pres-sure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, youmust increase the tire pressure to the recom-mended cold placard pressure in order for the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turnoff. The system will automatically update andthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willturn off once the system receives the updatedtire pressures. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive thisinformation.

For example, your vehicle may have a recom-mended cold (parked for more than three hours)placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If theambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and themeasured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), atemperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decreasethe tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turnON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressureto rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), butthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willstill be on. In this situation, the “Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only afterthe tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom-mended cold placard pressure value.

266


CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for theoriginal equipment tires and wheels. TPMSpressures and warning have been estab-lished for the tire size equipped on yourvehicle. Undesirable system operation orsensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of thesame size, type, and/or style. Aftermarketwheels can cause sensor damage. Usingaftermarket tire sealants may cause theTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)sensor to become inoperable. After usingan aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-mended that you take your vehicle to yourlocal dealership to have your sensor func-tion checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt fromentering the valve stem, which could dam-age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-vide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tirepressure gauge while adjusting your tirepressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure using an accurate tire pressuregauge, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination ofthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight.”

• Seasonal temperature changes will affecttire pressure, and the TPMS will monitorthe actual tire pressure in the tire.

Base SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres-sure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel aspart of the valve stem, transmit tire pressurereadings to the receiver module.

NOTE:It is particularly important for you to checkthe tire pressure in all of the tires on yourvehicle monthly and to maintain the properpressure.

The TPMS consists of the following compo-nents:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low PressureWarnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will illuminate in the instrumentcluster, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”message will display in the instrument

267


cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message will bedisplayed and a chime will sound when tirepressure is low in one or more of the four activeroad tires. Should this occur, you should stop assoon as possible, check the inflation pressure ofeach tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire tothe vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-sure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX"message. Once the system receives the up-dated tire pressures, the system will automati-cally update and the “Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may needto be driven for up to 20 minutes above15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS toreceive this information.

Service TPMS WarningWhen a system fault is detected, the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.The system fault will also sound a chime. If theignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,providing the system fault still exists. The “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn offwhen the fault condition no longer exists. Asystem fault can occur due to any of the follow-ing:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same radio fre-quencies as the TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket windowtinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMSsensors.

Vehicles With Full-Size Spare

1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tireassembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensorthat can be monitored by the TPMS.

2. If you install the matching full-size spare inplace of a road tire that has a pressure belowthe low-pressure warning limit, a chime willsound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOWTIRE PRESSURE” and "Inflate to XX" mes-sages will turn on upon the next ignition keycycle.

3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutesabove 15.5 mph (25 km/h) will turn off the“TPMS Telltale Light,” as long as no tire pres-sure is below the low-pressure warning limit inany of the four active road tires.

Vehicles With Compact Spare

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tirepressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, theTPMS will not monitor the pressure in thecompact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in placeof a road tire that has a pressure below thelow-pressure warning limit, a chime will soundand the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIREPRESSURE” and "Inflate to XX" messages willturn on upon the next ignition key cycle.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutesabove 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS TelltaleLight” will flash on and off for 75 seconds andthen remain on solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, achime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light”will flash on and off for 75 seconds and thenremain on solid.

268


5. Once you repair or replace the original roadtire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of thecompact spare, the TPMS will update automati-cally and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off,as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four activeroad tires. The vehicle may need to be driven forup to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) inorder for the TPMS to receive this information.

Premium System – If EquippedThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pres-sure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel aspart of the valve stem, transmit tire pressurereadings to the receiver module.

NOTE:It is particularly important for you to checkthe tire pressure in all of the tires on yourvehicle monthly and to maintain the properpressure.

The TPMS consists of the following compo-nents:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemmessages, which display in the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

The matching full size spare wheel and tireassembly (if equipped) has a tire pressuremonitoring sensor. The full size spare can beused in place of any of the four road tires. Aspare with a pressure below the low-pressurelimit will not cause the “Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light” to illuminate or the chime tosound. However, it will cause a “SPARE LOWPRESSURE” message to display in the EVIC.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low PressureWarnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will illuminate in the instrumentcluster and a chime will sound whentire pressure is low in one or more of

the four active road tires. In addition, the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) willdisplay a "Tire Low" message for a minimum offive seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and a

graphic showing the pressure values of eachtire with the low tire pressure values in a differ-ent color.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon aspossible and inflate the tires with low pressure(those in a different color in the EVIC graphic) tothe vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-sure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX"message. Once the system receives the up-dated tire pressures, the system will automati-cally update, the pressure values in the graphicdisplay in the EVIC will return to their originalcolor, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low PressureWarning

269


Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive thisinformation.

SERVICE TPMS WarningWhen a system fault is detected, the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.The system fault will also sound a chime. Inaddition, the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPMSYSTEM" message for a minimum of five sec-onds and then display dashes (- -) in place ofthe pressure value to indicate which sensor isnot being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence willrepeat, providing the system fault still exists. Ifthe system fault no longer exists, the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longerflash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes-sage will no longer display, and a pressurevalue will display in place of the dashes. Asystem fault can occur due to any of the follow-ing:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same radio fre-quencies as the TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket windowtinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMSsensors.

Vehicles With Full-Size Spare

1. The matching full size spare wheel and tireassembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensorthat can be monitored by the TPMS.

2. If you install the full size spare in place of aroad tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound andthe “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn on upon thenext ignition key cycle. In addition, the EVIC willdisplay a Low Pressure message, an "Inflate toXX" message and a graphic showing the lowtire pressure value in a different color.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutesabove 15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS TelltaleLight” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressureis below the low-pressure warning limit in any ofthe four active road tires.

4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing thetire pressure value in the same color as theother pressure values in place of the differentcolor low tire pressure value. The EVIC will alsodisplay a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” messageto remind you to service the flat tire.

Vehicles With Compact Spare

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tirepressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, theTPMS will not monitor the pressure in thecompact spare tire.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning

270


2. If you install the compact spare tire in placeof a road tire that has a pressure below thelow-pressure warning limit, upon the next igni-tion key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” willremain on and a chime will sound. In addition,the graphic in the EVIC will still display adifferent color pressure value and an "Inflate toXX" message.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutesabove 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS TelltaleLight” will flash on and off for 75 seconds andthen remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC willdisplay a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” messagefor five seconds and then display dashes (- -) inplace of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, achime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” willflash on and off for 75 seconds and then remainon solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICETPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds andthen display dashes (- -) in place of the pressurevalue.

5. Once you repair or replace the original roadtire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of thecompact spare, the TPMS will update automati-cally. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” willturn off and the graphic in the EVIC will displaya new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), aslong as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four activeroad tires. The vehicle may need to be driven forup to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) inorder for the TPMS to receive this information.

TPMS DeactivationThe TPMS can be deactivated if replacing allfour wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) withwheel and tire assemblies that do not haveTPMS Sensors, such as when installing winterwheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle Todeactivate the TPMS, first, replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tiresnot equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMSwill chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash onand off for 75 seconds and then remain on andthe Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-

TEM” message and then display dashes (--) inplace of the pressure values. Beginning with thenext ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will nolonger chime or display the “SERVICE TPMSYSTEM” message in the EVIC but dashes (--)will remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheeland tire assemblies (road tires) with tiresequipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive thevehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the "TPMTelltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 sec-onds and then turn off, and the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) will displaythe “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message. TheEVIC will also display pressure values in placeof the dashes. On the next ignition switch cyclethe "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will nolonger be displayed as long as no system faultexists.

271


FUEL REQUIREMENTS —GASOLINE ENGINESThis engine is designed to meet all emissionsregulations and provide excellent fuel economyand performance when using high quality un-leaded gasoline with a minimum research oc-tane rating (RON) of 91. The use of premiumgasoline will not provide any benefit over regu-lar gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is notharmful to your engine. However, continued heavyspark knock at high speeds can cause damage,and immediate service is required. Poor qualitygasoline can cause problems such as hard start-ing, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiencethese symptoms, try another brand of gasolinebefore considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide haveissued and endorsed consistent gasoline speci-fications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC)which define fuel properties necessary to de-liver enhanced emissions, performance, anddurability for your vehicle. The manufacturerrecommends the use of gasoline that meets theWWFC specifications if they are available.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such ashard starting, stalling and stumble. If you experi-ence these problems, try another brand of gaso-line before considering service for the vehicle.

2.4L EngineThese engines are designed to meet all emis-sions regulations and provide excellent fueleconomy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline with a minimum Re-search Octane Number (RON) of 91. The use ofpremium gasoline will not provide any benefitover regular gasoline in these engines.

3.2L EngineThe 3.2L engine is designed to meet all emissionsregulations and provide satisfactory fuel economyand performance when using high quality un-leaded gasoline having a minimum octane ratingof 91 Research Octane Number (RON). Themanufacturer recommends the use of 93 Re-search Octane Number (RON) for optimum perfor-mance. The use of premium gasoline will notprovide any benefit over regular gasoline in theseengines. Light spark knock at low engine speeds isnot harmful to your engine. However, continuedheavy spark knock at high speeds can cause

damage and immediate service is required. Poorquality gasoline can cause problems such as hardstarting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiencethese symptoms, try another brand of gasolinebefore considering service for the vehicle.

Methanol(Methyl) is used in a variety of concentrationswhen blended with unleaded gasoline. You mayfind fuels containing 3% or more methanolalong with other alcohols called cosolvents.Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline are not the responsibility of the manu-facturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate madefrom Methanol, it does not have the negativeeffects of Methanol.

CAUTION!Do not use gasolines containing Methanol. Useof these blends may result in starting anddrivability problems and may damage criticalfuel system components.

272


EthanolThe manufacturer recommends that your ve-hicle be operated on fuel containing no morethan 10% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from areputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex-ceeding this 10% limit and/or of receiving fuelwith abnormal properties. It should also benoted that an increase in fuel consumptionshould be expected when using ethanol-blended fuels, due to the lower energy contentof ethanol. Problems that result from usingmethanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol blends arenot the responsibility of the manufacturer. WhileMTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, itdoes not have the negative effects of Methanol.

CAUTION!

Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than10% may result in engine malfunction, start-ing and operating difficulties, and materialsdegradation. These adverse effects couldresult in permanent damage to your vehicle.

Clean Air GasolineMany gasolines are now being blended to con-tribute to cleaner air, especially in those areaswhere air pollution levels are high. These newblends provide a cleaner burning fuel and someare referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”

The manufacturer supports these efforts towardcleaner air. You can help by using these blendsas they become available.

MMT In GasolineMMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tri-carbonyl) is a manganese containing metallicadditive that is blended into some gasoline toincrease octane. Gasoline blended with MMTprovides no performance advantage beyondgasoline of the same octane number withoutMMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reducesspark plug life and reduces emission systemperformance in some vehicles. The manufac-turer recommends that gasoline without MMTbe used in your vehicle. The MMT content ofgasoline may not be indicated on the gasolinepump; therefore, you should ask your gasolineretailer whether or not his/her gasoline containsMMT.

Materials Added To FuelAll gasoline sold in the United States is requiredto contain effective detergent additives. Use ofadditional detergents or other additives is notneeded under normal conditions and theywould result in additional cost. Therefore, youshould not have to add anything to the fuel.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS —DIESEL ENGINEUse good quality diesel fuel from a reputablesupplier. For most year-round service, No. 2diesel fuel, meeting ASTM specification D-975Grade S15, will provide good performance. Ifthe vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below20° F or -7° C), or is required to operate atcolder-than-normal conditions for prolonged pe-riods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilutethe No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel.This will provide better protection from fuelgelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. Thisvehicle must only use premium diesel fuelthat meets the requirements of EN 590. Bio-diesel blends that meet EN 590 may also beused.

273


CAUTION!

The manufacturer requires that you must fuelthis vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur HighwayDiesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) andprohibits the use of Low Sulfur HighwayDiesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) toavoid damage to the emissions control sys-tem.

WARNING!

Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel-blending agent. They can be unstable undercertain conditions and hazardous or explo-sive when mixed with diesel fuel.

Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the accu-mulated water from the fuel/water separatorusing the provided fuel/water separator drain. Ifyou buy good quality fuel and follow the coldweather advice above, fuel conditioners shouldnot be required in your vehicle. If available in

your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuelmay offer improved cold-starting and warm-upperformance.

ADDING FUELThe gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door,on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gascap is lost or damaged, be sure the replace-ment cap has been designed for use with thisvehicle.

NOTE:When removing the fuel filler cap, lay thecap tether in the hook, located on the fuelfiller door reinforcement.

1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (lo-cated on the driver’s side door trim).

2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuelfiller cap.

NOTE:

• In certain cold conditions, ice may pre-vent the fuel door from opening. If thisoccurs, lightly push on the fuel door tobreak the ice buildup and re-release thefuel door using the inside release button.Do not pry on the door.

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,the fuel tank is full.

• Tighten the gas cap about one quarterturn until you hear one click. This is anindication that the cap is properlytightened.

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

274


• If the gas cap is not tightened properly,the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas capis tightened every time the vehicle isrefueled.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emissioncontrol system could result from using animproper fuel cap (gas cap). A poorly fittingcap could let impurities into the fuel sys-tem. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket capcan cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vaporsescaping from the system.

• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MILto turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not“top off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in ornear the vehicle when the gas cap isremoved or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running.This is in violation of most state and fed-eral fire regulations and may cause theMIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped intoa portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Alwaysplace gas containers on the ground whilefilling.

Emergency Fuel Filler Door ReleaseIf you are unable to open the fuel filler door, usethe fuel filler door emergency release.

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove access door located on interior trimpanel for release cable with the tip of your key.

3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up torelease the fuel filler door.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines thatthe fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,or damaged, a gASCAP” message will displayin the odometer or a “CHECK GASCAP” mes-sage will be displayed in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further re-view. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuelfiller cap is properly tightened. Refer to “On-board Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for further information.

TRAILER TOWINGIn this section you will find safety tips andinformation on limits to the type of towing youcan reasonably do with your vehicle. Beforetowing a trailer, carefully review this informationto tow your load as efficiently and safely aspossible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warrantycoverage, follow the requirements and recom-mendations in this manual concerning vehiclesused for trailer towing.

275


Common Towing DefinitionsThe following trailer towing related definitionswill assist you in understanding the followinginformation:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)The GVWR is the total allowable weight of yourvehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargoand tongue weight. The total load must belimited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificationLabel” in “Starting and Operating” for furtherinformation.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus theweight of all cargo, consumables and equip-ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or onthe trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"condition. The recommended way to measureGTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on avehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailermust be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)The GCWR is the total permissible weight ofyour vehicle and trailer when weighed in com-bination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the frontand rear axles. Distribute the load over the frontand rear axles evenly. Make sure that you donot exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!It is important that you do not exceed themaximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerousdriving condition can result if either rating isexceeded. You could lose control of the vehicleand have an accident.

Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitchball by the trailer. In most cases it should not bemore than 5% of the trailer load. You must con-sider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

WARNING!An improperly adjusted hitch system may re-duce handling, stability and braking perfor-mance and could result in an accident. Consult

(Continued)


with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or areputable trailer/caravan dealer for additionalinformation.

Frontal AreaThe frontal area is the maximum height multi-plied by the maximum width of the front of atrailer.

Breakaway Cable AttachmentEuropean braking regulations for braked trailersup to 7,700 lbs (3 500 kg), require trailers to befitted with either a secondary coupling or break-away cable.

The recommended location for attaching thenormal trailer’s breakaway cable is in thestamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitchreceiver.

276


With Attachment Point

• For detachable tow bar pass the cablethrough the attachment point and clip it backonto itself or attach the clip directly to thedesignated point.

• For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directlyto the designated point. This alternative mustbe specifically permitted by the trailer manu-facturer since the clip may not be sufficientlystrong for use in the way.

Without Attachment Points

• For detachable ball tow bar, you must followthe recommended manufacturer or supplierprocedure.

• For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable aroundthe neck of the tow ball. If you fit the cablelike this, use a single loop only.

Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method

Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method

Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method

277


Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area Maximum GTW(Gross Trailer Wt.)

Maximum Tongue Wt.(See Note)

2.4L/Automatic 4x2 or 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

3.2L/Automatic 4x2 or 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

3.2L/Automatic with TrailerTow Package 4x2 or 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)

2.0L Diesel 4x2 or 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE:The trailer tongue weight must be consid-ered as part of the combined weight ofoccupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), andthe GVWR should never exceed the weightreferenced on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Informa-tion” in “Starting and Operating” for furtherinformation. Safety Information” in “Startingand Operating” for further information.

Trailer And Tongue WeightAlways load a trailer with 60% of the weight inthe front of the trailer. Loads balanced over thewheels, or heavier in the rear, can cause thetrailer to sway severely side-to-side which willcause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.Failure to load trailers heavier in front is thecause of many trailer accidents. Never exceedthe maximum tongue weight stamped on yourtrailer hitch.

278


Consider the following items when computingthe weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:

• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo orequipment put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE:Remember that everything put into or on thetrailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,additional factory-installed options, or au-thorized dealer-installed options, must beconsidered as part of the total load on yourvehicle. Refer to the tire loading informationplacard located on the drivers door pillar forthe maximum combined weight of occu-pants and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing RequirementsTo promote proper break-in of your new vehicledrivetrain components, the following guidelinesare recommended.

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle isdriven. The engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)that a trailer is towed, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps the engine andother parts of the vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Mainte-nance Schedule.” Refer to “MaintenanceSchedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWRor GCWR ratings.

WARNING!Improper towing can lead to a collision. Fol-low these guidelines to make your trailertowing as safe as possible:• Make certain that the load is secured in the

trailer and will not shift during travel. Whentrailering cargo that is not fully secured, dy-namic load shifts can occur that may bedifficult for the driver to control. You couldlose control of your vehicle and have acollision.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do notoverload your vehicle or trailer. Overloadingcan cause a loss of control, poor perfor-mance or damage to brakes, axle, engine,transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used betweenyour vehicle and trailer. Always connect thechains to the hook retainers of the vehiclehitch. Cross the chains under the trailertongue and allow enough slack for turningcorners.

(Continued)

279



• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked ona grade. When parking, apply the parkingbrake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicletransmission in PARK. For four-wheel drivevehicles, make sure the transfer case is notin NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" thetrailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.• Total weight must be distributed between

the tow vehicle and the trailer such thatthe following four ratings are not ex-ceeded:

1. GVWR2. GTW3. GAWR4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitchutilized.

Towing Requirements – Tires

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essentialto the safe and satisfactory operation of yourvehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-

tion” in “Starting and Operating” for propertire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflationpressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tiredamage before towing a trailer. Refer to“Tires – General Information” in “Starting andOperating” for proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – Gen-eral Information” in “Starting and Operating”for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-placing tires with a higher load carrying ca-pacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWRand GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys-tem or vacuum system of your vehicle withthat of the trailer. This could cause inad-equate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically-actuated trailer brake con-troller is required when towing a trailer withelectronically-actuated brakes. When towinga trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge-

actuated brake system, an electronic brakecontroller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailersover 1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required fortrailers in excess of 1,654 lbs (750 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi-cle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overloadyour brake system and cause it to fail. Youmight not have brakes when you needthem and could have an accident.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stoppingdistance. When towing, you should allow foradditional space between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front of you. Failure to do socould result in an accident.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights AndWiringWhenever you pull a trailer, regardless of thetrailer size, stop lights and turn signals on thetrailer are required for motoring safety.

280


The Trailer Tow Package includes a 13 pinwiring harness. Use a factory approved trailerharness and connector.

NOTE:Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicleswiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete tothe vehicle but you must mate the harness to atrailer connector.

PinNum-ber

Function WireColor

1 Left Turn Signal Black/White

2 Rear Fog Light White

3 a Ground/Common Returnfor Contacts (Pins) 1 and

2 and 4 to 8

Brown

4 Right Turn Signal Black/Green

5 Right Rear Position, SideMarker Lights, and RearRegistration Plate Illumi-

nation Device. b

Green/Red

6 Stop Lights Black/Red

7 Left Rear Position, SideMarker Lights, and RearRegistration Plate Illumi-

nation Device. b

Green/Black

PinNum-ber

Function WireColor

8 Reverse lights Blue/Red

9 Permanent Power Supply(+12V)

Red

10 Power Supply Controlledby Ignition Switch (+12V)

Yellow

11 a Return for Contact (Pin) 10 Yellow/Brown

12 Reserve for Future Allo-cation

–

13 a Return for Contact (Pin) 9 Red/Brown

NOTE:The allocation pin 12 has been changedfrom “Coding for coupled Trailer” to “Re-serve for Future Allocation.”a The three return circuits shall not be con-nected electrically in the trailer.

13–Pin Connector

281


PinNum-ber

Function WireColor

b The rear position registration plate illumi-nation device shall be connected such thatno light of the device has a common con-nection with both pins 5 and 7.

Towing TipsBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning,stopping, and backing the trailer in an arealocated away from heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission - If EquippedThe DRIVE range can be selected when towing.The transmission controls include a drive strat-egy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.However, if frequent shifting does occur while inDRIVE, use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)shift control to select a lower gear range.

NOTE:Using a lower gear range while operating thevehicle under heavy operating conditionswill improve performance and extend trans-mission life by reducing excessive shiftingand heat build up. This action will alsoprovide better engine braking.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experi-ence speed drops greater than 10 mph(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back tocruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with lightloads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling SystemTo reduce potential for engine and transmissionoverheating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift thetransmission into NEUTRAL and increase en-gine idle speed.

Highway DrivingReduce speed.

Air ConditioningTurn off temporarily.

Trailer Hitch Attaching PointsYour vehicle will require extra equipment to tow atrailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow hitchmust be attached to your vehicle using the pro-vided attaching points on the vehicle’s frame.Refer to the following chart to determine theaccurate attaching points. Other equipment, suchas trailer sway controls and braking equipment,trailer equalizing (leveling) equipment and lowprofile mirrors, may also be required or stronglyrecommended.

282


Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points AndOverhang Dimensions

Fixed, Detach andRetractable Hitch

A 1.69 ft. (515 mm)

B 1.92 ft. (585 mm)

C 1.99 ft. (608 mm)

D 2.24 ft. (683 mm)

E (Overhang) 3.30 ft. (1007 mm)

F 1.62 ft. (494 mm)

G 1.39 ft. (424 mm)

H 1.62 ft. (495 mm)

J 1.76 ft. (535 mm)

K 1.86 ft. (567 mm)

Trailer Hitch Attaching Points(Trailhawk Models)Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow atrailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow hitchmust be attached to your vehicle using the pro-vided attaching points on the vehicle’s frame.Refer to the following chart to determine theaccurate attaching points. Other equipment, suchas trailer sway controls and braking equipment,trailer equalizing (leveling) equipment and lowprofile mirrors, may also be required or stronglyrecommended.

Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points AndOverhang Dimensions

Fixed, Detach andRetractable Hitch

A 1.65 ft. (503 mm)

B 1.88 ft. (573 mm)

C 1.96 ft. (596 mm)

D 2.20 ft. (671 mm)

E (Overhang) 3.25 ft. (990 mm)

F 1.62 ft. (494 mm)

G 1.39 ft. (424 mm)

H 1.62 ft. (495 mm)

J 1.76 ft. (535 mm)

K 1.86 ft. (567 mm)

283


RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models

Towing Condition Wheel OFF theGround

Automatic Trans-mission

Manual Transmis-sion

1-Speed PowerTransfer Unit

2-Speed PowerTransfer Unit

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED• Transmission in

NEUTRAL• Ignition in ACC

NOT ALLOWED

See Instructions:• Transmission in

PARK• Power transfer unit

in NEUTRAL (N)• Tow in forward di-

rection

Dolly TowFront OK OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK OK OK OK

284


Recreational Towing — Front-WheelDrive (FWD) ModelsAutomatic Transmission - If Equipped

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to thedrivetrain will result.

Recreational towing of automatic transmissionvehicles is allowed ONLY if the front wheels areOFF the ground. This may be accomplishedusing a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a towdolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place thetransmission in PARK.

4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.


CAUTION!

Towing with the front wheels on the ground willcause severe transmission damage. Damagefrom improper towing is not covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Manual Transmission - If Equipped

Front-wheel drive vehicles with manual trans-missions may be flat towed (with all four wheelson the ground) at any legal highway speed, forany distance, if the manual transmission is inNEUTRAL and the ignition is in the ACC posi-tion. These vehicles may also be towed using atow dolly (with the front wheels OFF theground), or on a flatbed or vehicle trailer (with allfour wheels OFF the ground).

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the aboverequirements can cause severe engine and/ortransmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recreational Towing — 4WD Modelswith 1-Speed Power Transfer UnitRecreational towing is not allowed. Thesemodels do not have a NEUTRAL (N) positionin the power transfer unit.

NOTE:This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed orvehicle trailer provided all four wheels areOFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels onthe ground can cause severe transmissionand/or power transfer unit damage. Damagefrom improper towing is not covered underthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recreational Towing — 4WD Modelswith 2-Speed Power Transfer UnitThe power transfer unit must be shifted intoNEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be inPARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL(N) selection button is adjacent to the power

285


transfer unit selector switch. Shifts into and outof NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selec-tor switch in any mode position.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Inter-nal damage to the transmission or powertransfer unit will occur if a dolly is usedwhen recreational towing.

• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing thisvehicle backwards can cause severe dam-age to the power transfer unit.

• The transmission must be in PARK forrecreational towing.

• Before recreational towing, perform theprocedure outlined under “Shifting intoNEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the powertransfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Oth-erwise, internal damage will result.

• Failure to follow these procedures cancause severe transmission and/or powertransfer unit damage. Damage from im-

(Continued)


proper towing is not covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-ontow bar on your vehicle. The bumper facebar will be damaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if youleave the vehicle unattended with the powertransfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) positionwithout first fully engaging the parking brake.The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages boththe front and rear driveshafts from the pow-ertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,even if the transmission is in PARK. Theparking brake should always be appliedwhen the driver is not in the vehicle.

Use the following procedure to prepare yourvehicle for recreational towing.

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to becertain that the power transfer unit is fully inNEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing toprevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shiftthe transmission to PARK.

2. Turn the engine OFF.




286


6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, pressand hold the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button(located by the selector switch) for four sec-onds. The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) sym-bol will blink, indicating shift in progress. Thelight will stop blinking (stay on solid) when theshift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.

7. After the shift is completed and the NEU-TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL(N) button.


9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

10. Release the brake pedal for five secondsand ensure that there is no vehicle movement.

11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.


13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn theengine OFF, and remove the key fob.

14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using asuitable tow bar.


NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements thatmust be met prior to pressing the NEU-TRAL (N) button, and must continue to bemet until the shift has been completed. Ifany of these requirements are not metprior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) buttonor are no longer met during the shift, thenthe NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flashcontinuously until all requirements aremet or until the NEUTRAL (N) button isreleased.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place andfor the position indicator lights to be op-erable. If the ignition switch is not in theON/RUN position, the shift will not takeplace and no position indicator lights willbe on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indica-tor light indicates that shift requirementshave not been met.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)Use the following procedure to prepare yourvehicle for normal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leavingit connected to the tow vehicle.





Neutral Switch

287


6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, pressand hold the recessed power transfer unit NEU-TRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch)for one second.

7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turnsoff, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has beenreleased, the power transfer unit will shift to theposition indicated by the selector switch.

NOTE:When shifting the power transfer unit out ofNEUTRAL (N), turning the engine OFF maybe required to avoid gear clash.

9. Shift the transmission into PARK.

10. Release the brake pedal.

11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.




15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, releasethe brake pedal, and check that the vehicleoperates normally.

NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements thatmust be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL(N) button, and must continue to be metuntil the shift has been completed. If any ofthese requirements are not met prior topressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are nolonger met during the shift, the NEUTRAL(N) indicator light will flash continuouslyuntil all requirements are met or until theNEUTRAL (N) button is released.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place andfor the position indicator lights to be op-erable. If the ignition switch is not in theON/RUN position, the shift will not takeplace and no position indicator lights willbe on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indica-tor light indicates that shift requirementshave not been met.

Neutral Switch

288


6WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291• IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291• WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .292

• Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292• TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

• TIREFIT Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293• TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293• TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294• Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

• JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298• Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299• Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300• Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300• Road Tire Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

• JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304• Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304• Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305

• FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306• SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307

289


• TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308• Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models With Automatic Transmission . .309• Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models With Manual Transmission . . . .309• 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .309• 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .310

290


HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSThe Hazard Warning flasher switch is located inthe switch bank below the radio screen.

Press the switch to turn on the HazardWarning flasher. When the switch isactivated, all directional turn signals

will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic ofan emergency. Press the switch a second timeto turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and itshould not be used when the vehicle is inmotion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled andit is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will con-tinue to operate even though the ignition isplaced in the OFF position.

NOTE:With extended use the Hazard Warningflashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you canreduce the potential for overheating your engineby taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmis-sion in NEUTRAL, but do not increase en-gine idle speed.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-age your vehicle. If the temperature gaugereads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idlethe vehicle with the air conditioner turned offuntil the pointer drops back into the normalrange. If the pointer remains on the “H” andyou hear continuous chimes, turn the engineoff immediately and call for service.

NOTE:There are steps that you can take to slowdown an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn itoff. The A/C system adds heat to theengine cooling system and turning theA/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature controlto maximum heat, the mode control tofloor and the blower control to high. Thisallows the heater core to act as a supple-ment to the radiator and aids in removingheat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steam com-ing from under the hood, do not open thehood until the radiator has had time to cool.Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

291


WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUESPECIFICATIONSProper lug nut/bolt torque is very important toensure that the wheel is properly mounted tothe vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-moved and reinstalled on the vehicle the lugnuts/bolts should be torqued using a properlycalibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **LugNut/BoltSize

LugNut/Bolt

SocketSize

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x1.25 19 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil beforetightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior tomounting the tire and remove any corrosion orloose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern untileach nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolttorque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts areproperly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off thejack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until thevehicle has been lowered. Failure to followthis warning may result in personal injury.

TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPEDSmall punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire treadcan be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects(e.g., screws or nails) should not be removedfrom the tire. TIREFIT can be used in outsidetemperatures down to approximately -4°F(-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allow-ing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles(160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph(90 km/h).

Wheel Mounting Surface

Torque Patterns

292


TIREFIT StorageThe TIREFIT kit is stowed under the load floorbehind the rear seat.

1. Open the liftgate .

2. Lift the access cover using the load floorhandle.

TIREFIT Kit Components AndOperation

1. Sealant Bottle

2. Deflation Button

3. Pressure Gauge

4. Power Button

5. Mode Select Knob

6. Sealant Hose (Clear)

7. Air Pump Hose (Black)

8. Power Plug

Using The Mode Select Knob And HosesYour TIREFIT kit is equipped with the followingsymbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Selecting Air Mode

Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) tothis position for air pump operationonly. Use the Black Air Pump Hose(7) when selecting this mode.

Selecting Sealant Mode

Turn the Mode SelectKnob (5) to this positionto inject the TIREFITSealant and to inflatethe tire. Use the SealantHose (clear hose) (6)when selecting thismode.

Load Floor Handle

TIREFIT Components

293


Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power But-ton (4) once to turn On the TIREFITkit. Push and release the PowerButton (4) again to turn Off theTIREFIT kit.

Using The Deflation Button

Press the Deflation Button (2) toreduce the air pressure in the tire ifit becomes over-inflated.

TIREFIT Usage Precautions• Using the TIREFIT sealant may cause the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tobecome inoperable. It is recommended thatyou take your vehicle to an authorized dealerto have the sensor function checked.

• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) andSealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date(printed on the bottle label) to assure optimumoperation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tirewith TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle andHose Replacement.”

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)are a one tire application use. After each use,always replace these components immedi-ately at an authorized dealer.

• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form,clean water, and a damp cloth will removethe material from the vehicle or tire andwheel components. Once the sealant dries, itcan easily be peeled off and properlydiscarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure thevalve stem on the wheel is free of debrisbefore connecting the TIREFIT kit.

• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflatebicycle tires. The kit also comes with twoneedles, located in the Accessory StorageCompartment (on the bottom of the air pump)for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-able items. However, use only the Air PumpHose (7) and make sure the Mode SelectKnob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflatingsuch items to avoid injecting sealant intothem. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intendedto seal punctures less than ¼ in (6 mm)diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by thehoses.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side ofthe vehicle closest to traffic. Pull farenough off the road to avoid the danger ofbeing hit when using the TIREFIT kit.

• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicleunder the following circumstances:• If the puncture in the tire tread is

approximately 1/4” (6 mm) or larger.• If the tire has any sidewall damage.• If the tire has any damage from driv-

ing with extremely low tire pressure.• If the tire has any damage from driv-

ing on a flat tire.• If the wheel has any damage.• If you are unsure of the condition of

the tire or the wheel.• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or

heat source.

(Continued)

294



• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in acollision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow theTIREFIT kit in the place provided. Failureto follow these warnings can result in inju-ries that are serious or fatal to you, yourpassengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents ofTIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes,or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled,swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. Itcauses skin, eye, and respiratory irritation.Flush immediately with plenty of water ifthere is any contact with eyes or skin.Change clothing as soon as possible, ifthere is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)


• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. Incase of an allergic reaction or rash, consult aphysician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out ofreach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouthimmediately with plenty of water and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting!Consult a physician immediately.

Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on thevehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel withthe deflated tire) is in a position that is near to theground. This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and(7) to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFITkit flat on the ground. This will provide the bestpositioning of the kit when injecting the sealant intothe deflated tire and running the air pump. Movethe vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem inthis position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto trans-mission) or in Gear (manual transmission) andturn Off the ignition.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:

1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Seal-ant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then re-move the cap from the fitting at the end of thehose.

3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground nextto the deflated tire.

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem andthen screw the fitting at the end of the SealantHose (6) onto the valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the pluginto the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE:Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screwsor nails) from the tire.

295


(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into TheDeflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning ONthe TIREFIT kit.

NOTE:Manual transmission vehicles must have theparking brake engaged and the shift lever inNEUTRAL.

• After pressing the Power Button (4), thesealant (white fluid) will flow from the SealantBottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) andinto the tire.

NOTE:Sealant may leak out through the puncturein the tire.If the sealant (white fluid) does not flowwithin 0 – 10 seconds through the SealantHose (6):

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off theTIREFIT kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6)from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stemis free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose(6) to the valve stem. Check that the ModeSelect Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode positionand not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) toturn On the TIREFIT kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12Volt power outlet in your vehicle or anothervehicle, if available. Make sure the engine isrunning before turning ON the TIREFIT kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due toprevious use. Call for assistance.

NOTE:If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Modeand the pump is operating, air will dispensefrom the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not theSealant Hose (6).

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow throughthe Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant isno longer flowing through hose (typically takes30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows throughthe Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3)can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar). The Pres-sure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from ap-proximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tirepressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tireimmediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) isempty. Continue to operate the pump and inflatethe tire to the pressure indicated on the tirepressure label on the driver-side latch pillar(recommended pressure). Check the tire pres-sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not at-tempt to drive the vehicle further. Call forassistance.

NOTE:If the tire becomes over-inflated, press theDeflation Button to reduce the tire pressureto the recommended inflation pressure be-fore continuing.

296


If the tire inflates to the recommended pres-sure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressurewithin 15 minutes:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off theTIREFIT kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the topof the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker onthe instrument panel.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose(6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on thefitting at the end of the hose, and place theTIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location.Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”

CAUTION!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8)may get hot after use, so it should behandled carefully.

(Continued)


• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting atthe end of the Sealant Hose (6) can resultin sealant contacting your skin, clothing,and the vehicle’s interior. It can also resultin sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kitcomponents which may cause permanentdamage to the kit.

(D) Drive Vehicle:Immediately after injecting sealant and inflatingthe tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFITSealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph(90 km/h).

WARNING!

TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair.Have the tire inspected and repaired or re-placed after using TIREFIT. Do not exceed55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired orreplaced. Failure to follow this warning can

(Continued)


result in injuries that are serious or fatal toyou, your passengers, and others aroundyou.

(E) After Driving:Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “WheneverYou Stop to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.

1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the AirMode position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the pluginto the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color)and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) ontothe valve stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading thePressure Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt todrive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

297


If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) orhigher:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIRE-FIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicatedon the tire and loading information label on thedriver-side door opening.

NOTE:If the tire becomes over-inflated, press theDeflation Button to reduce the tire pressureto the recommended inflation pressure be-fore continuing.

2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valvestem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem andunplug from 12 Volt outlet.

3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storagearea in the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired orreplaced at the earliest opportunity at an autho-rized dealer or tire service center.

5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and SealantHose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer assoon as possible. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottleand Hose Replacement.”

NOTE:When having the tire serviced, advise theauthorized dealer or service center that thetire has been sealed using the TIREFIT ser-vice kit.

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release but-ton in the recessed area under the sealantbottle.

3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. TheSealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove thebottle and dispose of it accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIRE-FIT housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in thehousing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns withthe hose slot in the front of the housing. Pressthe bottle into the housing. An audible click willbe heard indicating the bottle is locked intoplace.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting atthe end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return thehose to its storage area (located on the bottomof the air pump).

7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage locationin the vehicle.

JACKING AND TIRECHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the sideof the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pullfar enough off the road to avoid the dangerof being hit when operating the jack orchanging the wheel.

(Continued)

298



• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is danger-ous. The vehicle could slip off the jack andfall on you. You could be crushed. Neverput any part of your body under a vehiclethat is on a jack. If you need to get under araised vehicle, take it to a service centerwhere it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while thevehicle is on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a toolfor changing tires only. The jack should notbe used to lift the vehicle for service pur-poses. The vehicle should be jacked on afirm level surface only. Avoid ice or slipperyareas.

Jack Location/Spare Tire StowageThe jack, wheel chocks and spare tire arestowed under the load floor behind the rearseat.

1. Open the liftgate .

2. Lift the access cover using the load floorhandle.

3. Remove the fastener securing the jack andspare tire.

4. Remove the chocks.

Load Floor Handle

Jack and Spare Tire Fastener

299


5. Remove the scissors jack and wheel boltwrench from the spare wheel as an assembly.Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen thewheel bolt wrench, and remove the wrench fromthe jack assembly.

NOTE:The jack handle attaches to the side of thejack with two attachment points. When thejack is partially expanded, the tension be-tween the two attachment points holds thejack handle in place.

6. Remove the spare tire.

WARNING!A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collisionor hard stop could endanger the occupants ofthe vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and thespare tire in the places provided. Have thedeflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-ately.

Preparations For Jacking1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as farfrom the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoidicy or slippery areas.

WARNING!Do not attempt to change a tire on the side ofthe vehicle close to moving traffic, pull farenough off the road to avoid being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic trans-mission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).

5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.

6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite ofthe jacking position. Forexample, if changingthe right front tire, chockthe left rear wheel.

NOTE:Passengers should not remain in the vehiclewhen the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings tohelp prevent personal injury or damage to yourvehicle:• Always park on a firm, level surface as far

from the edge of the roadway as possiblebefore raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

(Continued)

Jack and Tool Assembly

300



• Block the wheel diagonally opposite thewheel to be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set anautomatic transmission in PARK; a manualtransmission in REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with thevehicle on a jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when itis on a jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is ona jack. If you need to get under a raisedvehicle, take it to a service center where itcan be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicatedand for lifting this vehicle during a tirechange.

• If working on or near a roadway, be ex-tremely careful of motor traffic.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jackingon locations other than those indicated in theJacking Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel boltwrench.

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where thecenter cap covers the wheel bolts, use thewheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap offcarefully before raising the vehicle.

3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel boltwrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheelbolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn thewheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while thewheel is still on the ground.

4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that isclosest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screwclockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle withthe lift area of the sill flange, centering the jacksaddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.

Jack Warning Label

Assembled Jack

Jacking Locations

301


5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove theflat tire.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessarycan make the vehicle less stable. It could slipoff the jack and hurt someone near it. Raisethe vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

7. Remove the alignment pin from the jackassembly and thread the pin into the wheel hubto assist in mounting the spare tire.

8. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valvestem facing outward. The vehicle could bedamaged if the spare tire is mounted incor-rectly.

Rear Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Engagement Point

Front Jacking Location

Front Jacking Engagement Point

302


NOTE:

• For vehicles so equipped, do not attemptto install a center cap or wheel cover onthe compact spare.

• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Starting and Op-erating” for additional warnings, cau-tions, and information about the sparetire, its use, and operation.

9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded endof the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightlytighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off thejack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts untilthe vehicle has been lowered. Failure tofollow this warning may result in personalinjury.

10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turningthe jack handle counterclockwise.

11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Pushdown on the wrench while at the end of thehandle for increased leverage. Tighten thewheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheelbolt has been tightened twice. Refer to “TorqueSpecifications” in this section for the proper lugbolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight-ness, have them checked with a torque wrenchby your authorized dealer or at a service station.

12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks andflat tire.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in acollision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow thejack parts and the spare tire in the placesprovided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-paired or replaced immediately.

Mounting Spare Tire

Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock

303


Road Tire Installation1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with thethreaded end of the wheel bolt toward thewheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off thejack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until thevehicle has been lowered. Failure to followthis warning may result in personal injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turningthe jack handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push downon the wrench while at the end of the handle forincreased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in astar pattern until each wheel bolt has beentightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifica-tions” in this section for the proper lug bolttorque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,have them checked with a torque wrench byyour authorized dealer or service station.

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolttorque with a torque wrench to ensure that allwheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTINGPROCEDURESIf your vehicle has a discharged battery it can bejump-started using a set of jumper cables and abattery in another vehicle or by using a portablebattery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dan-gerous if done improperly so please follow theprocedures in this section carefully.

NOTE:When using a portable battery booster packfollow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions and precautions.

CAUTION!Do not use a portable battery booster pack orany other booster source with a system voltagegreater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,starter motor, alternator or electrical systemmay occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery isfrozen. It could rupture or explode and causepersonal injury.

Preparations For Jump-StartThe battery in your vehicle is located in the frontof the engine compartment, behind the leftheadlight assembly.

NOTE:The positive battery post is covered with aprotective cap. Lift up on the cap to gainaccess to the positive battery post.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fanwhenever the hood is raised. It can startanytime the ignition switch is ON. You canbe injured by moving fan blades.

(Continued)

304



• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,watch bands and bracelets that couldmake an inadvertent electrical contact.You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that canburn your skin or eyes and generate hy-drogen gas which is flammable and explo-sive. Keep open flames or sparks awayfrom the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatictransmission into PARK (manual transmissionin NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-sary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start thebattery, park the vehicle within the jumpercables reach, set the parking brake and makesure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other asthis could establish a ground connection andpersonal injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could resultin personal injury or property damage due tobattery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could re-sult in damage to the charging system of thebooster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumpercable to the positive (+) post of the dischargedvehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumpercable to the negative (-) post of the boosterbattery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposedmetal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine)away from the battery and the fuel injectionsystem.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could causethe battery to explode and could result inpersonal injury. Only use the specific groundpoint, do not use any other exposed metalparts.

305


5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has thebooster battery, let the engine idle a few min-utes, and then start the engine in the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

Once the engine is started, remove the jumpercables in the reverse sequence:

6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the engine ground of the vehicle with thedischarged battery.

7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of thejumper cable from the negative (-) post of thebooster battery.

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.

9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumpercable from the positive (+) post of the dis-charged vehicle.If frequent jump-starting is required to start yourvehicle you should have the battery and charg-ing system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle poweroutlets draw power from the vehicle’s bat-tery, even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, the vehi-cle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to de-grade battery life and/or prevent the enginefrom starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand orsnow, it can often be moved using a rockingmotion. Turn the steering wheel right and left toclear the area around the front wheels. Forvehicles with automatic transmission, press andhold the lock button on the shift lever. Then shiftback and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE(with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear andREVERSE (with manual transmission), whilegently pressing the accelerator.

NOTE:For vehicles with automatic transmission:shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE canonly be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmissionremains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 sec-onds, you must press the brake pedal toengage DRIVE or REVERSE.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-sure that will maintain the rocking motion with-out spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:Press the �ESC Off� switch (if necessary), toplace the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system in �Partial Off� mode, before rockingthe vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con-trol” in “Starting And Operating” for furtherinformation. Once the vehicle has beenfreed, press the �ESC Off� switch again torestore �ESC On� mode.

306


CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheelsmay lead to transmission overheating andfailure. Allow the engine to idle with thetransmission in NEUTRAL for at least oneminute after every five rocking-motioncycles. This will minimize overheating andreduce the risk of clutch or transmissionfailure during prolonged efforts to free astuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shiftingbetween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE,do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may re-sult.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheelstoo fast may lead to transmission overheat-ing and failure. It can also damage the tires.Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmissionshifting occurring).

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause damage, or even failure,of the axle and tires. A tire could explode andinjure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’swheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or forlonger than 30 seconds continuously withoutstopping when you are stuck and do not letanyone near a spinning wheel, no matterwhat the speed.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDEIf a malfunction occurs and the shift lever can-not be moved out of the PARK position, you canuse the following procedure to temporarilymove the shift lever:

1. Turn the engine OFF.


3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefullyseparate the shifter bezel and boot assemblyfrom the center console bezel.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on thebrake pedal.

5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tooldown into the shift lever override access hole (atthe right front corner of the shift lever assem-bly), and push and hold the override releaselever down.

6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL posi-tion.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEU-TRAL.

8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.

307


TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLEThis section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.

FWD MODELS 4x4 MODELS

TowingCondition

WheelsOFF theGround

AUTOMATIC TRANS-MISSION

MANUAL TRANSMIS-SION

1–SPEED POWERTRANSFER UNIT

2–SPEED POWER TRANS-FER UNIT

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWEDIF transmission and

transfer case is oper-able:

• Transmission in NEU-TRAL

NOT ALLOWED

See instructions under “Rec-reational Towing” in “Starting

And Operating”• Transmission in PARK• Power transfer unit in

NEUTRAL• Tow in forward direction

Wheel Liftor Dolly Tow

Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Front OK OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD

308


Proper towing or lifting equipment is required toprevent damage to your vehicle. Use only towbars and other equipment designed for thispurpose, following equipment manufacturer’sinstructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.Attach a tow bar or other towing device to mainstructural members of the vehicle, not to bum-pers or associated brackets. State and locallaws regarding vehicles under tow must beobserved.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignitionmust be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACCposition.

If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or the keyfob is unavailable , refer to “Shift Lever Over-ride” in this section for instructions on shiftingthe transmission out of PARK so that the vehiclecan be moved.

CAUTION!

Do not use sling type equipment when tow-ing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed

(Continued)


truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-sion components. Damage to your vehiclemay result from improper towing.

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) ModelsWith Automatic TransmissionThe manufacturer recommends towing your ve-hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground usinga flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehiclemust towed with the front wheels OFF theground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equip-ment with the front wheels raised).

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmissiondamage. Damage from improper towing isnot covered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) ModelsWith Manual TransmissionThe manufacturer recommends towing your ve-hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground usinga flatbed.

Manual transmission vehicles can also be flattowed (all four wheels on the ground) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmissiondamage. Damage from improper towing isnot covered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

4x4 Models With 1–Speed PowerTransfer UnitThe manufacturer requires towing with all fourwheels OFF the ground.

309


Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on aflatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised andthe opposite end on a towing dolly.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of itswheels on the ground. Damage to thedrivetrain will result.

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used.Internal damage to the transmission orpower transfer unit will occur if a front orrear wheel lift is used when towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission and/or power transfer unitdamage. Damage from improper towing isnot covered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

4x4 Models With 2–Speed PowerTransfer UnitThe manufacturer recommends towing with allfour wheels OFF the ground.

Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on aflatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised andthe opposite end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available and thePower Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a2–speed Power Transfer Unit may be towed(in the forward direction with ALL wheels on theground), under the following conditions:

• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEU-TRAL (N)

• The transmission must be in PARK.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting andOperating” for detailed instructions.

CAUTION!

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used.Internal damage to the transmission orpower transfer unit will occur if a front orrear wheel lift is used when towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission and/or power transfer unitdamage. Damage from improper towing isnot covered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

310


7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315• ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . .316

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316• EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . .316• REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317• DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317• MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

• Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318• Engine Oil — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320• Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320• Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320• Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321• Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321• A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322• Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322• Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323• Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

311


• Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324• Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326• Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329• Automatic Transmission - If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330• Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331• Sky Slider™ Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332• Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . .333

• FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336• Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337• Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

• REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343• BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

• Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344• Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344• Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345• Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345• Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345• Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346• REAR FOG LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346• License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

• FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347• FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

• Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348• Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350

312


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

313


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Battery3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter

314


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L DIESEL

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Battery3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

315


ONBOARD DIAGNOSTICSYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with a sophisticatedonboard diagnostic system called OBD II. Thissystem monitors the performance of the emis-sions, engine, and automatic transmission con-trol systems. When these systems are operat-ing properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well asengine emissions well within current govern-ment regulations.

If any of these systems require service, theOBD II system will turn on the “MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnos-tic codes and other information to assist yourservice technician in making repairs. Althoughyour vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your authorized dealer forservice as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on couldcause further damage to the emission con-trol system. It could also affect fueleconomy and driveability. The vehiclemust be serviced before any emissionstests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine isrunning, severe catalytic converter dam-age and power loss will soon occur. Imme-diate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines thatthe fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,or damaged, a “gASCAP” message will displayin the odometer or a “CHECK gASCAP” mes-sage will be displayed in the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"sound is heard. This is an indication that the gascap is properly tightened.

Press the odometer reset button to turn themessage off. If the problem persists, the mes-sage will appear the next time the vehicle isstarted. This might indicate a damaged cap. Ifthe problem is detected twice in a row, thesystem will turn on the MIL. Resolving theproblem will turn the MIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legal requirementto pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emis-sions control system. Failure to pass couldprevent vehicle registration.

Normally, the OBD II system will beready. The OBD II system may not beready if your vehicle was recentlyserviced, recently had a dead battery

or a battery replacement. If the OBD II systemshould be determined not ready for the I/M test,your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuatedtest, which you can use prior to going to the teststation. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II systemis ready, you must do the following:

316


1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:If you crank or start the engine, you will haveto start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch tothe ON position, you will see the MIL symbolcome on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of twothings will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds andthen return to being fully illuminated until youturn OFF the ignition or start the engine. Thismeans that your vehicle’s OBD II system isnot ready and you should not proceed to theI/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remainfully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-tion or start the engine. This means that yourvehicle’s OBD II system is ready and youcan proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you shouldsee your authorized dealer or repair facility. Ifyour vehicle was recently serviced or had a

battery failure or replacement, you may need todo nothing more than drive your vehicle as younormally would in order for your OBD II systemto update. A recheck with the above test routinemay then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD IIsystem is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminatedduring normal vehicle operation you shouldhave your vehicle serviced before going to theI/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehiclebecause the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTSUse of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highlyrecommended to ensure the designed perfor-mance. Damage or failures caused by the useof non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance andrepairs will not be covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICEYour authorized dealer has the qualified servicepersonnel, special tools, and equipment to per-form all service operations in an expert manner.Service Manuals are available which includedetailed service information for your vehicle.Refer to these Service Manuals before attempt-ing any procedure yourself.

NOTE:Intentional tampering with emissions con-trol systems may void your warranty andcould result in civil penalties being as-sessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on oraround a motor vehicle. Only do service workfor which you have the knowledge and theproper equipment. If you have any doubtabout your ability to perform a service job,take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

317


MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESThe pages that follow contain the requiredmaintenance services determined by the engi-neers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified inthe fixed “Maintenance Schedule”, there areother components which may require servicingor replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle orperform repairs and service when necessarycould result in more costly repairs, damageto other components or negatively impactvehicle performance. Immediately have po-tential malfunctions examined by an autho-rized dealer or qualified repair center.

(Continued)


• Your vehicle has been built with improvedfluids that protect the performance anddurability of your vehicle and also allowextended maintenance intervals. Do notuse chemical flushes in these componentsas the chemicals can damage your engine,transmission or air conditioning. Suchdamage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. If a flush is neededbecause of component malfunction, useonly the specified fluid for the flushingprocedure.

Engine OilChecking Oil LevelTo assure proper engine lubrication, the engineoil must be maintained at the correct level.Check the oil level at regular intervals, such asevery fuel stop. The best time to check theengine oil level is about five minutes after a fullywarmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on levelground will improve the accuracy of the oil levelreadings. Always maintain the oil level withinthe SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart(0.9 L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom ofthe SAFE zone will result in a reading at the topof the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase willcause aeration or loss of oil pressure. Thiscould damage your engine.

Change Engine OilRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.

Engine Oil Selection — Non ACEACategoriesFor best performance and maximum protectionunder all types of operating conditions, themanufacturer only recommend engine oils thatare API certified and meet the requirements ofChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

318


American Petroleum Institute (API) EngineOil Identification Symbol

This symbol meansthat the oil hasbeen certified bythe American Petro-leum Institute (API).The manufactureronly recommendsAPI Certified en-gine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engineoil as the chemicals can damage your en-gine. Such damage is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Selection — ACEA CategoriesFor countries that use the ACEA European OilCategories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend

you use engine oils that meet the requirementsof ACEA C3 and approved to Chrysler MS-6395or Fiat 9.55535–CR1.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4LEngineSAE 0W-20 API Certified engine oil is recom-mended for all operating temperatures. Thisengine oil improves low temperature startingand vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil fillercap also states the recommended engine oilviscosity grade for your engine.

If 0W-20 engine oil is not available, SAE 5W-20API Certified may be used as a temporarysuitable alternative. Please ensure that youswitch back to 0W-20 for the next oil change, asindicated by your vehicles automatic oil changeindicator.

Lubricants which do not have both the engineoil certification mark and the correct SAE vis-cosity grade number should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.2LEngineMOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recom-mended for all operating temperatures. Thisengine oil improves low temperature starting

and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil fillercap also states the recommended engine oilviscosity grade for your engine. For more infor-mation on engine oil filler cap location, refer tothe “Engine Compartment” illustration in thissection.

NOTE:MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved toMS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be usedwhen SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved toMS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 is not avail-able.

Synthetic Engine OilsYou may use synthetic engine oils provided therecommended oil quality requirements are met,and the recommended maintenance intervalsfor oil and filter changes are followed.

Materials Added To Engine OilThe manufacturer strongly recommendsagainst the addition of any additives (other thanleak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oilis an engineered product and its performancemay be impaired by supplemental additives.

319


Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And OilFiltersCare should be taken in disposing of usedengine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Usedoil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, canpresent a problem to the environment. Contactyour authorized dealer, service station or gov-ernmental agency for advice on how and whereused oil and oil filters can be safely discarded inyour area.

Engine Oil — Diesel EngineEngine Oil SelectionFor best performance and maximum protectionunder all types of operating conditions, themanufacturer recommends Fully Synthetic LowAsh engine oils that meet the requirements ofFIAT Qualification 9.55535-S1 and ACEA C1/C2.

Engine Oil ViscosityFor best performance and maximum protectionunder all types of operating conditions, themanufacturer recommends Fully Synthetic LowAsh 5W-30 engine oils that meet the require-ments of FIAT Qualification 9.55535-S1 andACEA C1/C2.

Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be replaced with anew filter at every engine oil change.

NOTE:For best access to the oil filter, a drive onhoist should be used instead of a chassishoist.

Engine Oil Filter SelectionThis manufacturer’s engines have a full-flowtype disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this typefor replacement. The quality of replacementfilters varies considerably. Only high qualityfilters should be used to assure most efficientservice. MOPAR® engine oil filters are highquality oil filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner FilterRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.

NOTE:Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-tions” maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) can provide a measure of protection inthe case of engine backfire. Do not removethe air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary forrepair or maintenance. Make sure that noone is near the engine compartment beforestarting the vehicle with the air inductionsystem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.Failure to do so can result in serious per-sonal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter SelectionThe quality of replacement engine air cleanerfilters varies considerably. Only high qualityfilters should be used to assure most efficientservice. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters area high quality filter and are recommended.

320


Maintenance-Free BatteryYour vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water,nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solutionand can burn or even blind you. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your eyes,skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a batterywhen attaching clamps. If acid splashes ineyes or on skin, flush the area immediatelywith large amounts of water. Refer to“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or sparks away from the bat-tery. Do not use a booster battery or anyother booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

(Continued)


• Battery posts, terminals, and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables onthe battery that the positive cable is at-tached to the positive post and the nega-tive cable is attached to the negative post.Battery posts are marked positive (+) andnegative (-) and are identified on the bat-tery case. Cable clamps should be tight onthe terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the batteryis in the vehicle, disconnect both vehiclebattery cables before connecting the char-ger to the battery. Do not use a “fastcharger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performance, your air condi-tioner should be checked and serviced by anauthorized dealer at the start of each warmseason. This service should include cleaning ofthe condenser fins and a performance test.Drive belt tension should also be checked atthis time.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your airconditioning system as the chemicals candamage your air conditioning components.Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

321


WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lu-bricants approved by the manufacturer foryour air conditioning system. Some unap-proved refrigerants are flammable and canexplode, injuring you. Other unapprovedrefrigerants or lubricants can cause thesystem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Re-fer to Warranty Information Book, locatedon the DVD, for further warranty informa-tion.

• The air conditioning system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoid riskof personal injury or damage to the sys-tem, adding refrigerant or any repair re-quiring lines to be disconnected should bedone by an experienced technician.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling –R134a – If EquippedR-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by theEnvironmental Protection Agency and is anozone-saving product. However, the manufac-

turer recommends that air conditioning servicebe performed by authorized dealer or otherservice facilities using recovery and recyclingequipment.

NOTE:Use only manufacturer approved A/C sys-tem PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling – HFO1234yf – If EquippedHFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is ahydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed bythe Environmental Protection Agency and is anozone-saving product. However, the manufac-turer recommends that air conditioning servicebe performed by authorized dealer or otherservice facilities using recovery and recyclingequipment.

NOTE:Use only manufacturer approved A/C sys-tem PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter – If EquippedRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while theblower is operating or personal injury mayresult.

Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including suchitems as seat tracks, door hinge pivot pointsand rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors andhood hinges, should be lubricated periodicallywith a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR®Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-tion and to protect against rust and wear. Priorto the application of any lubricant, the partsconcerned should be wiped clean to removedust and grit; after lubricating excess oil andgrease should be removed. Particular attentionshould also be given to hood latching compo-nents to ensure proper function. When perform-ing other underhood services, the hood latch,release mechanism and safety catch should becleaned and lubricated.

322


The external lock cylinders should be lubricatedtwice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant di-rectly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper BladesClean the rubber edges of the wiper blades andthe windshield periodically with a sponge or softcloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This willremove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for longperiods may cause deterioration of the wiperblades. Always use washer fluid when using thewipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind-shield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost orice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubberout of contact with petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-pending on geographical area and fre-quency of use. Poor performance of bladesmay be present with chattering, marks, wa-ter lines or wet spots. If any of these condi-tions are present, clean the wiper blades orreplace as necessary.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper armupward, this will allow the rear wiper blade to beraised off of the liftgate glass.

NOTE:The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fullyupward unless the pivot cap is raised first.

2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise thewiper blade off of the liftgate glass.

3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade androtate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pinfrom the wiper blade holder.

1 — Wiper Arm2 — Pivot Cap

323


4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiperblade holder at the end of the wiper arm, andfirmly press the wiper blade until it snaps intoplace.

5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivotcap into place.

Adding Washer FluidThe windshield and rear window washers sharethe same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is

located in the front of the engine compartment.Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoirat regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)and operate the system for a few seconds toflush out the residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, takesome washer fluid and apply it to a cloth ortowel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this willhelp blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washersystem in cold weather, select a solution ormixture that meets or exceeds the temperaturerange of your climate. This rating informationcan be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washersolvents are flammable. They could igniteand burn you. Care must be exercised whenfilling or working around the washer solution.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properly main-tained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of theexhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can bedetected inside the vehicle; or when the under-side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have anauthorized technician inspect the complete ex-haust system and adjacent body areas for bro-ken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositionedparts. Open seams or loose connections couldpermit exhaust fumes to seep into the passen-ger compartment. In addition, have the exhaustsystem inspected each time the vehicle israised for lubrication or oil change. Replace asrequired.

1 — Wiper Blade2 — Blade Pivot Pin3 — Wiper Arm4 — Wiper Blade Holder

324


WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Theycontain carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless and odorless. Breathing it canmake you unconscious and can eventuallypoison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things ToKnow Before Starting Your Vehicle” forfurther information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if youpark over materials that can burn. Suchmaterials might be grass or leaves cominginto contact with your exhaust system. Donot park or operate your vehicle in areaswhere your exhaust system can contactanything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use ofunleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline willdestroy the effectiveness of the catalyst asan emissions control device and may seri-ously reduce engine performance andcause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter canresult if your vehicle is not kept in properoperating condition. In the event of enginemalfunction, particularly involving enginemisfire or other apparent loss of perfor-mance, have your vehicle servicedpromptly. Continued operation of your ve-hicle with a severe malfunction couldcause the converter to overheat, resultingin possible damage to the converter andvehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalyticconverter will not require maintenance. How-ever, it is important to keep the engine properlytuned to assure proper catalyst operation andprevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:Intentional tampering with emissions con-trol systems can result in civil penaltiesbeing assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-tioning engine operation, a scorching odor maysuggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn offthe engine and allow it to cool. Service, includ-ing a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converterdamage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt theignition, when the transmission is in gear andthe vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing ortowing the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plugwires disconnected or removed, such aswhen diagnostic testing, or for prolongedperiods during very rough idle or malfunction-ing operating conditions.

325


Cooling System

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steam com-ing from under the hood, do not open thehood until the radiator has had time to cool.Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Engine Coolant ChecksCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-tion every 12 months (before the onset offreezing weather, where applicable). If the en-gine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the systemshould be drained, flushed, and refilled withfresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) byan authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/Ccondenser for any accumulation of bugs,leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently sprayingwater from a garden hose vertically down theface of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittlerubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of theconnection at the coolant recovery bottle andradiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature(but not running), check the cooling system pres-sure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining asmall amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) fromthe radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealingproperly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will beginto drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOTREMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAPWHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And RefillIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty orcontains visible sediment, have an authorizeddealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-freeze) (conforming to MS-12106).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals.

NOTE:Some vehicles require special tools to addcoolant properly. Failure to fill these systemsproperly could lead to severe internal enginedamage. If any coolant is needed to be addedto the system please contact your local autho-rized dealer.

Selection Of CoolantRefer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

326


CAUTION!• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other

than specified Organic Additive Technology(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may resultin engine damage and may decrease corro-sion protection. Organic Additive Technology(OAT) engine coolant is different and shouldnot be mixed with Hybrid Organic AdditiveTechnology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (an-tifreeze) is introduced into the cooling systemin an emergency, the cooling system will needto be drained, flushed, and refilled with freshOAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-basedengine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do notuse additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-ucts, as they may not be compatible with theradiator engine coolant and may plug theradiator.

(Continued)


• This vehicle has not been designed for usewith propylene glycol-based engine coolant(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-basedengine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-mended.

Adding CoolantYour vehicle has been built with an improvedengine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance inter-vals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can beused up to ten years or 150,000 miles(240,000 km) before replacement. To preventreducing this extended maintenance period, it isimportant that you use the same engine coolant(OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106)throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for us-ing Organic Additive Technology (OAT) enginecoolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT(Organic Additive Technology) that meets therequirements of Chrysler Material StandardMS-12106.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT enginecoolant that meets the requirements ofChrysler Material Standard MS-12106 anddistilled water. Use higher concentrations(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled ordeionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The useof lower quality water will reduce the amountof corrosion protection in the engine coolingsystem.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibilityto maintain the proper level of protectionagainst freezing according to the temperaturesoccurring in the area where the vehicle is oper-ated.

327


NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools toadd coolant properly. Failure to fill thesesystems properly could lead to severeinternal engine damage. If any coolant isneeded to be added to the system pleasecontact your local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) typesis not recommended and can result incooling system damage. If HOAT and OATcoolant are mixed in an emergency, havea authorized dealer drain, flush, and refillwith OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap must be fully tightened to prevent lossof engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensurethat engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to theradiator from the coolant recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned ifthere is any accumulation of foreign material onthe sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT”on the cooling system pressure cap are asafety precaution. Never add engine cool-ant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-heated. Do not loosen or remove the capto cool an overheated engine. Heat causespressure to build up in the cooling system.To prevent scalding or injury, do not re-move the pressure cap while the system ishot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than theone specified for your vehicle. Personalinjury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine CoolantUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-tifreeze) is a regulated substance requiringproper disposal. Check with your local authori-ties to determine the disposal rules for yourcommunity. To prevent ingestion by animals orchildren, do not store ethylene glycol-basedengine coolant in open containers or allow it toremain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by

a child or pet, seek emergency assistanceimmediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-diately.

Coolant LevelThe coolant bottle provides a quick visualmethod for determining that the coolant level isadequate. With the engine OFF and cold, thelevel of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in thebottle should be between the ranges indicatedon the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full,so there is no need to remove the radiator capunless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise yourservice attendant of this. As long as the engineoperating temperature is satisfactory, the cool-ant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) isneeded to maintain the proper level, only OATcoolant that meets the requirements of ChryslerMaterial Standard MS-12106 should be addedto the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

328


Points To Remember

NOTE:When the vehicle is stopped after a fewmiles/kilometers of operation, you may ob-serve vapor coming from the front of theengine compartment. This is normally a re-sult of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator andbeing vaporized when the thermostat opens,allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) toenter the radiator.If an examination of your engine compartmentshows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor willsoon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiatorand in the coolant expansion bottle. If enginecoolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, thecontents of the coolant expansion bottle mustalso be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-tions are required, the cooling system shouldbe pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant(conforming to MS-12106) and distilled waterfor proper corrosion protection of your enginewhich contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottleoverflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If yourvehicle is equipped with air conditioning,keep the front of the condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer orWinter operation. If replacement is ever neces-sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.Other designs may result in unsatisfactory en-gine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gasmileage, and increased emissions.

Brake SystemIn order to assure brake system performance,all brake system components should be in-spected periodically. Refer to the “MaintenanceSchedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failureand possibly a collision. Driving with yourfoot resting or riding on the brake pedal canresult in abnormally high brake tempera-tures, excessive lining wear, and possiblebrake damage. You would not have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master CylinderThe fluid in the master cylinder should bechecked when performing under hood servicesor immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” isilluminated.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinderarea before removing the cap. If necessary, addfluid to bring the fluid level up to the require-ments described on the brake fluid reservoir.With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected tofall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid levelshould be checked when pads are replaced.However, low fluid level may be caused by aleak and a checkup may be needed.

329


Use only manufacturer’s recommended brakefluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommendedbrake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining YourVehicle” for further information. Using thewrong type of brake fluid can severelydamage your brake system and/or impairits performance. The proper type of brakefluid for your vehicle is also identified onthe original factory installed hydraulic mas-ter cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)


• To avoid contamination from foreign matteror moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluidthat has been in a tightly closed container.Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap se-cured at all times. Brake fluid in a opencontainer absorbs moisture from the air re-sulting in a lower boiling point. This maycause it to boil unexpectedly during hard orprolonged braking, resulting in sudden brakefailure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engineparts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.Brake fluid can also damage painted andvinyl surfaces, care should be taken toavoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid tocontaminate the brake fluid. Brake sealcomponents could be damaged, causingpartial or complete brake failure. Thiscould result in a collision.

Automatic Transmission - IfEquippedSelection Of LubricantIt is important to use the proper transmissionfluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-mance and life. Use only the manufacturer’sspecified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sectionfor fluid specifications. It is important to maintainthe transmission fluid at the correct level usingthe recommended fluid. No chemical flushesshould be used in any transmission; only theapproved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than themanufacturer’s recommended fluid maycause deterioration in transmission shiftquality and/or torque converter shudder. Re-fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”in this section for fluid specifications.

330


Special AdditivesThe manufacturer strongly recommendsagainst using any special additives in the trans-mission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) isan engineered product and its performancemay be impaired by supplemental additives.Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to thetransmission. The only exception to this policy isthe use of special dyes for diagnosing fluidleaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as theymay adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your trans-mission as the chemicals can damage yourtransmission components. Such damage isnot covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Fluid Level CheckThe fluid level is preset at the factory and doesnot require adjustment under normal operatingconditions. Routine fluid level checks are notrequired, therefore the transmission has nodipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your

transmission fluid level using special servicetools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmissionmalfunction, visit your authorized dealer imme-diately to have the transmission fluid levelchecked. Operating the vehicle with an im-proper fluid level can cause severe transmis-sion damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit yourauthorized dealer immediately. Severe trans-mission damage may occur. Your authorizeddealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluidlevel accurately.

Fluid And Filter ChangesUnder normal operating conditions, the fluidinstalled at the factory will provide satisfactorylubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not re-quired. However, change the fluid and filter ifthe fluid becomes contaminated (with water,etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled forany reason.

Manual Transmission – If EquippedLubricant SelectionUse only the manufacturers recommendedtransmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Ve-hicle” for further information.

Fluid Level CheckCheck the fluid level by removing the fill plug.The fluid level should be between the bottom ofthe fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in(4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the properlevel.

Frequency Of Fluid ChangeUnder normal operating conditions, the fluidinstalled at the factory will give satisfactorylubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluidchanges are not necessary unless lubricant hasbecome contaminated with water.

NOTE:If contaminated with water, the fluid shouldbe changed immediately.

331


Sky Slider™ Top CareImmediate removal of any contaminant is rec-ommended. Regular washing of the top willenhance its life and appearance, and makesuccessive cleaning easier. Do not subject thetop to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum thetop and tracks. Periodically wipe dust and dirtfrom the top and inside of the tracks by handwith an alcohol dampened cloth.

WashingHand washing or an automatic car wash with asoft cloth system is preferred.

CAUTION!

Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand heldspray wand directly at the sides of the top, asthis can damage the seal and force waterpast the weather strips.

General CleaningCareful vacuuming of the top before washing ishelpful in removing dust and other foreign par-ticles.

If Hand Washing:

• Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun.

• Wet the entire vehicle before washing thetop.

• Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrubbrush, and a mild soap solution such as liquiddish washing soap. Do not use detergent.

• Scrub in all directions, covering an area ofabout two square feet at a time. Avoid heavyscrubbing.

• Rinse the entire vehicle with water to removeall soap and dirt from the top fabric and toprevent streaking on painted and chromesurfaces.

• Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuum-ing the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum willdecrease the tops drying time, ensure re-moval of all dirt, and delete streaks in thematerial.

• Multiple cleanings may be necessary to re-move stubborn stains. If stains persist, con-tact your local authorized dealership for fur-ther suggestions.

CAUTION!

Never use an abrasive type cleaner orbleaches. Cleaners should not contain sili-cones, organic solvents, petroleum distil-lates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the topis thoroughly dry before opening it.

Additional Cleaning ProcedureFor additional cleaning assistance in removingstubborn stains, apply MOPAR® ConvertibleCloth Top Cleaner or equivalent to the completestain, extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond thestain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in alldirections over the stain. Avoid heavy scrub-bing. Rinse the area with warm water. If thestain is still apparent, repeat the cleaning pro-cedure. When the stain is no longer showing,rinse the complete top with warm water. Let thetop dry before opening it.

332


ProtectionFor appearance purposes, you may wish toprotect the acrylic (cloth) top periodically. Afabric protectant such as Scotchguard® is sug-gested. The top should be clean and dry beforeapplication of the protectant.

CAUTION!

Avoid getting Scotchguard® on the sur-rounding weather strips, moldings, paint, orglass. Damage to these items might occur.

Weather Strip CareLubricate the weather strips periodically withMOPAR® Weather Strip Lubricant or equiva-lent, to keep them soft and pliable.

Appearance Care And ProtectionFrom CorrosionProtection Of Body And Paint FromCorrosionVehicle body care requirements vary accordingto geographic locations and usage. Chemicalsthat make roads passable in snow and ice andthose that are sprayed on trees and road sur-

faces during other seasons are highly corrosiveto the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,which exposes your vehicle to airborne con-taminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle isoperated, extreme hot or cold weather andother extreme conditions will have an adverseeffect on paint, metal trim, and underbody pro-tection.

The following maintenance recommendationswill enable you to obtain maximum benefit fromthe corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re-moval of paint and protective coatings from yourvehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always washyour vehicle in the shade using MOPAR®Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinsethe panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits haveaccumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover toremove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such asMOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,stains and to protect your paint finish. Takecare never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and powerbuffing that may diminish the gloss or thin outthe paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaningmaterials such as steel wool or scouringpowder that will scratch metal and paintedsurfaces.

(Continued)

333



• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if youdrive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-riage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the loweredges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunkbe kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches inthe paint, touch them up immediately. Thecost of such repairs is considered the re-sponsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collisionor similar cause that destroys the paint andprotective coating, have your vehicle re-paired as soon as possible. The cost of suchrepairs is considered the responsibility of theowner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that suchmaterials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,consider mud or stone shields behind eachwheel.

• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratchesas soon as possible. Your authorized dealerhas touch up paint to match the color of yourvehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-num and chrome plated wheels, should becleaned regularly with a mild soap and waterto prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brakedust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with Dark VaporChrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel clean-ers, abrasives or polishing compounds.They will permanently damage this finishand such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILDSOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.Used on a regular basis this is all that isrequired to maintain this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, abristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not useoven cleaner. These products may damagethe wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automaticcar washes that use acidic solutions or harshbrushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaneror equivalent is recommended.

334


Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – IfEquippedStain Repel seats may be cleaned in the follow-ing manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible byblotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damptowel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® TotalClean, or a mild soap solution to a clean,damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth andremove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel toremove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other formof protectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior CareInstrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glaresurface, which minimizes reflections in thewindshield. Do not use protectants or other

products, which may cause undesirable reflec-tions. Use soap and warm water to restore thelow glare surface.

Cleaning Interior Trim

Clean interior trim with a damp cloth andMOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, and if nec-essary, follow with MOPAR® Spot & Stain Re-mover or equivalent. Do not use harsh cleanersor Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean orequivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

Cleaning Leather Upholstery

MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifi-cally recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preservedby regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasiveand damage the leather upholstery and shouldbe removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-born soils can be removed easily with a softcloth and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent.Care should be taken to avoid soaking leatherupholstery with any liquid. Please do not usepolishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean

leather upholstery. Application of a leather con-ditioner is not required to maintain the originalcondition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaningpurposes. Many are potentially flammable,and if used in closed areas they may causerespiratory harm.

Cleaning HeadlightsYour vehicle is equipped with plastic headlightsand fog lights that are lighter and less suscep-tible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass andtherefore different lens cleaning proceduresmust be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching thelenses and reducing light output, avoid wipingwith a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash witha mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, sol-vents, steel wool or other aggressive material toclean the lenses.

335


Glass SurfacesAll glass surfaces should be cleaned on aregular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, orany commercial household-type glass cleaner.Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use cau-tion when cleaning the inside rear windowequipped with electric defrosters or the rightrear quarter window equipped with the radioantenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharpinstrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spraycleaner on the towel or rag that you are using.Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster LensesThe lenses in front of the instruments in thisvehicle are molded in clear plastic. When clean-ing the lenses, care must be taken to avoidscratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soapsolution may be used, but do not use highalcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap isused, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt MaintenanceDo not bleach, dye or clean the belts withchemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This willweaken the fabric. Sun damage can alsoweaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Do not remove thebelts from the car to wash them. Dry with a softcloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or wornor if the buckles do not work properly.

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use anappropriate replacement fuse with the sameamp rating as the original fuse. Never re-place a fuse with another fuse of higher amprating. Never replace a blown fuse with metalwires or any other material. Failure to useproper fuses may result in serious personalinjury, fire and/or property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that theignition is off and that all the other servicesare switched off and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contactan authorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety sys-tems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system, gear-box system) or steering system blows,contact an authorized dealer.

336


Power Distribution CenterThe Power Distribution Center is located in theengine compartment near the battery. This cen-ter contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses andrelays. A label that identifies each component isprinted on the inside of the cover.

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F06 — — Not Used

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F07 15AmpBlue

— Powertrain Con-trol Module - PCM

F08 25AmpClear

— Engine ControlModule (ECM)


F10 20AmpYel-low

— Power TakeoffUnit (PTU)


F12 20AmpYel-low

— Brake VacuumPump - IfEquipped

F13 10AmpRed


Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F14 10AmpRed

— Drivetrain ControlModule (DTCM) /Power Take-OffUnit (PTU) – IfEquipped / BrakeSystem Module(BSM)


F16 20AmpYel-low

— Powertrain



F19 — 40Amp

Green

Starter Solenoid

Power Distribution Center

337


Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F20 10AmpRed

— A/C CompressorClutch


F22 5AmpTan

— Radiator Fan

F23 70AmpTan

— Body ControllerModule (BCM) -Feed 1



F26 — 30AmpPink

Fuel Heater - Die-sel Only


F28 15AmpBlue

— TransmissionControl Module(TCM)

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description


F30 10AmpRed




F33 — 30AmpPink

Driver Door Mod-ule (DDM) - IfEquipped

F34 — 30AmpPink

Body ControllerModule (BCM) -Feed 3



Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F37 — 50AmpRed

Voltage Stabiliza-tion Module(VSM) - IfEquipped WithStop/Start EngineOption

F38 — 60AmpYel-low

Glow Plugs - Die-sel Only - IfEquipped

F39 — 40Amp

Green

HVAC Blower Mo-tor

F40 — 20AmpBlue

Trailer Tow ParkLight - IfEquipped

F41 — 60AmpYel-low

Body ControllerModule (BCM) -Feed 2

338


Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F42 — 30AmpPink

Electric ParkBrake (EPB) -Left

F43 20AmpYel-low

— Trailer Tow LeftStop/Turn Light -If Equipped

F44 — 30AmpPink

Trailer Tow /7-Way Connector- If Equipped

F45 — 30AmpPink

Passenger DoorModule (PDM) - IfEquipped

F46 — 25AmpClear

Sunroof / Skys-lider - If Equipped

F47 — 30AmpPink

Drivetrain ControlModule (DTCM)

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description


F49 — 30AmpPink

Power Inverter(115V A/C) - If

Equipped

F50 — 30AmpPink

Power Liftgate - IfEquipped



F53 — 30AmpPink

BSM-ECU &Valves

F54 — 30AmpPink

Urea Heater Con-trol Unit - If

Equipped WithDiesel Engine

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F55 10AmpRed

— Blind Spot Sen-sors / Compass /Rearview CameraIf Equipped / Rear

Seat HeaterSwitches / TrunkLamp W/ Flash-lamp Charger

F56 15AmpBlue

— Ignition NodeModule (IGNM)/

KIN/RF Hub/Electric Steering

Column Lock(ESL)

F57 20AmpYel-low

— Fuel Pump Motor

F58 10AmpRed

— Occupant Classifi-cation Module

339


Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description


F60 20AmpYel-low

— Power Outlet -Center Console


F62 10AmpRed

— Heated Mirrors - IfEquipped

F63 25AmpClear

— Front HeatedSeats - IfEquipped

F64 25AmpClear

— Heated SteeringWheel / Rear

Heated Seats - IfEquipped

F65 15AmpBlue

— HVAC (ECC) /Instrument Panel

Cluster (IPC)

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F66 10AmpRed

— In Car Tempera-ture Sensor / Hu-midity Sensor /

Driver Assist Sys-tem Module

(DASM) / ParkAssist (PAM)



F69 10AmpRed

— Power TransferUnit Switch

(TSBM) / ActiveGrill Shutter(AGS) - IfEquipped


F71 20AmpYel-low

— Windshield De-Icer - If Equipped

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F72 5AmpTan

— Intelligent BatterySensor (IBS) IfEquipped With

Stop/Start EngineOption

F72 20AmpYel-low

— Trailer Tow RTStop / Turn Lights

- If Equipped

F73 — 30AmpPink

Rear Defroster /Defogger

F74 — 20AmpBlue

Engine ControlModule (ECM)

Gasoline Engine -If Equipped

F75 20AmpYel-low

— Cigar Lighter

340


Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F76 20AmpYel-low

— Rear DifferentialModule (RDM) - If

Equipped

F77 10AmpRed

— Fuel DoorRelease/BrakePedal Switch

F78 10AmpRed

— Diagnostic Port /Steering ColumnControl Module(SCCM) / DigitalTV - If Equipped

F79 10AmpRed

— Integrated CenterStack (ICS) /HVAC / Aux

Switch Bank Mod-ule (ASBM) / In-strument PanelCluster (IPC)

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F80 20AmpYel-low

— Radio / CD - IfEquipped



F83 — 30AmpPink

HeadlampWasher Pump - If

Equipped

F84 — 40Amp

Green

Brake SystemModule (BSM) -Pump Motor IfEquipped WithDiesel Engine

F84 — 20AmpBlue

Trailer TowBackup Lights - If

Equipped WithGasoline Engine


Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description



F88 15AmpBlue

— Collision Mitiga-tion Module

(CMM) / Electro-chromatic Mirror /

Smart CameraModule - IfEquipped

F89 10AmpRed

— Headlamp Level-ing - If Equipped



F92 20AmpYel-low

— Rear Power Out-let

341


Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F93 — 40Amp

Green

Brake SystemModule (BSM) -Pump Motor - IfEquipped With

Gasoline Engine

F94 — 30AmpPink

Electric ParkBrake (EPB) -

Right

F95 10AmpRed

— ElectrochromaticMirror / Rain Sen-sor / Sunroof - If

Equipped

F96 10AmpRed

— Occupant Re-straint Controller

(ORC)

F97 10AmpRed

— Occupant Re-straint Controller

(ORC)

Cav-ity

BladeFuse

Car-tridgeFuse

Description

F98 25AmpClear

— Audio Amplifier -If Equipped

F99 — 30AmpPink

Trailer Tow Mod-ule - If Equipped

With GasolineEngine


Interior FusesThe interior fuse panel is located in the passen-ger compartment on the left side dash panelunder the instrument panel.

Cavity BladeFuse Description

F13 15 AmpBlue

Low Beam Left

F32 10 AmpRed

Interior Lighting


F36 10 AmpRed

Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped

F38 20 AmpYellow

Deadbolt All Unlock

F43 20 AmpYellow

Washer Pump Front

F48 25 AmpClear

Fog Lamp RearLeft/Right – If

Equipped

F497.5

AmpBrown

Lumbar Support

F507.5

AmpBrown

Wireless ChargingPad If Equipped

F51 10 AmpRed

Driver WindowSwitch/Power Mir-rors – If Equipped

342



F537.5

AmpBrown

UCI Port (USB &AUX)

F89 10 AmpRed

Door Locks – DriverUnlock

F917.5

AmpBrown

Fog Lamp FrontLeft

F927.5

AmpBrown

Fog Lamp FrontRight

F93 10 AmpRed

Low Beam Right

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Cargo Lamp TL212–2

Bulb Number

Overhead ConsoleLamp

PLW214–2A

Reading Lamp WL212–2

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Low Beam/HighBeam (Bi-Halogen)

Headlamps

HIR2LL

Low Beam/HighBeam (Bi-Xenon)

Headlamps

D3S (Serviced at anAuthorized Dealer)

Front Park/DaytimeRunning Lamps

LED (Serviced at anAuthorized Dealer)

Front Turn SignalLamps

WY21W

Front Fog Lamps H11

Front Fog Lamps(Trailhawk)

PSX24W

Bulb Number

Rear Tail/StopLamps


Rear Turn SignalLamps

WY21W

Center HighMounted Stop Lamp

(CHMSL)


Back-Up Lamps W16W

License Plate Lamp W5W

Rear Fog Lamps W21W

BULB REPLACEMENTNOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-spheric conditions. This will usually clear asatmospheric conditions change to allow thecondensation to change back into a vapor.Turning the lamps on will usually acceleratethe clearing process.

343


Low Beam And High BeamHeadlampsBi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)Headlamps — If EquippedThe headlamps contain a type of high voltagedischarge light source. High voltage can remainin the circuit even with the headlamp switch offand the key removed. Because of this, youshould not attempt to service a HID headlamplight source yourself. If an HID headlamp lightsource fails, take your vehicle to an authorizeddealer for service.

NOTE:On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,when the headlamps are turned on, there isa blue hue to the lights. This diminishes andbecomes more white after approximately 10seconds, as the system charges.

WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulbsockets of HID headlamps when the head-lamp switch is turned ON. It may causeserious electrical shock or electrocution if notserviced properly. See your authorizeddealer for service.

Bi-Halogen Headlamps

1. Unlock upper access door in wheel liner.

2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to ac-cess the headlamp bulb cap.

3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counter-clockwise to unlock it.

4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assem-bly and rotate counterclockwise to remove fromthe housing.

5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical con-nector and then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.Oil contamination will severely shorten bulblife. If the bulb comes in contact with any oilysurface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

6. Install the bulb and connector assembly intothe headlamp housing and rotate clockwise tolock it in place.

7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housingand rotate clockwise to lock it in place.

8. Lock upper door in wheel liner.

Front Turn Signal Lamps1. Open the hood.

NOTE:Removal of the air cleaner filter housingmay be necessary prior to replacing bulbs inthe upper lamp assembly on the passengerside of the vehicle.

344


2. Twist the bulb and socket assembly counter-clockwise, and then remove the bulb and socketassembly from the lamp housing.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert thereplacement bulb.

4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into thehousing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lockit in place.

5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing, if re-moved.

Front Fog Lamp1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.

2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to ac-cess the bulb.

3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise,and remove the bulb and socket assembly fromthe fog lamp housing.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert thereplacement bulb.

CAUTION!


5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into theinto the fog lamp housing, and rotate the con-nector clockwise to lock it in place.

6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.

Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk)1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.

2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to ac-cess the bulb.

3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulbsocket and pull straight out from the fog lamp.

4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.

CAUTION!


5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the newbulb and reinstall by inserting the new bulbstraight into the fog lamp housing until it locks inplace.

6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.

Rear Turn Signal Lamp1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamphousing to the vehicle.

3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearwardto disengage the lamp from the vehicle.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and re-move from housing.

6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

345


7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.

8. Reconnect the electrical connector.

9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.

10. Close the liftgate.

Back-up Lamp1. Open the liftgate.

2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver topry the lower trim from the liftgate.

3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposingthe trim panel.

4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver,open the trim panel exposing the back of theliftgate lamp.


6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and re-move from lamp.


8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.

9. Connect the electrical connector.

10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.

11. Close the liftgate.

REAR FOG LAMP1. Using a small screwdriver or fiber stick,press the locking tab on the reflex side of thelamp and pull the lamp assembly out for re-moval.


3. Twist the socket counterclockwise and re-move from lamp.


5. Replace the bulb and twist the socket clock-wise to reinstall.

6. Connect the electrical connector.

7. Reinstall the lamp by sliding the hook on thefog lamp side over the locking tab in the bumperopening and pushing the reflex side into thebumper to snap the lamp assembly back intoplace.

License Plate Lamp1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward thelocking tab on the side of the lamp assemblyand pull down on the lamp assembly for re-moval.

2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstallthe lamp assembly into place ensuring thelocking tab is secure.

346


FLUID CAPACITIESU.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

2.4L and 3.2L Gasoline Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters

2.0L Diesel Engine 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

3.2 Liter Gasoline Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters

2.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Cooling System*

2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/EngineCoolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

3.2 Liter Gasoline Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/EngineCoolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 9.7 Quarts 9.2 Liters

2.0 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

347


FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic AdditiveTechnology).

Engine Oil – Non ACEA Catego-ries (2.4L Engine)

We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used when SAE 0W-20 engine oil is notavailable. Please ensure that you switch back to 0W-20 for the next oil change, as indicated by your vehiclesautomatic oil change indicator.

Engine Oil – ACEA Categories(2.4L Engine)

For countries that use ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend you use 0W-20 engineoils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3, and approved to Chrysler MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1.SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used when SAE 0W-20 engine oil is notavailable. Please ensure that you switch back to 0W-20 for the next oil change, as indicated by your vehiclesautomatic oil change indicator.

Engine Oil – Non ACEA Catego-ries (3.2L Engine)

We recommend you use SAE 5W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler MaterialStandard MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is notavailable.

348



Engine Oil – ACEA Categories(3.2L Engine)

For countries that use ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend you use 5W-20 engineoils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3, and approved to Chrysler MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1. SAE 5W-30engine oil approved to Chrysler MS-6395 or Fiat 9.55535–CR1 may be used when 5W-20 engine oil is not available.

Engine Oil – 2.0L Diesel Engine SAE Grade 5W-30 fully synthetic engine oil that meets Fiat classification 9.55535–S1

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.

Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.047 in [1.2 mm])

Spark Plugs – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])

Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 91 Research Octane Number (RON)

Fuel Selection – 3.2L Engine 91– 93 Research Octane Number (RON)

Fuel Selection – 2.0L Diesel En-gine

50 Cetane or higher (Less than 15 ppm Sulfur)

349


Chassis


Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid, orequivalent.Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance ofyour transmission.

Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 shouldbe used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 isacceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.

350


8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352• Maintenance Schedule – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .352• Maintenance Schedule – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

351


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Maintenance Schedule – GasolineEngineThe Scheduled Maintenance services listed inthis manual must be done at the times ormileages specified to protect your vehicle war-ranty and ensure the best vehicle performanceand reliability. More frequent maintenance maybe needed for vehicles in severe operatingconditions, such as dusty areas and very shorttrip driving. Inspection and service should alsobe done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

The oil change indicator system will remind youthat it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-uled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) equipped vehicles “Oil Change Re-quired” will be displayed in the EVIC and asingle chime will sound, indicating that an oilchange is necessary.

The oil change indicator message will illuminateapproximately 7,000 miles (11,200 km) after themost recent oil change was performed. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible,within 500 miles (800 km).

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will notmonitor the time since the last oil change.Change your vehicles oil if it has been 12months since your last oil change even ifthe oil change indicator message is NOTilluminated.

• Change your engine oil more often if youdrive your vehicle off-road for an ex-tended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oilchange intervals exceed 7,500 miles(12 000 km) or 12 months, whichevercomes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil changeindicator message after completing the sched-uled oil change. If this scheduled oil change isperformed by someone other than your autho-rized dealer the message can be reset byreferring to the steps described under ”Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutesafter a fully warmed engine is shut off.Checking the oil level while the vehicle is onlevel ground will improve the accuracy of theoil level reading. Add oil only when the levelis at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent andadd if required.

352


Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusualwear or damage. Rotate tires at the first signof irregular wear, even if it occurs before theoil indicator system turns on.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten theterminals as required.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,brake master cylinder, and add fluid asneeded.

• Check all lights and other electrical items forcorrect operation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenanceitems may result in damage to the vehicle.

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 12 MonthsMaintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect the front suspension, boot seals,

tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.❏ Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect parking brake function.❏ Replace the air conditioning/cabin air filter.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

353


15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.




354


22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect the front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.❏ Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect parking brake function.❏ Replace the air conditioning/cabin air filter.




355


30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.









356











357






358


67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect the front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.❏ Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect parking brake function.❏ Replace the air conditioning/cabin air filter.❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L & 3.2L engines). *

* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.




359


75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) which-

ever comes first.









360







tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.❏ Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect parking brake function.❏ Replace the air conditioning/cabin air filter.❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.




361






362






363






127,500 Miles (204,000 km) or204 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect the front suspension, boot seals,





364


135,000 Miles (216,000 km) or 216 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L & 3.2L engines). *

* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.




142,500 Miles (228,000 km) or228 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect the front suspension, boot seals,





365


† This maintenance is recommended by themanufacturer to the owner, but is not required tomaintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!


Maintenance Schedule – DieselEngineTo help you have the best driving experiencepossible, the manufacturer has identified thespecific vehicle maintenance service intervalsthat are required to keep your vehicle operatingproperly and safely.

The manufacturer recommends that thesemaintenance intervals be performed at yourselling dealer. The technicians at your dealer-ship know your vehicle best, and have accessto factory trained information, genuine

150,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 240 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) which-

ever comes first.




366


MOPAR® parts, and specially designed elec-tronic and mechanical tools that can help pre-vent future costly repairs.

The maintenance intervals shown should beperformed as indicated in this section.

NOTE:

• Under no circumstances should oilchange intervals exceed 12,500 miles(20 000 km) or 12 months, whichevercomes first.

• Flush and replace the engine coolant at120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)whichever comes first.

At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about 15 minutesafter a fully warmed engine is shut off.Checking the oil level while the vehicle is onlevel ground will improve the accuracy of theoil level reading. Add oil only when the levelis at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent andadd if required.

Once a Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusualwear or damage. Rotate tires at the first signof irregular wear, even if it occurs before theoil indicator system turns on.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten theterminals as required.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoirand brake master cylinder, add as needed.

• Check all lights and other electrical items forcorrect operation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

• Inspect for the presence of water in the fuelfilter/water separator unit.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenanceitems may result in damage to the vehicle.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages for the required maintenanceintervals.

367






368


25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine fuel filter.









369


50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine fuel filter.❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer

towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desertoperation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather,above 90°F (32°C).




370


62,500 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Inspect the CV joints.❏ Inspect the front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.❏ Inspect brake linings, replace if necessary.❏ Inspect parking brake function.❏ Replace the air conditioning/cabin air filter.




371


75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine fuel filter.









372


WARNING!


100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.❏ Rotate tires.❏ Replace the engine fuel filter.❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer

towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desertoperation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather,above 90°F (32°C).




373


374


9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378• ARGENTINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379• AUSTRALIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379• AUSTRIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379• BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380• BELGIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380• BOLIVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380• BRAZIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381• BULGARIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381• CHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381• CHINA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382• COLOMBIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382• COSTA RICA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382• CROATIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383• CZECH REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383• DENMARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383• DOMINICAN REPUBLIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384• ECUADOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384• EL SALVADOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

375


• ESTONIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385• FINLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385• FRANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385• GERMANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386• GREECE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386• GUATEMALA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386• HONDURAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387• HUNGARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387• IRELAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387• ITALY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388• LATVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388• LITHUANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388• LUXEMBURG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389• NETHERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389• NEW ZEALAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389• NORWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390• PANAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390• PARAGUAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390• PERU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391• POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391• PORTUGAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391• PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN ISLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392• REUNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392• ROMANIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392• RUSSIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393• SLOVAKIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393• SLOVENIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393

376


• SPAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394• SWEDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394• SWITZERLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394• TAIWAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395• TURKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395• UKRAINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395• UNITED KINGDOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396• URUGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396• VENEZUELA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

377


IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe manufacturer distributors are vitally inter-ested in your satisfaction with their productsand services. If a servicing problem or otherdifficulty should occur, we recommend that youtake the following steps:

Discuss the problem at the authorized dealerwith the dealer principal or the service manager.Management personnel at the authorizeddealer are in the best position to resolve theproblem.

When you contact the distributor please provideall of the following information:

• Your name, address and phone number.

• Vehicle Identification Number (this 17 digitnumber is found on an etched plate or label,located on the left front corner of the instru-ment panel, visible through the windshield. Itis also available from your vehicle registra-tion or title).

• Selling and servicing authorized dealer.

• Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometerdistance.

• Service history of your vehicle.

• An accurate description of the problem andthe conditions under which it occurs.

378


ARGENTINAChrysler Argentina S.A

Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435

C1107CII

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel.: +54-11-4891 7900

Fax: +54-11-4891 7901

AUSTRALIAChrysler Australia Pty. Ltd.

ACN 124 956 505

PO Box 23267, Docklands Victoria 3008

Ph. (03) 8698-0200

AUSTRIAJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 20 1741International Toll NumberTel: + 39 02 444 12 045

Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 201745International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 201747International Toll NumberTel: Not Available

(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main Europeancountries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.

379


BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEANInteramericana Trading Corporation

Warrens, St. Michael

Barbados, West Indies

BB22026, P0 Box 98

Tel.: 246–417–8000

Fax: 246–425–2888

BELGIUMJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 55 888International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12 045

Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 18 142International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 16 166International Toll NumberTel: Not Available

BOLIVIAOvando & Cia S.A.

Av. Cristobal de Mendoza (2do Anillo) y CanalIsuto

Santa Cruz, Bolivia

PO Box 6852

Tel.: (591-3) 336 3100

Fax: (591-3) 334 0229


380


BRAZILChrysler do Brasil

Rua Funchal, 418 - 16º andar CJ 1601/1602,Vila Olímpia

04551-060 Sao Paulo – S.P., Brazil

Tel: +5511 4949 3900

Fax: +5511 4949 3905

BULGARIABALKAN STAR

Resbarska Str. 5

1510 Sofia

Tel.: 359 2 91988

Fax: 359 2 945 40 14

CHILEComercial Chrysler S.A.

Av. Americo Vespucio 1601, Quilicura

Santiago, Chile

Zip Code 101931-7, 367-V

Tel.: +562 837 1300

Fax: +562 6039196


381


CHINAChrysler Group (China) Sales Limited

16F,Gemdale Plaza Tower A

No.91 Jian Guo Road

Chaoyang District

Beijing 100022, P.R. China

Chrysler Brand Tel: 400-650-1195

Dodge Brand Tel: 400-650-0118

COLOMBIAChrysler Colombia S.A.

Avenida Calle 26 # 70A-25

Zip Code 110931

Bogotá Colombia

Tel: +57 1 745 5777

Fax: +57 1 410 5667

COSTA RICAAutoStar

La Uruca, frente al Banco Nacional

San José, Costa Rica

PO Box 705-1150

Tel.: (506) 295 - 0000

Fax: (506) 295 - 0052


382


CROATIAAutocommerce Hrvatska d.o.o.

Jablanska 80

10 000 Zagreb

Tel: 00 385 1 3869 001

Fax: 00 385 1 3869 069

CZECH REPUBLICFiat CR s.r.o.

Karolinska 650/1

186 00 Praha 8 – Karlin

Czech Republic

Tel: +420 2 24806 111

Fax: +420 2 24806 312

DENMARKJeep Customer Service*


Chrysler Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 1692 1692Local Toll Free NumberTel: 80 20 30 35International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12046

Dodge Customer Service*Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 36343 000Local Toll Free NumberTel: 80 20 30 36International Toll NumberTel: Not Available


383


DOMINICAN REPUBLICReid y Compañia

John F. Kennedy Casi Esq. Lope de Vega

Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic

Tel.: (809) 562–7211

Fax: (809) 565-8774

ECUADORChrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador

Av. Juan Tanca Marengo km. 4.5

Guayaquil, Ecuador

Tel.: +593 4 2244101

Fax: +593 4 2244273

EL SALVADORGrupo Q del Salvador

Ave. Las Amapolas (Autopista Sur)

Blvd. Los Próceres y Avenida No. 1, Lomas deSan Francisco,

San Salvador, El Salvador

Zip Code 152

Tel.: +503 2248 6400

Fax: +503 278 5731


384


ESTONIASilberauto AS

Järvevana tee 11

11314 Tallinn

Tel.: +372 53337946

Tel.: 06 266 072

Fax: 06 266 066

[email protected]

FINLANDAutoFennica

Ristipellontie 5

00390 HELSINKI

Tel: 020 54771

Fax: 020 5477 485

FRANCEJeep Customer Service*





385


GERMANYJeep Customer Service*

Universal Toll Free NumberTel: 00 800 0 426 5337Local Toll Free NumberTel: 0800 0426533International Toll NumberTel: +39 02 444 12 045



GREECEChrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas

240-242 Kifisias Avenue

15231 Halandri Athens, Greece

Tel.: +30 210 6700800

Fax: +30 210 6700820

GUATEMALAGrupo Q del Guatemala

Km 16 carretera a El Salvador, condado con-cepción

Ciudad de Guatemala, Guatemala

Zip Code 1004

Tel.: +502 6685 9500


386


HONDURASGrupo Q de Honduras

Blvd.. Centro América frente a Plaza Miraflores,

Tegucigalpa, Honduras

Tel.: +504 2290 3700

Fax: +504 2232 6564

HUNGARYFiat Hungary Co. Ltd.

H-1123 Budapest

Alkotás u. 53.

Tel.:+36-1-458-3100

Fax: +36-1-458-3148

IRELANDJeep Customer Service*





387


ITALYJeep Customer Service*




LATVIATC MOTORS LTD.

41 Krasta Str.

LV-1003 Riga

Tel.: +37167812 313

Mob.: +371 29498662

Fax: +371 67812313

SIA “Autobrava”

G.Astras street 5,

LV-1084 Riga

Tel.: +371 67812312

Mob.: +371 29498662

Fax +371 671 462 56

LITHUANIASilberauto AS

Pirklių g. 9

LT-02300 Vilnius

Tel +370 52 665956, GSM +370 698 24950

Fax +370 52 665951

[email protected]


388


LUXEMBURGJeep Customer Service*




NETHERLANDSJeep Customer Service*




NEW ZEALANDChrysler New Zealand

Private Bag 14907

Panmure New Zealand

Tel: 09573 7800

Fax: 09573 7808


389


NORWAYRSA BIL

Øvre Eikervei 77

N-3048 Drammen

Tel.: +47 32 21 88 00

Fax: +47 32 82 60 99

PANAMAAutomotora Autostar S. A.

Avenida Domingo Diaz, Via Tocumen, Frente ala Urbanizacion El Crisol

Panamá, Panamá

Tel.: +507 233 7222

Fax: +507 233 2843

PARAGUAYGarden Autolider S.A

Av. República de Argentina esq. FacundoMachain

Asuncion, Paraguay

Tel.: +595 21 664 580

Fax: +595 21 664 579


390


PERUDivemotor S.A.

Av. Canada 1160, Urb. Sta. Catalina

Lima, Peru

Zip Code Lima 13

Tel.: (51-1) 712 2000

Fax: (51-1) 712 2002

POLANDFiat Auto Poland S.A.

ul. M. Grażyńskiego 141,

43-300 Bielsko-Biała

Tel: +48 (033) 813-21-00, 813-51-00

PORTUGALChrysler Portugal S.A.

Qta. da Fonte – Edif. Dª Amélia

Rua Victor Câmara, 2 1ªA

2770-229 Paço de Arcos

Portugal

Tel : +351 (0)21 323 91 00

Fax: +351 (0)21 323 91 99


391


PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGINISLANDSChrysler International Services, S.A.

Calle 1 lote 1 Suite 205, Metro Office Park

Guaynabo, Puerto Rico

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 009191857

Tel.: 7877825757

Fax: 7877823345

REUNIONCOTRANS AUTOMOBILES

17 Bd du Chaudron, 97490 Sainte Clotilde

Tel: 0262920000

Fax: 0262488443

ROMANIAAUTO ITALIA IMPEX SRL

Bd. Timisoara nr. 60/D

Bucuresti, ROMANIA

Tel: +40 (0)21.444.333.4

Fax: +40 (0)21.444.2779

www.autoitalia.ro


392


RUSSIAChrysler Russia SAO

Testovskaya street, 10

123317 Moscow,

Tel +7(495)-745-26-36

Fax +7(495)-745-26-37

SLOVAKIAFiat SR s.r.o

Dubravska cesta 2

841 05 Bratislava 45

Slovakia

Tel: +421 2 593099 901

Fax: +421 2 593099 911

SLOVENIAAvto Triglav d.o.o.

Dunajska 122

1000 Ljubljana

Tel: 01 5883 400

Fax: 01 5883 487


393


SPAINJeep Customer Service*




SWEDENJeep Customer Service*




SWITZERLANDJeep Customer Service*





394


TAIWANChrysler Taiwan Co. , LTD.

13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza

1109 Min Sheng East Road, Section 3

Taipei Taiwan R.O.C.

Tel.: 080081581

Fax: 886225471871

TURKEYTofaş Türk Otomobil Fabrikasi A.S.

Büyükdere Cad, No:145 Tofaş Han Zincirlikuyu

ISTAMBUL

Tel: (0212) 444 5337

Tel: (0212) 275 2960

Telefax: (0212) 275 0357

UKRAINEPJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”

Chervonoarmiyska Str. 15/2

01004 Kyiv

Tel : +380 44 206 8888

+380 44 201 6060

Fax: +380 44 206 8889


395


UNITED KINGDOMJeep Customer Service*




URUGUAYSEVEL Uruguay S. A.

Convenio 820

Montevideo, Uruguay

Zip Code 11700

Tel: +598 220 02980

Fax: +598 2209-0116

VENEZUELAChrysler de Venezuela LLC

Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer. Zona IndustrialNorte

Valencia, Estado Caraboro

Tel: +(58) 241-613 2400

Fax: +(58) 241-613 2538

Fax: (58) 241-6132602

(58) 241-6132438

PO BOX: 1960

Services And Parts

Zona Industrial II, Av. Norte-Sur 5 C/C CalleEste-Oeste

C.C LD Center Local B-2

Valencia, Estado Carabobo

Telf: (58) 241-6132757

(58) 241-6132773

Fax: (58) 241-6132743


396


397


398


10INDEX

399


ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . .245, 246Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise

Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .327Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 44Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . .43, 46, 61, 170Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 42, 44Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . .41, 42, 44Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner

Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . .321Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . .203, 206Air Conditioning Controls. . . . . . . .203, 206Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . .215, 322Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .216Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . .321, 322Air Conditioning System . . . . . . .203, 206,

209, 213, 321Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . .16, 170Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . .16All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . .233Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . .8

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .326, 347Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .245Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .167Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . .16Assist, Hill Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .27Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .209, 213Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .226, 331

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .331, 350Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . .331Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . .330, 331Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . .330, 350Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . .331

Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . .27Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . .151Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

Keyless TransmitterReplacement (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .19

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 61Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . .322Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .247Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . .246Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Brake System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 350Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .329Warning Light . . . . . .166, 172, 174, 180

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . .226Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . .92Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 343

Camera, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Oil (Engine) . . . . . . .313, 314, 315, 319Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . .328

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . .60Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Cargo Area Features. . . . . . . . . . . . .156

400


Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Cargo Load Floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator

Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . .60Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 49Child Safety Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . .221Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . .202Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .261Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . .328Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .327Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .347Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . .328Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .326Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .326, 328Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .329Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328Selection of Coolant(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .326, 347, 348

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . .100Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Customer Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . .378Customer Programmable Features . . . . .191

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . .93Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .90Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . .158Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .61, 205Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . .316Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . .273Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . .91Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . .308

DisposalAntifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .328

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . .22Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . .79Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary(Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . .241Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .71Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . .246Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . .230Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . .247Electronic Speed Control

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 100Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .253Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 166, 184Emergency, In Case of

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .291Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

Emission Control System Maintenance. . .316Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 314, 315

401


Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . .60Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . .318Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .348Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . .30, 60Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . .222Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 347, 348Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . .318Oil Filler Cap . . . . . .313, 314, 315, 319Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 347Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Temperature Gauge . . . . .169, 179, 184

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . .319, 320Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . .319, 320Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .44Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . .17Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . .30, 60Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 324

Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .215, 322Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 348Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . .320

FlashersHazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Turn Signal . . . . . . . .62, 91, 168, 344

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . .222Floor Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Fluid Level Checks

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . .348Fog Lights. . . . . . . . . . .91, 166, 345, 346Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346Fog Lights, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . .112

Four Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .306Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .274Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 175, 184Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . .272, 348Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . .274, 275, 316Gasoline, Clean Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Gauges

Coolant Temperature . . . .169, 179, 184Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 175, 184Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 231Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . .307General Information . . . . . . . . .16, 20, 110Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

402


Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . .276Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . .276

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .291Headlights

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .344Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . .91Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .90On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Head Rests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203, 206Heater, Engine Block. . . . . . . . . . . . .224High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .166High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Hill Descent Control . . . . . . .177, 182, 249Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . .249

Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

IgnitionKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . .14Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 49Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . .69Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .164, 165, 166Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . .163Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . .335Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . .336Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . .335Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . .94Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .300Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .14

Lane Change and Turn Signals. . . . . . . .91Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Leveling, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . .158Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 343Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 88

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 46, 61, 170Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . .88Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .256Brake Warning . . . . .166, 172, 174, 180

403


Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .343Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . .91Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 345Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .291Headlight Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . .89Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 344Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . .90Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . .88Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .88High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . .166High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . .91Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . .249Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . .17Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .88Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .90Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . .170Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . .93Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Rear Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346

Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .168Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343Service Engine Soon (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Tire Pressure Monitoring(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 266Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Turn Signal . . . . .62, 91, 344, 345, 346Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . .266Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . .321Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . .318

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . .352, 366Malfunction Indicator Light

(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . .230, 331

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . .331Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . .331Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . .331, 350Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .344Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . .329Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . .85Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . .85Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . .8Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . .266Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . .91

404


New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . .60

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . .30, 42, 45Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . .40, 41, 42, 44Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . .272, 348Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 184

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 184Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 348

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . .318Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 348Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . .319Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . .319Recommendation . . . . . . . . .320, 347Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . .319, 320, 347

Oil Filter, Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Onboard Diagnostic System. . . . . . . . .316Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .316Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . .6Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .70

Overheating, Engine . . . .169, 179, 184, 291Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . .6

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . .120, 126Passing Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Power

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .151Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Sunroof (Sky Slider) . . . . . . . .149, 332Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts. . . . . . .38Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . .300Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Programming Transmitters (Remote

Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Radial Ply Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . .328Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . .202Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . .95Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75Rear ParkSense System. . . . . . . .120, 126Rear Seat, Folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . .158Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . .158Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .158Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

Shifting into Transfer CaseNeutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286Shifting out of Transfer CaseNeutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Reminder, Lights On. . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .18Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . .202Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .343Replacement Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 49

405


Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . .157Roll Over Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Roof

Sky Slider Power . . . . . . . . .149, 332Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . .61Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . .62Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . .30, 60Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . .352, 366Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .336Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 61

Adjustable Upper ShoulderAnchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .38Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 49Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . .35Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .35

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 78Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . .79, 83Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 170Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .348Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .14Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . .16Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .15Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378Shifting

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .226Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . .230

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . .70Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . .62, 91, 168, 344Sky Slider Power Roof . . . . . . . . . . . .149SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . .264Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261Spark Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . .348Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 348

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .98, 100Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . .224Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . .222

Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . .221Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Steering

Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . .202Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Sun Roof (Sky Slider Power) . . . . . . . .149Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag. . .38

406


Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . .96Temperature Control, Automatic

(ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209, 213Temperature Gauge, Engine

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 179, 184Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .156Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 257

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .263Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .261General Information . . . . . . . . . . .257High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . .258Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .266Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .168Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .262

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . .278To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Traction Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .282Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 283Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . .279Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . .278Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 330

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Transmitter Battery Service (RemoteKeyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Transmitter Programming (RemoteKeyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . .18Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .262Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 168, 344

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . .35Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . .8Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . .8Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . .16Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . .319, 320

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . .291Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .93, 324Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Wheel and Wheel Trim. . . . . . . . . . . .334

407


Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . .334Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . .28, 148, 151Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . .93, 324

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . .323Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . .323Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . .95Wireless Charging Pad . . . . . . . . . . .153

408


page position: 1 job: @zeta. ... · pdf filepage position: 2 job: @zeta. 14kl-126-eng-aa/div

Documents